ITMN e

Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
ITMN
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
f Important Notice on Product Safety

Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of the
parts may also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in prop-
erty damage.
Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected has to comply
with the applicable safety standards.
The same text in German:

Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Spannung. Einige Teile
können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverletzungen und
Sachschäden führen.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und
wartet.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Angeschlossene Geräte
müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.
Trademarks:
All designations used in this document can be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their
own purposes could violate the rights of their owners.
Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2000.
Issued by the Information and Communication Networks Group

Hofmannstraße 51
D-81359 München
Technical modifications possible.

Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
2 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
This document consists of a total of 272 pages. All pages are issue 1.
Contents
1 Notes on this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 Documentation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2 Symbols Used in the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.1 Symbol for Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.2 Symbols for Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3 Notes on Licensed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4 Form for your Ideas, Proposals and Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 Protective Measures, Handling /

Schutzmaßnahmen, Handhabung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1 Protective Measures / Schutzmaßnahmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.1 Electrical Fuses / Elektrische Sicherungen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.2 Protection Against Excessive High Contact Voltages /
Schutz gegen zu hohe Berührungsspannungen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.3 Protection Against Excessive Overvoltage
on the 48 / 60-Volts Power Supply Input /
Schutz gegen Überspannungen
beim 48 / 60-Volt-Stromversorgungseingang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.4 Isolations and Isolation Materials /
Isolierungen und Isoliermaterialien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.5 Fire Protection / Brandschutz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.6 Protection Against Extraneous Laser Light
and Protection of the Optical Modules Concerned /
Schutz gegen austretendes Laserlicht
und Schutz der betreffenden optischen Baugruppen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.7 Earthing or Grounding and Potential Balancing /
Erdung und Potenzialausgleich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2 Handling the Subrack /
Handhabung des Baugruppenträgers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.1 Front Door of the Device / Geräte-Vordertür. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.2 Equipment Cooling / Gerätekühlung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.3 Weight Information / Gewichtsangaben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.4 Components Subject to High Operating Temperatures /
Komponenten mit hoher Betriebstemperatur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3 Handling Modules, FO Equipment and Batteries /
Handhabung von Baugruppen, LWL und Batterien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.1 Handling Modules Containing Electrostatically-Sensitive Components /
Handhabung von Baugruppen mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen . 29
2.3.2 Handling Optical Fiber Connectors and Cables /
Handhabung von LWL-Steckverbindungen und -Leitungen . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3.3 Handling Batteries / Handhabung von Batterien. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.4 Switching OFF and ON / Aus- und Einschalten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4.1 Emergency Switching OFF / Notabschaltung “OFF”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4.2 Normal Switching OFF Procedure / Normales Abschalten “OFF” . . . . . . . 33
2.5 Switching ON / Einschalten “ON” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 3
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2 As-Delivered Condition, Checking for Missing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3 Tools and Accessories Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4 Mechanical Configuration and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4.1 Declaration of the CE Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2 Rack Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.2.2 The Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.2.2.1 The Equipment Grounding in a Rack Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.2.2 The Equipment Grounding in a Stand Alone Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.3 Cable Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.4 Subrack Arrangement in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.5 Subrack Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.6 Power Supply and DC-Current Supply Interfacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.6.1 Rack Supply and Rack Power Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2.6.2 Subpart Supply and Subrack Power Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2.7 Signalling Interfaces and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.8 External Synchronization Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.9 Spare Space below the Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.10 Power Supply Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.11 Signalling Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.12 External Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3 Construction of the Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3.1 Subrack Terminal Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.3 Electrical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.4 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.5 The Monitoring, the Signalling and the Operating Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3.5.1 Terminal Panel 301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3.5.2 Monitoring at an EIPS1- Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3.6 Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) for the LAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.4 Rack Compartments (Subracks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.4.1 Rack Terminal Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.4.1.1 Signal Distributor (SigVt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.4.1.2 Distributor Module 1 (VtM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.4.1.3 Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.4.1.4 Clock Line Adapter (CLA) Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.4.1.5 Fuse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.4.2 Subrack SLR for the SLD16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.4.3 Subrack SREL for the SLD16E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4.4 Terminal Fields (Panels) of SLD / SLT16-Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4.4.1 SLD/T16 Field 101 and Field 301 Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4.4.2 Terminal Field (Panel) 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.5 Spare Space for an Additional Subrack or an Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . 61
4 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.5 Power Supply and the Power Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.6 Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.1 Rack Terminal Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.2 Subrack Terminal Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.2.1 SLD/T16 Subrack Terminal Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.2.2 SLD/T16E Subrack Terminal Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.3 Electrical Communication Traffic Interfaces of the SLD16/SLT16 . . . . . . . 62
4.6.4 Optical Communication Traffic Interfaces SLD16 / SLT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.6.5 Surveillance and Power Supply of the Equipment
Using the Terminal Panel Interfaces of the SLD16 / SLT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.6.5.1 SLD/T16 x Terminal Panel (Section 101) with Slot 101 to 104 . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.6.5.2 SLD/T16 Terminal Panel (Section 301) with Locations 301 to 310 . . . . . . 63
4.6.5.3 SLD/T16E Terminal Panel (Section 301) with Locations 301 to 310 . . . . . 63
4.7 Overview of the General System Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5 Preparation of the Modules

and the Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.1 Preliminary Remarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.1.1 Modules in the Panel 101
(Sub Sections 101 to 104 / A1 to B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.2 Modules in the Sub Section
(Slots) 201 to 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
(Sub Sections 301 to 314 / A1 to P1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.4 Modules in the Sub Sections
(Slots) 401 to 417 and 501 to 511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.5 Modules Containing
the Management Information Base (MIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.1.6 Modules in the Sub Section (Slot) 512
with the Sub-Slots 512_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.2 Settings for the Modules in the Subrack Terminal
Panel 301, 400, 500,
and the Procedures on the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.2.1 Clock Line Adapter (CLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.2.2 Telemetry Interface Module (TIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.3 Subrack Terminal Panel 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.4 Modules SCU-R2 and SCU-R2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.5 OB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.6 OP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.2.7 OIS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2.7.1 OIS4/OIS4-2 and OIS16/OIS16-2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2.7.2 OIS 1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.3 Subrack Equipping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.3.1 Subrack SLD16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3.1.1 Electrical Tributary Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3.1.2 Optical Tributary Interfaces / Line Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.3.1.3 Optical Booster / Preamplifier (OB / OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.3.1.4 EIPS1 Backup Switch Line (EBSL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.3.1.5 Power Supply Unit Tributary Protection (PSUTP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 5
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.1.6 Switching Network Line (SNL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

5.3.1.7 Overhead Access (OHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.3.1.8 Telemetry Interface (TIF) Module, TIF- Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.3.1.9 Clock Unit Line CLL, CLL64-2
and Use of an External CLA Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.3.1.10 Synchronous Control Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.3.1.11 Subrack Alarm Panel and Phone Interface (SRAP-PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.3.1.12 Telephone Handset for the Two-Wire-Interface (2WHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.3.2 Subrack SLD16E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.3.2.1 Electrical Tributary Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.3.2.2 Optical Tributary Interfaces / Line Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.3.2.3 Optical Booster / Preamplifier (OB / OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.3.2.4 EIPS1 Backup Switch Line (EBSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.3.2.5 Power Supply Unit Tributary Protection (PSUTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.3.2.6 Through-Connection Card for 4xSTM-1 (CS4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.3.2.7 Switching Network Line (SNL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.3.2.8 Overhead Access (OHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.3.2.9 Telemetry Interface (TIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
and the Use of an External CLA Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.3.2.11 Synchronous Control Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.3.2.12 Subrack Alarm Panel and the Phone Interface (SRAP-PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.3.2.13 Telephone Handset for the Two-Wire-Interface (2WHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.4 Typical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.4.1 Configuration as a SLD16
with a Flexible Access to the Tributary Channels
and the Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 Fiber . . . . . . 100
5.4.2 Configuration as a SLT16
with a Fixed Access to the Tributary Channels
and the 1+1 Multiplex Section Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.4.3 Configuration as a SLD16 with
Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 2 Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.4.4 Configuration as a SLD16E
and the Multiplex Section
Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 Fiber (BSHR-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.5 Connection of the Optical Fiber Cables (FO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6 Switching on the Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2 Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.3 Checking of the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.3.1 Rack Mounted SLD/T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.4 Switching “ON” the Network Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.4.1 Cards, Components, Modules and Response
of the NE During Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.4.1.1 System Controller Unit (SCU) and
Peripheral Controller Units (PCUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.4.1.2 Possible Faults During Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6.4.1.3 Boot Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

6.4.1.4 Starting the ASW (Cold Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.4.1.5 Possible Faults During Software Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.4.2 Switching “ON” the Complete Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.4.3 Switching “ON” the Complete Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.4.4 Switching “ON” the Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.5 Switching “OFF” the Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.5.1 Switch “OFF” the Complete Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.5.2 Switch “OFF” the Complete Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.5.3 Switch “OFF” the Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.6 Emergency Switching “OFF” the Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7 Connecting the Operating Terminal to a Network Element and

Configuring the Operating Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.1 The LCT and the NCT Operating Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.1.1 Composition of the Operating Terminal and Devices
for a Connection to the Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.1.2 Hardware for Connecting the Operating Terminal
to a Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.2 NE Software and Software Parts Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.2.1 Installing the Ethernet Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.2.2 Installing the OSI Stack Software V 1.7.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.2.2.1 Preparation for Installing the OSI Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.2.2.2 Installation of the OSI Stack Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.2.2.3 Bind Stack Software and OSILLC Driver to the Operating System . . . . . 120
7.2.3 Configuration of the OSI Stack Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.2.4 Installation and Configuration of the NeProxy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.2.5 Installing the NE Unigate V6.x Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2.6 Starting the NE UniGATE Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.7 NE UniGATE Grafical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.8 Installing the Operating Terminal Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.2.9 Configuring the Operating Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.2.10 Configuration of the Communication Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.2.11 Configuration of the Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.2.11.1 Communication Settings for LAN Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2.11.2 Communication Settings for Serial Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.2.11.3 Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.2.11.4 Communication with NeProxy Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.2.12 NE Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.2.12.1 NSAP Address of the Operating Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.2.12.2 NSAP Addresses of the Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.2.13 Select Properties and NSAP/IP Addresses of the Operating Terminal. . . 146
7.2.14 Connect to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2.15 Starting the NE Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3 Access Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.3.1 Access Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8 Configuring the Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8.1 Entering the Access Rights (Start-Up and Logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 7
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.1.1 Options Setting Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

8.1.2 Access Information Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.1.3 Activity Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.1.4 Security NE and LCT NE Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.2 Entering the NE Location and the NE Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.3 Entering the Subrack Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.3.1 Configuring the NE Subracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.3.2 Configuring the Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.3.3 Configuring the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.3.4 Configuring the Ports for the Traffic Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.3.5 Configuring the Special Slots or Cards (Slots for CS4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.3.6 Configuring the CLL and the CLL64-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.3.7 Configuring the SNL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.4 Entering for a Second (Redundant) Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.5 Entering the Persistence Time Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.6 Entering the Bw7R Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.7 Entering the MAC Address of the NE Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.8 Activating the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.1 The NE States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.1.1 The Idle State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.1.2 The Active State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.1.3 The Maintenance State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.8.1.4 The Operation State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.8.2 The Config DB Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.8.3 The Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.9 Enter the SLD/T 16 Network Element
Additional Equipping (Limited Equipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.1 Configuring the OHA Limited Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.1.1 Configuring the G703 #1 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.1.2 Configuring the G703 #2 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.10 Entering the SLD/T16 Network Element
Additional Equipping (Full Equipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.10.1 Configuring OHA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.10.1.1 Configuring a G703 #n Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.10.1.2 Configuring a TIF #n Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.10.1.3 Configuring a PBX Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.10.1.4 Configuring the Two Wire Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.10.1.5 Configuring the Four Wire E&M #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.10.1.6 Configuring the Four Wire E&M #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.11 Set the Date and the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.12 Set the Message Communications Functions (MCF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.12.1 Configure the Stack Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8.12.1.1 Ethernet and TCP/IP Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.12.1.2 ISO/OSI Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.12.2 Configuration of the Connection Less Network Service (CLNS) . . . . . . . . 176
8.12.3 Configuring the DCC Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.12.4 Configuring the Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.12.4.1 Configuration of the Ethernet Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

8.12.5 Configuration of the IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.12.5.1 Configuration of the IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.12.5.2 Configuration of the IP Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.12.5.3 Configuration of the IP Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.12.6 Transport Connections 1 ... 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.13 Setting the Synchronization for
the Synchronous Equipment Clocks (SEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.13.1 Selecting the Reference Clock for T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.13.2 Define the Priorities of the Reference Clocks T0 and T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.13.2.1 The Reference Clocks for T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.13.2.2 The Reference Clocks for T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.13.3 Define the Traffic Signal for T1 Reference Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.13.4 Define a Timing Marker (SSM) for the T3 Clock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.13.5 Selecting the Reference Timing Source for T4 Clock Signal . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.13.6 Synchronizing T3 by 2 Mbit/s Signal Using CLA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.13.7 Configure the Wait to Restore Time
for the Synchronization of the Equipment Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.13.8 Conversion Tables for SONET / SDH Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.14 The SLD/T16 Network Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.14.1 Create SLD/T16 Network Element Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.14.1.1 Synchronous Line Device SLD16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.14.1.2 Synchronous Terminal SLT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.14.2 Main Network Line Interface
(Linear Chain Line, Point-to-Point Line, or Ring Access Line) . . . . . . . . . 185
8.14.3 Sub-Network (Tributary) Line Interfaces
(Linear Chain Line, Point-to-Point Line, or Ring Access Line)
- Optical Interfaces - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
- Electrical Interfaces - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.14.5 OH Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.14.5.1 TIF Based Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.14.5.2 G703 Based Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.15 Entering the Network Element Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.15.1 General of Configuring the Different Types of a Network Element . . . . . . 188
8.15.2 Begin of Set-Up Procedure by Slot Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.15.3 Configuring the MS-BSHR/4 Ring with Protection Switching and Flexible
Cross-Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.15.4 Configuring the MS-BSHR/2 Ring with Protection Switching and Flexible
Cross-Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.15.5 Configuring OIS16-2 Modules (4-Fibre)
for Concatenation Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.15.5.1 Simple Concatenation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.15.5.2 Contiguous Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.15.5.3 Virtual Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
for Concatenation Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
8.15.7 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for Concatenation Connections . . . . . . . . . 193
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 9
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.8 Configuring OIS16-2 (4-Fibre) Modules for Squelching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

8.15.9 Configuring OIS16-2 (2-Fibre) Modules for Squelching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
8.15.10 Configuring OIS16-2 Modules for Squelching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.15.11 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for Squelching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.15.12 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for SONET Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.15.13 SLD Synchronous Add / Drop Multiplexer,
Configuring OHA, OB, OP and Other Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.15.13.1Configuring the Overhead Cross Connection OHCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.15.13.2Configuring the Telemetry Interface Channels and
Setting the Telephone Number of the 2-Wire DTMF
Handset and the PBX Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
8.15.13.3Configuring the Cross Connection of the SNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
8.15.13.4Configuring the Optical Booster / Preamplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Specifying Additional Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8.15.14.1Specifying the Connector Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8.15.14.2Specifying the Trail Trace Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8.15.14.3Specifying the User Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
8.15.15 SLD Synchronous Add / Drop Multiplexer
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
8.15.15.1Monitoring the Functions
of the Electrical Signal Path of an EIPS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS16/OIS16-2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS4/OIS4-2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.15.15.6Displaying the Sub Rack Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.15.15.7Monitoring the Redundant Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.15.16 SLT Synchronous Line Terminal with 1+1 MSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.15.16.1Begin of Set-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.15.16.2Configuring the 1:1 MSP Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8.15.16.3Other Functions Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8.15.17 SLD Synchronous Add / Drop Multiplexer with
MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching, 1+1 MSP for an OIS1/4
and an EIPS1 Module Protection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.15.17.1Begin of Set-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.15.17.2Configuring the MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.15.17.3Configuring the MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.15.17.4Configuring the 1 + 1 MSP for the OIS4/OIS4-2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.15.17.5Configuring the 1 + 1 MSP for the OIS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.15.17.6Monitoring the Functions of the Optical / Electrical
Signal Path of an OIS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.15.17.7Configuring the EIPS1 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.17.9Other Functions Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

8.16 NE Application Software (APS) and
NE Configuration Data Base (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.16.1 NE Application Software (NE APS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.16.1.1 Application Software Management (NE SW APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.16.1.2 Application Software Download (Application Software Installing) . . . . . . . 211
8.16.2 NE Database SW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.16.2.1 Config DB Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8.16.2.2 Config DB Download (Load and Restore). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.16.2.3 Config DB Upload (Back-Up and Save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.17 VCDB Data Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.18 Use of an Optional CLA Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.19 Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9 Extending the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

9.1 Re Configuring the STM-16 Interfaces
of the SLD16 Sub Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.1.1 SLD Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.1.1.1 Up- / Downgrade of a MSP on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.1.1.2 Up- / Downgrade of a MS-BSHR/2 on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
9.1.2 SLT Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
9.1.2.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
9.1.3 Up- / Downgrade between SLT and SLD without Line Side MSP . . . . . . 222
9.1.4 Up- / Downgrade between SLT Configuration Type with MSP
and SLD with / without Linear MSP on the Line Side(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
9.2 Re Configuration of the STM-16 Interfaces of the SLD16E Sub Rack . . . 224
9.2.1 SLD Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
9.2.1.1 Up- / Downgrade of a MSP on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
9.2.1.3 Up- / Downgrade the STM-16 Tributary Interfaces without MSP . . . . . . . 226
9.2.1.5 Up- / Downgrade the STM-16 to STM-4 Tributary Interfaces
without MSP and Back Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
9.2.2 SLT Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
9.2.2.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
9.2.3 Up- / Downgrade between SLT and SLD without Line Side MSP . . . . . . 230
9.2.4 Upgrade / Downgrade between SLT Configuration Type with MSP
and SLD with / without Linear MSP on the Line Side(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
9.3 Re Configuration of the STM-16 Interfaces of the SLT16 Sub Rack . . . . 232
9.3.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.4 Re Configuring the STM-4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.4.1 Single Ended STM-4 (1+1 MSP) to Dual Ended (1+1 MSP)
and Back Again. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.5 Re Configuring the STM-1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
and Back Again. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.5.2 Re Configuration of Card Protection (1+1)
for the Optical STM-1 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 11
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
10 Measurements, Test Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

10.1 Required Test Equipment and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10.2 Local Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10.2.1 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10.2.2 Optical Output Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.2.3 Optional Bit Error Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.3 Line Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
10.3.1 Optical Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
10.3.2 Bit Error Rate (Line Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
10.3.3 Testing the EOW Service Channels, Bytes E1 and E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
10.3.4 Testing the DCC Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
10.3.5 Testing the Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
10.4 External Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
10.5 Test Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
11 Terminal Assignments, Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

11.1 Terminal Assignments of the Rack
(Rack Terminal Panel Additions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
11.1.1 Terminal Assignments of the Signal Distributor (SigVt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
11.1.2 Terminal Assignments of the Distributor Module (VtM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
11.1.3 Terminal Assignments of the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) . . . . . . . . . 244
11.1.3.1 Medium Attachment Unit with a Coaxial Cable Interface (MAU-Coax) . . . 244
11.1.3.2 Medium Attachment Unit with
a Twisted Pair Cable Interface (MAU-Twist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
11.1.4 Terminal Assignments of the Clock Line Adapter (CLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
11.1.4.1 Line Side Connectors A1 (X1), A3 X2), and A5 (X3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
11.1.4.2 NE Side Connectors B1 (X12), B3 (X13), and B5 (X14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
11.1.4.3 CLA box internal Connector X8 (Test Interface RS-232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
11.2 Power Terminal Assignments of the Sub Rack
at the Terminal Panel 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
11.3 Communication Traffic Terminal Assignments
of the Sub Rack at the Panels 201 to 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.3.1 Line Termination Unit (Tributary), LTU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.3.2 EBSL Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.3.3 PSUTP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.4 Special Communication Interface Terminals
of the Sub Rack and the Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.4.1 Terminal Assignments at the Terminal Panel 301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.4.1.1 AUX1 (A1), AUX 3 (C1), and AUX 5 (E1) Interfaces (V.11 and G.703) . . . 247
11.4.1.2 AUX2 (B1), AUX 4 (D1), and AUX 6 (F1) Interfaces (V.11 and G.703) . . . 249
11.4.1.3 E&M and PABX Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
11.4.2 Clock Interfaces (T3 / T4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
11.5 Control Terminal Assignments of the Sub Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
11.5.1 Local Area Network Interface, LAN Interface, Q-B3 Interface . . . . . . . . . . 252
11.5.1.1 Q-B3 Interfaces (AUI for Ethernet-LAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
11.5.2 Local Craft Terminal Interface (LCT),
Local Serial Interface, Q-F Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
11.5.2.1 Q-F Interface (LCT using V.24 / RS232 Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.6 Terminal Assignments

for Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
11.6.1 Telephone Devices Interface(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
11.6.2 Light Signal Equipment
and Central Alarm In- / Outputs (Bw7R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
11.6.2.1 Bw7R Interface (LZE / ZBBeO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
11.6.3 Terminal Assignments of the Telemetry Interface Module
(TIF-Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
12 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
13 Expansions, Operator’s Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 13
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Illustrations
Fig. 4.1 Typical Equipping Example of a Rack
Conforming to the ETSI Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 4.2 Schematic View of the Rack Power Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 4.3 Schematic View of the Power Supply and the Control Cables between
Fuse Panel, Rack Terminal Panel and SLD/T16E Subrack . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 4.4 Connector Assignment for Central Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 4.5 3-D View of the Standard Rack Terminal Panel
on a Common ETSI-Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 4.6 Installing the 10 Base2 Coaxial LAN Transceiver(s) MAU-Unit(s),
Ethernet-LAN (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 4.7 Front side View of the Clock Line Adapter (CLA) Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 4.8 View of the Fuse Panel with the Cover Removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 4.9 View of the SLD16 Single-Row Subrack with Equipping Options . . . . . . 58
Fig. 4.10 View of the SLD16E Double-Row Subrack with Equipping Options . . . . 59
Fig. 4.11 Schematic View of the Subrack Terminal Field
with Numbered Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 5.1 View of the Subrack (1-Row Version Example) for Cable Installation . . 69
Fig. 5.2 CLA Box Sa-Bit Selector Switch n=1 (A2), =2 (A4), =3 (A6). . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 5.3 OB Module, Jumpers Setting for the ICS Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 5.4 OP Module, Jumpers Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 5.5 OIS4/OIS4-2/OIS16/OIS16-2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 5.6 OIS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 5.7 SLD16 Synchronous Line Add / Drop Multiplexer
with MS-BSHR/4 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 5.8 SLT16 Synchronous Line Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 6.1 Display Elements on the Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 7.1 Interface Associations of the LCT and NCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 7.2 Connection of the Operating Terminal to the Q-B3 Interface
of the Sub Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 7.3 OSI-Stack Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 7.4 “Systemsteuerung (System Control)” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 7.5 LAN “Network” and Related Set-Up Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fig. 7.6 “OSI” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 7.7 “ES-IS Configuration” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 7.8 “Transport Configuration” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 7.9 “manl. Routes Configuration” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 7.10 “Route” Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 7.11 “OSI STACK Operator” Protocol Operation Control Window . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 7.12 “NE-Proxy - General” Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 7.13 “NE-Proxy - Limits” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
14 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.14 “NE-Proxy - Communication” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Fig. 7.15 “NE-Proxy - Security” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 7.16 “NE-Proxy - User” Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 7.17 “UniGATE Icon” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 7.18 “NE-UniGATE Login” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 7.19 “SIEMENS TransXpress NE UniGATE[LCT]” GUI-Window. . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 7.20 “SIEMENS TransXpress NE UniGATE[NCT]” GUI-Window . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 7.21 “UniGATE and Configuration Menu” Example Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 7.22 “Configuration Menu” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 7.23 “Communication Settings” for “Network” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 7.24 “Communication Settings” for “Serial Line” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 7.25 “Background” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 7.26 “Background” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 7.27 “NE Addresses” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 7.28 “Add NE address” for “QST Protocol” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 7.29 “Add NE address” for “QD2 Protocol” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fig. 7.30 “Add NE address” for “Q3 Protocol” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 7.31 “Properties” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 7.32 “NE Start Icons” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fig. 7.33 “NE User Administration” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 7.34 “Add NE User” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 7.35 “Delete NE User” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 7.36 “Change NE Password” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 8.1 Relations of Extended ISO/OSI Layer Model,
Sublayers and Former (DoD) Protocol Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 8.2 Relations of the OSI Stack and the Transport and User Services . . . . 171
Fig. 8.3 IP2OSI Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 8.4 IP Routing Example through an OSI Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 8.5 “Traffic-Flow, Topology and Parameter for 4F-Spring” GUI-Windows . 186
Fig. 9.1 SLD16 Configurations with OIS16 Modules
in Corresponding Slots, MSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
in Corresponding Slots, MS-BSHR/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 9.4 SLT16 Configurations with OIS16 Modules
Fig. 9.5 SLT16 / SLD16 Configurations without MSP
with OIS16 Modules in Corresponding Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 9.6 SLT16 / SLD16 Configurations with MSP
Fig. 9.7 SLD16E Configuration with OIS16 Modules
Fig. 9.8 SLD16E Configurations with OIS16 Modules
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 15
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 9.9 SLD16E Tributary Configuration without MSP with OIS16 Modules. . . 226
Fig. 9.11 SLD16E Tributary Up- / Down- Grade Configuration
(STM-4 <-> STM-16) without MSP with OIS4/16 Modules . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fig. 9.12 SLT16E Configurations with OIS16 Modules
in Corresponding Slots, MSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 9.13 SLT16E / SLD16E Configurations without MSP
Fig. 9.14 SLT16E / SLD16E Configurations with Linear MSP
Fig. 9.15 SLT16 Configurations with OIS16 Modules in Corresponding Slots. . . 232
Fig. 9.16 SLD/T16C Configurations with OIS4 Modules
in Corresponding Slots n, n+1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 9.17 SLD/T16E Configurations with OIS4 Modules
in Corresponding Slots, MSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 10.1 Measuring the Optical Output Power
of the OIS1/4/16 or OB(D) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 10.2 Measuring the Bit Error Rate on 140/155 Mbit/s Channels. . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 10.3 Test Ring for Measuring the Optical Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fig. 10.4 Test Ring for Determining the Bit Error Rate
(Long-Term Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fig. 11.1 SigVt Signal Distributor (Rack Terminal Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fig. 11.2 Line Side Connectors
(Front Panel, Left Hand Side of the box - A1, A3, A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 11.3 NE Side Connectors
(Front Panel, Right Hand Side of the Box - B1, B3, B5) . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 11.4 CLA Box Internal Test Interface RS-232 (Connector X8) . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 11.5 Operating Voltage A1, B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 11.6 Coaxial Connections on the LTU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 11.7 AUX1 (A1), AUX3 (C1), and AUX5 (E1) Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 11.8 AUX2 (B1), AUX4 (D1), and AUX6 (F1) Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig. 11.9 E&M Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fig. 11.10 T3 / T4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 11.11 Q-B3 Interfaces (AUI for Ethernet-LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 11.12 Q-F Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 11.13 Telephone Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 11.14 Bw7R Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 11.15 CUST-IN / OUT Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
16 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Tables
Tab. 4.1 Interfaces for Service and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tab. 4.2 Interfaces for Power Supply of Communication Equipment and Cooling 63
Tab. 4.3 Interfaces for Service, Surveillance and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tab. 4.4 Interfaces for Service, Surveillance and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tab. 4.5 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tab. 5.1 Channel 1 ... 3 Sa-Bit Configuration Switch (A2, A4, A6) Assignment . 71
Tab. 5.2 64-kbit/s Channel and Configuration Switch Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab. 5.3 OP Module, Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Tab. 5.4 Over all Equipping Options for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tab. 5.5 Equipping Options for EIPS1 Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tab. 5.6 Assignment of the LTU and EIPS1 Modules in the SLD16 . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tab. 5.7 Equipping Options with OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 5.8 Color Coding of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Optical Connector for WL Interfacing
87
Tab. 5.9 Assignment of the Slot No. and CLL Modules in the SLD16 . . . . . . . . . 88
Tab. 5.10 Assignment of the Slot No. and OHA Module in the SLD16 . . . . . . . . . 89
Tab. 5.12 Equipping Options for EIPS1 Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 5.13 Assignment of the LTU and EIPS1 Modules in the SLD16E . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 5.14 Equipping Options for OIS1/4 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tab. 5.15 Equipping Options with OIS16/OIS16-2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tab. 5.16 Color Coding of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Optical Connector for WL . . . . . . . 96
Tab. 5.17 Assignment of the Slot No. and OB /OP Modules in the SLD16E . . . . . 96
Tab. 5.18 Assignment of the Slot No. and CS4 Modules in the SLD16E. . . . . . . . 97
Tab. 5.19 Assignment of the Slot No. and OB /OP Modules in the SLD16E . . . . . 97
Tab. 5.20 Assignment of the Slot No. and OHA Modules in the SLD16E . . . . . . . 98
Tab. 5.22 Assignment of the Slot No. and SCU Modules in the SLD16E . . . . . . . 99
Tab. 5.23 Configuration as a SLD16 with Access to Tributary Channels . . . . . . 101
Tab. 5.24 Configuration of the SLT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tab. 5.25 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/2 Protection Switching . . . . . 103
Tab. 5.26 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/4 Protection Switching . . . . . 104
Tab. 6.1 Response of the Module LEDs During Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 7.1 Connection Options: Operating Terminal / Network Element(s) . . . . . 117
Tab. 8.1 Slots of CS4 cards assignment to OIS 16 cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tab. 9.1 Possible Slots for OIS16 and OIS16-2 Modules (SLD16) . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tab. 9.2 Possible Slots for OIS16 Modules (SLD16E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tab. 9.3 Possible Slots for OIS16 Modules (SLT16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 17
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
18 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
1 Notes on this Documentation
1.1 Documentation Overview

The documentation of Synchronous Line Equipment SLD16/SLT16, series 2,
release 5 (abbreviated to: SLD/T16-2.5) covers network elements SLD16, SLD16E,
SLT16 and SLT16E and comprises the following descriptions and manuals:
• Technical Description (TED)

The Technical Description TED gives an overview on the application, performance
features, interfaces and functions of the equipment. It also contains the most impor-
tant technical data and product code number.
The Technical Description contains no definite instructions for action.
• Installation and Test Manual (ITMN)

The Installation and Test Manual ITMN contains instructions to connect and install
the TransXpress Local Craft Terminal LCT and Network Craft Terminal NCT and in-
structions for installing Synchronous Line Equipment (by using the LCT/NCT).
To work with the Installation and Test Manual ITMN, knowledge of the Operating
Manual OMN is required.
For specific tasks, additional documentation is required which has to be created sep-
arately; this is referred to in the ITMN.
• Operating Manual (OMN)

The OMN:SL operating part describes the operating elements of the Synchronous
Line Equipment and operating and monitoring with the NCT and LCT operating ter-
minals (with explanation of the graphic user interface of the application software of
the network element).
For information about the gateway software UniGATE please refer to the dedicated doc-
i umentation.
• Maintenance Manual (MMN)

The Maintenance Manual MMN describes the procedure on the occurrence of
alarms and interference suppression of Synchronous Line Equipment.
To work with the Maintenance Manual MMN, knowledge of the Installation and Test
Manual ITMN and the Operating Manual OMN is required.
Notes for the user of the documentation in paper form:
i This documentation can also be provided on CD-ROM.
Recommended system configuration:
In order to be able to read the PDF files properly, you need
Windows NT or
Windows 95/98 or
SUN Solaris V2.5 or later and
Acrobat Reader 4.0 with search function (integral part of the customer documentation
on CD-ROM)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 19
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
1.2 Symbols Used in the Documentation
1.2.1 Symbol for Warnings

This symbol identifies notes which, if ignored, can result in personal injury or in perma-
! nent damage to the equipment.
1.2.2 Symbols for Notes

This symbol identified notes providing information which extends beyond the immediate
i context.
⇒ Notes on parts of the text which contain definite instructions for action.
☞ Cross reference to other chapters in this manual or cross reference to other

manuals.
Help Note on the on-line help system of the relevant software program.
1.2.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs

Menu options from pop-up menus or inputs to be made by the operator (texts, com-
mands) are displayed consecutively in their hierarchical sequence in pointed brackets:
<Menu> <Menu item> <Command text> <Parameter> etc.
1.3 Notes on Licensed Software

This documentation refers to software products which were taken over from other com-
panies as licenses.
Should problems arise, you should contact Siemens AG as the licensee and not the rel-
evant licenser.
In this documentation, the following designations of licensed products are mentioned:
• UNIX (registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc.)
• MS-Windows (identification of the Microsoft Corporation)
20 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
1.4 Form for your Ideas, Proposals and Corrections

We aim to provide clear, user-friendly documentation. To achieve this objective, your
practical experience is very important. We appreciate your suggestions.
To offer you, the user, a cost-effective opportunity to identify weak points or requests for
documentation, we have compiled a form for you on the next page. You can use it as a
master or as a printout in electronic documentation.
Please enter your ideas, proposals and corrections on the copy (enclose further
pages, if required).
The following points are of particular importance to us:

• Where are we offering too much or too little detail?
• Where should more explanatory graphics be used?
• Where is the description difficult to understand?
• How can the basic structure of the description or the manual be improved?
Please forward your feedback as a letter or fax to our address given overleaf.
If you want a reply or need to discuss anything with us, please complete the “Sender”
field in full.
Many thanks for your feedback!
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 21
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
To Sender
SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Name:

Kundendokumentation ICN TR S C2
Hofmannstrasse 51 ..........................................................................
D-81359 München Address:
Fax +49 89 722 57315 ..........................................................................
..........................................................................
Department: Telephone/Fax:
................................... ....................................
Date: Signature:
................................... ....................................
I am using this documentation as I am responsible for the following areas

(...) Service document (...) Installation and testing
(...) Assembly/installation and test document (...) Operation
(...) General introduction (...) Maintenance
(...) Reference (...) Sales
(...) Textbook (...) Teaching
(...) _______________________________ (...) _______________________________
Page Remarks
22 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
2 Protective Measures, Handling /

Schutzmaßnahmen, Handhabung
If the following rules are not observed, Bei Nichtbeachtung der nachfolgenden
! and if equipment damages or person- Vorschriften und daraus resultie-
nel injuries are the result, the manufac- renden Personen- oder Sachschäden
turer assumes no liability, and the wird keine Haftung seitens des Herstel-
warranty will expire! lers übernommen, und die Gewährleis-
tung erlischt!
If you replace any parts of devices or ca- Falls Sie an den Geräten oder an der
bles, you must only use original spare Verkabelung irgendwelche Teile
parts or parts which are explicitly licensed ersetzen, dann dürfen Sie nur Original-Er-
by the manufacturer. satzteile oder solche Teile verwenden, die
vom Hersteller ausdrücklich zugelassen
sind.
2.1 Protective Measures / Schutzmaßnahmen
2.1.1 Electrical Fuses / Elektrische Sicherungen

The power supply lines for each subrack Die Stromversorgungsleitungen für jeden
and for each external additional device (f. Baugruppenträger und jedes externe
e. an adapterbox) within the rack are rout- Zusatzgerät (z.B. einen Adapterkasten)
ed via separate circuit breakers which are innerhalb des Gestells sind über eigene
located in the fuse panel of the rack. Sicherungsautomaten geführt. Diese be-
finden sich im Sicherungsfeld des Gest-
ells.
For each subrack or additional one circuit Pro Baugruppenträger oder Zusatz wird
breaker for the working power supply and für die Betriebs- und für die Ersatz-Strom-
one circuit breaker for the protection pow- versorgung je 1 Sicherungsautomat ver-
er supply are used. wendet.
2.1.2 Protection Against Excessive High Contact Voltages /

Schutz gegen zu hohe Berührungsspannungen
☞ When ☞
handling the power supply or Beachten Sie bei der Handhabung
working on it, observe the safety der Stromversorgung oder bei Ar-
measures described in the specifi- beiten daran die Sicherheits-
cations VDE 0105 (Operation of maßnahmen der Normen VDE
Heavy Current Systems) and DIN 0105 (Betrieb von Starkstroman-
EN 50110, part 1 (Operation of lagen) und DIN EN 50110, Teil1
electrical Systems). (Betrieb von elektrischen Anlagen).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 23
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
2.1.3 Protection Against Excessive Overvoltage

on the 48 / 60-Volts Power Supply Input /
Schutz gegen Überspannungen
beim 48 / 60-Volt-Stromversorgungseingang
A protection against excessive voltage is Ein Schutz gegen Überspannung auf der
built in on the 48 / 60-Volts power supply Stromversorgungs-Eingangseite 48 /
input. 60 Volt ist eingebaut.
The equipment must only be used with Das Gerät darf nur mit SELV / TNV-
! SELV / TNV power supply units according Stromversorgungen gemäß VDE 0100-
to VDE 0100-410 and DIN EN 60950! 410 und DIN EN 60950 betrieben werden!
☞ Observe
before connecting other equipment ☞ weis insbesondere, bevor Sie an-
the above note especially Beachten Sie den obigen Warnhin-
to the user / customer interfaces! dere Geräte an die Anwender-/

Kunden-Schnittstellen an-
schließen!
☞ You
protective grounding measures giv- ☞ Schutzerdungsmaßnahmen
must observe without fail the Beachten Sie unbedingt die
en in Chapter 2.1.7! entsprechend Kapitel 2.1.7!
2.1.4 Isolations and Isolation Materials /

Isolierungen und Isoliermaterialien
The isolations and isolation materials Die verwendeten Isolierungen und die
used comply with DIN EN 60950. Isolationsmaterialien entsprechen DIN
EN 60950.
2.1.5 Fire Protection / Brandschutz

Fire protection complies with DIN EN Der Brandschutz entspricht DIN EN
60950. 60950.
24 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
2.1.6 Protection Against Extraneous Laser Light

and Protection of the Optical Modules Concerned /
Schutz gegen austretendes Laserlicht
und Schutz der betreffenden optischen Baugruppen
Depending on the device type, the la- Je nach Gerätetyp kann die Laserstrah-
! ser radiation may also be invisible for lung für das menschliche Auge auch
the human eye! unsichtbar sein!
Devices and modules displaying either of Geräte und Baugruppen, die eines der fol-
the following warning labels contain laser genden Warnzeichen tragen, enthalten
devices. Laser-Einrichtungen.
Warning Label Warnschild

according to VDE 0105/DIN nach VDE 0105 / DIN EN
EN 50110 / DIN 40008 T.1 50110 / DIN 40008 T.1 und
and T.3, Reg. No. 2821, using T.3, Reg. Nr. 2821 mit einem
the laser symbol according to Laser-Symbol nach 7000-
7000-ISO-1329. ISO-1329.
Warning Label Warnschild

for hazard class 1 laser equip- Class 1 Laser für Laser-Einrichtungen der
ment. Gefährdungsklasse 1.
IEC 60825-1:98
When operated in a closed system, the la- Bei Betrieb im geschlossenen System
ser equipment of the device conform to entsprechen die Laser-Einrichtungen des
class 1 safety level. Gerätes der Gefährdungsklasse 1.
Nevertheless, in view of possible malfunc- Unter Berücksichtigung von vorherseh-

tions, transmission systems which are fit- baren Fehlerfällen sind mit optischen
ted with optical fiber amplifier modules are Lichtwellenleiter-Verstärkerbaugruppen
classified as hazard class 3A. This hazard bestückte Übertragungssysteme jedoch
class is also applicable if the device is der Gefährdungsklasse 3A zugeordnet.
opened. Diese Gefährdungsklasse gilt auch bei
The relevant amplifier modules are la- geöffnetem Gerät.
belled as follows: Die betreffenden Verstärkerbaugruppen
sind folgendermaßen beschildert:
Class 3A Laser Product Laser Klasse 3A Nicht in den Strahl

Do not stare into beam or view blikken, auch nicht mit optischen Instru-
directly with optical instruments. menten. Sendebetrieb nur im
Operate in a closed optical loop only. geschlossenen optischen System.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 25
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
⇒ To ensure safe operation of the en- ⇒ Für den sicheren Betrieb der ge-
tire optical path, the laser safety samten optischen Strecke muss
shutdown must be activated and die Lasersicherheitsabschaltung
the automatic cyclical laser start aktiviert sein, und der automatische
must be disabled. zyklische Laserstart muss gesperrt
sein.
⇒ Commissioning should be per- ⇒ Die Inbetriebnahme soll abge-
formed with fuse protection in the sichert im geschlossenen System
closed system. erfolgen.
☞ Tomust ☞
avoid damage to health, you Zur Vermeidung gesundheitlicher
observe the regulations re- Schäden müssen Sie die Vor-
garding protection against radiation schriften zur Strahlungssicherheit
from laser devices (DIN VDE 0837 von Lasereinrichtungen (DIN VDE
/ DIN EN 60825 / IEC 825). 0837 / DIN EN 60825 / IEC 825)
beachten.
If it cannot be avoided − in an exceptional Falls die Gefährdungsklasse 3A im Aus-

! case − to apply the hazard class 3A regu- nahmefall nicht vermieden werden kann
lations (see above), you always must use (siehe oben), müssen Sie stets eine La-
dedicated laser-protective goggles. ser-Schutzbrille tragen.
If an optical preamplifier is used, its input Bei Verwendung eines optischen Vorver-
! must never be directly connected to an stärkers darf dessen Eingang nie direkt
optical booster output − always intercon- mit einem optischen Booster-Ausgang
nect an optical attenuator. verbunden werden − fügen Sie immer ein
optisches Dämpfungsglied ein.
If the automatic laser safety shutdown has Wenn bei einem optischen Booster-Aus-
! been taken out of service with an optical gang die automatische Lasersicherheits-
Booster output, the optical fiber connected abschaltung außer Betrieb genommen
to it must not be disconnected − due to the wurde, darf − wegen der hohen optischen
high optical output power. Ausgangsleistung − der angeschlossene
In this case, the laser diodes are not Lichtwellenleiter nicht aufgetrennt wer-
switched off automatically. The very high den.
optical power generated in this way is po- In diesem Fall werden die Laserdioden
tentially very harmful to the human eye. nicht automatisch abgeschaltet. Die dabei
entstehende sehr hohe optische Aus-
gangsleistung ist sehr gefährlich für das
menschliche Auge.
In case of doubt always use dedicated la- Tragen Sie im Zweifelsfall stets eine
! ser-protective goggles! Schutzbrille!
26 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
2.1.7 Earthing or Grounding and Potential Balancing /

Erdung und Potenzialausgleich
Especially when running a combination of Insbesondere bei gemeinsamer Verwen-
! different communications equipment, it is dung verschiedener Kommunikations-
important to establish correct potential geräte ist es wichtig − abhängig von den
balancing between them − depending on örtlichen Erdungsmaßnahmen − auf kor-
the local earthing measures. rekten Potenzialausgleich zu achten.
⇒ If subracks are mounted in racks, ⇒ Beim Einbau von Baugruppen-

as a basic principle you must trägern in Gestelle müssen Sie
ground the rack frame before you grundsätzlich den Gestellrahmen
connect the external cabling from erden, bevor Sie die externe Ver-
the telecommunications center to kabelung von der Betriebsstelle an
the system rack. das Systemgestell anschließen.
⇒ The grounding must be effective as ⇒ Die Erdung muss bestehen blei-

long as external cables are con- ben, solange Kabel von außen an
nected to the equipment. die Geräte angeschlossen sind.
2.2 Handling the Subrack /

Handhabung des Baugruppenträgers
2.2.1 Front Door of the Device / Geräte-Vordertür

A subrack being fitted with a front door Baugruppenträger, die eine Vordertür ha-
! must only be operated with this door ben, dürfen nur betrieben werden, wenn
closed. There is danger of personal injury, diese Tür geschlossen ist. Bei geöffneter
if the door of the subrack is open. Vordertür des Baugruppenträgers besteht
Verletzungsgefahr.
⇒ For this reason, before working on ⇒ Öffnen Sie deshalb, bevor Sie am
the subrack, open the front door, Baugruppenträger arbeiten, des-
raise it and then remove it. sen Vordertür, heben Sie sie an
und nehmen Sie sie ab.
⇒ Once the work has been complet- ⇒ Bringen Sie nach Beendigung der
ed, refit the door belonging to this Arbeiten die zu diesem Baugrup-
subrack and close it. penträger gehörende Vordertür
wieder an und schließen Sie sie.
When the front door is open − especially Bei geöffneter Vordertür − insbesondere
! when additional covers have been re- nach dem Öffnen von zusätzlichen Abde-
moved − components with high operating ckungen − können auch Teile mit hoher
temperatures (as per Chapter 2.2.4) may Betriebstemperatur (entsprechend
also become accessible! Kapitel 2.2.4) zugänglich sein!
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 27
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
2.2.2 Equipment Cooling / Gerätekühlung

If the device is mounted in a rack together Falls das Gerät zusammen mit anderen
! with other devices and if the power con- Geräten in einem Gestell montiert ist und
sumption of all devices − mounted one die Leistungssumme aller übereinander
above the other − exceeds 350 W, a angeordneten Geräte 350 W übersteigt,
forced-ventilation equipment must be built muss eine Vorrichtung zur Zwangsbelüf-
in and must be ready for operation. tung vorhanden und betriebsbereit sein.
2.2.3 Weight Information / Gewichtsangaben
Warning Labels Warnschilder

at the subrack in case of heavy am Baugruppenträger bei hohem
weight. Gewicht.
The maximum weight to be lifted Das maximale Hebegewicht für

by one person is fixed to 18 kg! eine Person ist auf 18 kg fest-
MAXIMUM
gelegt!
EQUIPMEN
T
UNEQUIPPE
D
2.2.4 Components Subject to High Operating Temperatures /

Komponenten mit hoher Betriebstemperatur
! Warning Label Warnschild

for equipment components (e. g. für Geräteteile (z. B. Kühlkörper),
heat sinks) which may attain high die hohe Betriebstemperaturen
operating temperatures. erreichen können.
Touching these components is lia- Beim Berühren solcher Teile be-

ble to result in personal injury! steht Verletzungsgefahr!
On extremely hot surfaces, a label Auf extrem heißen Oberflächen ist

! with red text “HOT POINT” on a zusätzlich ein Schild mit der roten
white background is added. Schrift “HOT POINT” (“heißer
It indicates highest injury hazard. Punkt”) auf weißem Grund ange-
bracht.
Es kennzeichnet höchste Verlet-
zungsgefahr.
28 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
2.3 Handling Modules, FO Equipment and Batteries /

Handhabung von Baugruppen, LWL und Batterien
2.3.1 Handling Modules Containing Electrostatically-Sensitive Compo-

nents / Handhabung von Baugruppen mit elektrostatisch gefährde-
ten Bauteilen
ESD symbol EGB-Symbol

Modules displaying this label are Baugruppen, die dieses Zeichen
fitted with electrostatically-sensi- tragen, sind mit elektrostatisch
tive components, i.e. you must gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt,
handle them in accordance with d. h. beim Umgang damit müssen
the necessary safety measures. Sie die erforderlichen Sicherheits-
maßnahmen einhalten.
Grounding bracelets must always be worn Wenn Baugruppen mit EGB-Symbol aus-
! when packing, unpacking, touching, pull- oder eingepackt, berührt, gezogen oder
ing, or inserting modules displaying the gesteckt werden, dann müssen stets Er-
ESD symbol. This will ensure the modules dungsarmbänder getragen werden. Da-
not to be damaged. durch wird sichergestellt, dass die
Baugruppen nicht beschädigt werden.
The rack is equipped with marked Am Gestell sind gekennzeichnete

ESD
grounding sockets to accept the Erdungsbuchsen zur Aufnahme
connecting plug for the grounding des Anschlusssteckers für das Er-
bracelet. dungsarmband vorhanden.
Every printed circuit board has a ground- Jede Leiterplatte hat einen Erdung-
ing outer edge, which is connected to the saußenrand, der mit dem Massean-
ground terminal of the module, and which schluss der Baugruppe verbunden ist,
can be used to grasp the board. und an dem die Platte angefasst werden
kann.
⇒ Avoid touching any device termi- ⇒ Vermeiden Sie es, irgendwelche

nals, contacts of the connector strip Bauelementeanschlüsse, Kon-
or printed conductors − even if you takte der Steckerleiste oder Leiter-
are properly grounded. bahnen − auch bei
vorschriftsmäßiger Körpererdung −
zu berühren.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 29
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
⇒ When pulling and inserting mod- ⇒ Verwenden Sie beim Ziehen und
ules, use the integral plug and pull Stecken von Baugruppen die daran
aids (plastic levers). angebrachten Zieh- und Steckhil-
fen (Kunststoffhebel).
Modules which are located in a screened, Baugruppen, die sich in einem abge-
unopened housing are protected at any schirmten, ungeöffneten Gehäuse befind-
rate. en, sind in jedem Fall geschützt.
☞ The ☞
European Standards EN Die Europa-Normen EN 100015-1
100015-1 to 4 contain instructions bis 4 geben Anleitungen zum sach-
how to handle electrostatically-sen- gemäßen Umgang mit elek-
sitive devices properly. trostatisch gefährdeten
Bauelementen.
2.3.2 Handling Optical Fiber Connectors and Cables /

Handhabung von LWL-Steckverbindungen und -Leitungen
Optical connectors are precision-made Optische Steckverbindungen sind Präzi-
components and must be handled ac- sionsteile und müssen dementsprechend
cordingly. To ensure faultless function, behandelt werden. Eine einwandfreie
the following points must be observed. Funktion ist nur dann sichergestellt, wenn
nachfolgende Punkte berücksichtigt wer-
den.
The minimum bending radius for optical fi- Für LWL-Leitungen darf ein Biegeradius
! bers is 30 mm! von 30 mm nicht unterschritten werden!
Mechanical damage to the surfaces of op- Mechanische Beschädigungen der Stirn-

tical connectors impairs transmission flächen von optischen Steckverbindungen
quality by higher attenuation. erhöhen die Dämpfung und mindern de-
shalb die Übertragungsqualität.
⇒ For this reason, do not expose the ⇒ Vermeiden Sie deshalb Stoß-
connectors to impact. beanspruchungen der Steck-
verbinder.
30 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
⇒ Always fit optical fiber connectors ⇒ Schützen Sie LWL-Steckverbinder

with protective caps to guard them grundsätzlich mit einer Schutz-
against mechanical damage and kappe vor mechanischen Beschä-
contamination. The protective dust digungen und Verschmutzungen.
caps should only be removed im- Die Staubschutzkappe soll erst un-
mediately prior to installation. mittelbar vor dem Einbau entfernt
werden.
⇒ Once the protective dust caps have ⇒ Prüfen Sie nach Entfernen der
been removed, you must check the Staubschutzkappen die Stirn-
surfaces of the optical fiber connec- flächen der LWL-Stecker auf Saub-
tors to ensure that they are clean, erkeit und reinigen Sie sie
and clean them if necessary. gegebenenfalls.
For cleaning, the C42334-A380- Zum Reinigen kann das LWL-Rein-
A926 optical fiber cleaning tool or a igungswerkzeug C42334-A380-
clean, lint-free cellulose cloth or a A926 oder ein einwandfrei saub-
chamois leather is suitable. Freon eres, fusselfreies Zellstofftuch oder
TF, isopropyl alcohol (99 %), or Fensterleder verwendet werden.
white spirit can be used as cleaning Als Reinigungsflüssigkeit kann
fluids. Freon TF, Isopropylalkohol (99 %)
oder Spiritus verwendet werden.
2.3.3 Handling Batteries / Handhabung von Batterien

Some equipment may contain accumula- Bestimmte Geräte können Akkumulator-
tors or batteries of different technologies − en oder Batterien verschiedener Technol-
e. g. lithium batteries or others. ogien enthalten − z. B. Lithium-Batterien
oder andere.
☞ Basically, ☞ Grundsätzlich
the VDE 0510 gilt die Vorschrift
(DIN57510) regulations are valid. VDE 0510 (DIN57510).
☞ Also
ternational standards, if applicable: ☞ folgende internationale Normen:
observe also the following in- Beachten Sie gegebenenfalls auch
IEC 60130-17 (device interconnec- IEC 60130-17 (Geräteverbindun-

tions) gen)
IEC 61429 (recycling symbol) IEC 61429 (Recyclingsymbol)
IEC 61438 (safety and health haz- IEC 61438 (Sicherheits- und
ards) Gesundheitsrisiken)
IEC 60086-4 (handling lithium bat- IEC 60086-4 (Umgang mit Lithium-
teries) Batterien)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 31
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
⇒ Pay attention to error messages re- ⇒ Achten Sie auf Fehlermeldungen,

ferring to the accumulator or the die sich auf den Akkumulator bzw.
battery. die Batterie beziehen.
Accumulators or batteries which are inte- Ins Gerät eingebaute Akkumulatoren oder
grated in the device should only be re- Batterien sollen nur beim Gerätehersteller
placed by the equipment manufacturer. ausgetauscht werden.
⇒ If replacement is necessary, do not ⇒ Wenn ein Austausch erforderlich
remove the accumulator or the bat- ist, dann bauen Sie nicht den Akku-
tery from the device, but send in the mulator oder die Batterie aus dem
complete device or the removable Gerät aus, sondern schicken Sie
battery pack. das komplette Gerät oder das her-
ausnehmbare Batteriepack ein.
Never shortcut batteries directly without Schließen Sie niemals Batterien direkt
! using a discharging resistor! Without a re- ohne Entladewiderstand kurz! Ohne Wid-
sistor very high current will flow causing a erstand können so hohe Ströme fließen,
risk of explosion! dass Explosionsgefahr besteht.
If you depollute batteries, you must ob- Beim Entsorgen von Batterien müssen
serve the local regulations applicable to die örtlichen Vorschriften über Beseiti-
hazardous waste. gung von Sondermüll eingehalten wer-
den.
2.4 Switching OFF and ON / Aus- und Einschalten
2.4.1 Emergency Switching OFF / Notabschaltung “OFF”

⇒ Especially if smoke or fire escapes ⇒ Insbesondere falls Rauch oder
from the device (or in other emer- Feuer aus dem Gerät austritt (oder
gency situations), switch OFF the in anderen Notsituationen), schalt-
device immediately − by all relevant en Sie das Gerät sofort aus − mit
circuit breakers in the connector allen zugehörigen Sicherungsauto-
panel of the rack. maten im Gestell-Anschlussfeld.
First, switch OFF the protection Schalten Sie möglichst zuerst die
power supply and then the working Ersatz-Stromversorgung aus, dann
power supply, if possible. die Betriebs-Stromversorgung.
32 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
⇒ However, consider that such an ⇒ Bedenken Sie jedoch, dass durch

emergency shutdown can discon- solch eine Notabschaltung wichtige
nect important communication lines Kommunikationsleitungen unter-
which may be required just in the brochen werden können, die
case of emergency. gerade im Notfall eventuell drin-
. gend benötigt werden.
For this reason, shutdown the de- Nehmen Sie deshalb nur dann eine
vice only if it is inevitable. Other- Notabschaltung vor, wenn es un-
wise perform the normal switching- umgänglich ist. Verfahren Sie sonst
off procedure (Chapter 2.4.2). entsprechend der normalen Ab-
schaltprozedur (Kapitel 2.4.2).
⇒ After the emergency shutdown, ⇒ Überprüfen Sie nach dem Notab-

check if the device is dead − either schalten, ob das Gerät spannungs-
by using a measuring device or by frei ist − entweder mit einem
the LED display of the device, if ap- Messgerät oder gegebenenfalls
plicable. durch eine LED-Anzeige am Gerät.
2.4.2 Normal Switching OFF Procedure / Normales Abschalten “OFF”

⇒ 1. Make sure that the device does ⇒ 1. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das ab-
no longer transmit any traffic zuschaltende Gerät keine
signals, or that they are trans- Nutzsignale mehr überträgt
mitted via a protection device. bzw. dass diese über Ersatzein-
richtungen umgeleitet werden.
⇒ 2. Save the local data base. ⇒ 2. Sichern Sie die lokale Daten-
basis.
⇒ 3. Switch OFF the laser. ⇒ 3. Schalten Sie den Laser ab.
⇒ 4. Switch OFF the device − by all ⇒ 4. Schalten Sie das Gerät aus −
relevant circuit breakers in the mit allen relevanten Sicherung-
connector panel of the rack. sautomaten im Gestell-
Anschlussfeld.
⇒ First, switch OFF the protection ⇒ Schalten Sie zuerst die Ersatz-
power supply and then the Stromversorgung aus, dann die
working power supply. Betriebs-Stromversorgung.
⇒ 5. After the shutdown, check if the ⇒ 5. Überprüfen Sie nach dem Ab-
device is dead − either by using schalten, ob das Gerät span-
a measuring device or by the nungsfrei ist − entweder mit
LED display of the device, if ap- Hilfe eines Messgerätes oder
plicable. gegebenenfalls durch die LED-
Anzeige am Gerät
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 33
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
2.5 Switching ON / Einschalten “ON”

⇒ 1. Switch ON the device using the ⇒ 1. Schalten Sie das Gerät mit dem
circuit breaker in the connector Sicherungsautomat im Gestell-
panel of the rack. Anschlussfeld ein.
⇒ 2. Start the LCT operating terminal ⇒ 2. Starten Sie das Bedienterminal

and carry out the commission- LCT und führen Sie die Inbe-
ing procedure as described in triebnahme entsprechend
this Installation and Test Manu- diesem Inbetriebnahmehand-
al (ITMN). buch durch (ITMN).
⇒ 3. Switch ON the Laser. ⇒ 3. Schalten Sie den Laser ein.
34 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
3 Introduction
3.1 Personnel Requirements

The personnel responsible for the installation and maintenance of the equipment must
meet the following requirements:
• Training as service technician or equivalent training in telecommunications
• Sound basic knowledge of transmission technology and the construction of ex-
changes
• Relevant, practical training by the equipment manufacturer, including knowledge ac-
quisition of the equipment and systems required for the planned activity.
• PC knowledge, basic familiarity with the operation of MS Windows NT
• Basic knowledge of test engineering, familiarity with the operation of test equipment
• Familiarity with handling electrostatically-sensitive components
• Familiarity with handling optical fibers and laser light sources.
• Familiarity with handling high temperature electronic modules having heat-sinks and
components carrying heat above 45 degrees Celsius (~113 to 185 degrees Fahren-
heit or 36 to 68 degrees Reaumur).
3.2 As-Delivered Condition, Checking for Missing Items

Prior to assembly, it is advisable to check the delivered equipment, including accesso-
ries, to ensure that
– The correct items have been delivered,
– The delivered items correspond to the information on the delivery documents, and
– None of the items is damaged.
Particular attention should be paid to the connector pins in the terminal panel, to ensure
i that they are not damaged or bent.
3.3 Tools and Accessories Required

• Assembly tool
• ESD grounding bracelet
• Cleaning aids: isopropanol 99 % and lint-free cloth
• Special cotton gloves for touching high temperature equipment between 45 and 85
degrees Celsius (~113 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit or 36 to 68 degrees Reaumur).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 35
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4 Mechanical Configuration and Cabling

General Remarks
☞ Are the following cards and modules mentioned in a general description, in a

picture or in a schematic it is also stated for their extended and upgrade ones
not named in detail:
CLL -> CLL64-2,
OIS4 -> OIS4-2,
OIS16 -> OIS16-2,
SCU -> SCU-R2 -> SCU-R2E.
4.1 Declaration of the CE Conformity

The CE declaration of conformity for the product are fulfilled if the construction and ca-
bling is undertaken in accordance with the manual and the documents listed therein,
e. g. mounting instructions, cable lists. Where necessary account should be taken of
project-specific documents.
Deviations from the specifications or unstipulated changes during construction, e. g. the
use of cable types with lower screening values, is a violation of the CE requirements. In
such cases the conformity declaration is invalidated and the responsibility immediately
passes to the persons undertaking and causing the unauthorized deviations.
4.2 Rack Construction

An empty rack (Product Number S42023-P331-A1), conforming to ETSI Standards and
measuring 600 mm x 2200 mm x 300 mm (W x H x D), is supplied in order to accom-
modate the subracks. It is supplied in separate components and is assembled and bolt-
ed together on site. The rack can be set up as a stand-alone unit or as part of a multiple
system. It is also possible to install mutually-independent network elements.
36 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Rack terminal panel
x+11
Drilling points for bolted fastenings

SLD16 (single-row subrack)
x+22
Grounding sockets,
e. g. for ESD grounding cables
x+11
x+19
Drilling points for bolted fastenings

SLT16E (double-row subrack)
x+26
x+34
x = Hole numbers counted from the upper dotted line
Fig. 4.1 Typical Equipping Example of a Rack

Conforming to the ETSI Standard
When mounting subracks and modules in to the rack, it should be noted that the per-
! missible overall power dissipation in the rack is reduced at increased ambient tempera-
ture. In certain cases it may only be possible to partially equip the rack with subracks or
modules.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 37
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.1 Installation
The rack is installed and attached below a planar cable shelf (2645 mm and 2800 mm)
or to the wall (2300 mm), depending on local circumstances. To allow this, the rack has
a height-adjustable adapter. The lower part of the rack is fixed to the bottom rails (Bw7R)
with two pins or alternatively screwed to the floor. Height-adjustable feet can compen-
sate for unevenness of the floor level of up to 25 mm.
Attachment kits are available for mounting below a planar cable shelf. The rack can al-
ternatively be attached to the wall. The necessary vertical stability will only be ensured
if the rack is attached to a planar cable shelf or is wall mounted.
Each rack is supplied with a pack of 30 pieces captive nuts M6 for attaching the sub-
racks. These are to be inserted from behind into the vertical front side rails in the re-
quired numbers, and at the required height into the openings provided on the rack sides
depending on the subracks to be installed. Furthermore the bolts supplied as installation
aids must be fitted with a captive nut in the necessary height unit and fixed with an ad-
ditional hexagonal nut. When the subrack is mounted later it are pushed onto the bolts.
In addition, cladding panels, consisting of a door and a rear panel in each case, can be
! fitted optionally. Sufficient space must be left below the rack, to let enter air. If cladding
panels are fitted, the amount of equipment mounted in the rack must be reduced.
The door can be opened by an angle of 165˚ and can be removed without the use of
special tools.
In the base area, the rack can either be adapted to fit the Bw7R (Style 7R) infrastructure
(225 mm) (see above), or expanded, using the provided supplementary base extension,
to 300 mm.
For the ETSI system rack, the following installation instructions are numbered as follows
(but are not part of this manual):
– ETSI system rack S42021-A121-Z20-*-7683
– General construction C42166-A153-D35-*-7431
– Cable holders C42166-A153-D27-*-7431
– Transport Systems Installation Manual A42020-S178-H1-*-7431
Detailed installation instructions and installation guidelines for installing and assembling
i the ETSI rack, the terminal panel, the MAU, the cable connectors, etc. can be found in
the Installation Manual IMN A42020-S178-H1-*-7431.
38 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.2 The Grounding

This is an important point on every electrical equipment, which the user must watch for.
Especially for stand alone equipment, desktop, or wall mounted one, having electrical
interfaces connected with cables leaving the room and the building in which the device
is located. To avoid human and equipment hazardous, a good grounding and potential
balancing must be there.
To ensure each cable guide, each device, each equipment, and each power supply,
each remoting device, each Signalling device and each telecommunication system be-
ing interconnected for the best measurement should have a potential balancing to the
common telecommunications room or the buildings grounding and earthing point.
It depends on the local circumstances, the environment conditions, the national and the
user grounding standards. In communication equipment rooms, using a rack environ-
ment, the racks are commonly grounded and / or earthed and may have a potential bal-
ancing between the local building grounding.
In an isolated case, the earth measures documentation of the building should be used,
and with an appropriate potential balancing method, the rack and the equipment is to
connect with the local earth and ground facilities.
The Functional- and the Protection Grounding of a communications system is identical
with the expressions of the communications equipment Functional Working Earth (FWE)
and the Working Protective Earth (WPE) used formerly.
In some cases, the working earth can be connected due to potential balancing purposes
with the protective earth.
Before the external cabling (from the telecommunications center) is connected to the
system rack, the rack frame must be grounded. This grounding must remain effective
for as long as external cables are connected to the equipment.
The Common Grounding is only for Power Grounding and Signal Grounding purposes
and itself has no Protective Grounding Functions. All Functional Grounds, Signal
Grounds and Power Grounds must be fed to a common point. This common point can
be connected (potential-balancing), or not, to the Sites Protective Ground, depending
on the local circumstances and the equipment environment in accordance to the nation-
al standards.
Sockets marked with ground symbols are attached to the front of the left-hand and right-
hand cross member rails of the rack. This points are only for maintenance and service
purpose on changing ESD sensitive modules to use these connection points with
grounding bracelets fitted with banana plugs (4 mm) in order to equalize the electric po-
tential of the service personnels hands and body to that of the equipment to avoid ESD
hazardous.
See also Chapter 2.1. (Protective Measures ...)
As the equipment is not only used in a rack, last, which commonly is connected to the
room and building ground facilities, on the other side, the stand alone equipment needs
more watching, and in unknown cases a measurement for the right and proper ground-
ing. Therefore, in the following, as a help, most of the grounding methods and equip-
ment protection classes are listed. In doubt cases, the user should carefully read the
mentioned standards for how to match the grounding safety regulations for its special
case.
As an example some common grounding facilities and their labels, as well as their relat-
ed standards are listed next:
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 39
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
The Grounding is the total sum of all meth- Die Erdung ist die Summe aller Mittel und
! ods and measures to ground in the mean of Maßnahmen zum Erden in Art, Zweck und
the way, the purpose and the shape. Form.
See VDE 0100 Part 200. Siehe VDE 0100 Teil 200.
For communications equipment this is the Bei Kommunikationsgeräten ist das die
summary of: Zusammenfassung von:
- Telecommunications Equipment - Fernmelderder
Grounding Erdung
- Functional Grounding - Funktionserder
- Protections Grounding - Schutzerdung
- Lightning Protections Grounding - Blitzschutzerdung
- Overfatigue Equipment Protection - Überspannungsschutzableitung
Grounding Conduction Erdungsleitung
- Equipotential Balancing - Potentialausgleich
- Shield Grounding - Schirmerdung
- Line / Cable Shield Grounding - Leitungsschirmerdung
- User based Grounding (f.e. Railways - Anwendererde (z. B. Bahnerdung)
Grounding)
- Grounding and Shielding for EMC - Grounding and Shielding for EMV
In some cases the hints, according to VDE Gegebenenfalls sind auch die Hinweise
0228 may be useful to watch for minimizing der VDE 0228 zu beachten um störende
bad interference influences on telecommu- Einflüsse von Energieversorgungseinrich-
nications equipment coming from the mains tungen auf Telekommunikationseinrichtun-
power supply devices. gen zu mindern.
As a proposal, the SL / SM / SX and WDM Es wird deshalb vorgeschlagen, für die SL

equipment should be protected with the aid / SM / SX und WDM Geräte einen entspre-
of a potential balancing, according to VDE chenden Potential ausgleich zwischen
0800 Part 2, between all local grounding allen örtlich vorhandenen Erdungs-
measures. Especially between one of the maßnahmen, gemäß VDE 0800 Teil 2, vor-
following mentioned ones and the equip- zunehmen. Insbesondere zwischen einem
ment, to get the best possible protection for der nachfolgend genannten und dem
the human being working with it and the Gerät, um den bestmöglichen Schutz für
equipment itself. die mit ihm arbeitenden Personen und das
Gerät zu erzielen.
40 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Methods of Grounding and Protection Classes with the Labels Used for it.
1. Earth (E) / Erdung
At the equipment, at the rack or frame, and Am Gerät, am Gestell oder Rahmen, und
at the building, as a rule, the point is mark- am Gebäude ist dieser Punkt in der Regel
ed with this symbol. mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnet.
The beside shown Label in accordance to Es kann nebenstehendes Schild in Über-

IEC (60)417 (picture 5017) may be added. einstimmung mit IEC (60)417
(Schild 5017) angebracht sein.
See VDE 0100-540, VDE 0800-1 ... -2, and Siehe VDE 0100-540, VDE 0800-1 ... -2,
VDE 0800-310. und VDE 0800-310.
2. Noiseless Earth or Ground (TE) / Fremdspannungsarme Erde

At the equipment, at the rack or frame, and Am Gerät, am Gestell und am Gebäude ist
at the building, as a rule, the point is mark- dieser Punkt in der Regel mit diesem Sym-
ed with this symbol. bol gekennzeichnet.
The beside shown Label in accordance to Es kann nebenstehendes Schild in Über-

3. Protective Earth or Grounding (PE) / Schutzerdung

The beside shown Label in accordance to Es kann nebenstehendes Schilder in Über-

VDE 0800-310. und VDE 0800-310.
4. Functional Earth or Grounding (FE) / Funktionserdung

This is the Equipment Ground (Chassis- or Dies ist die Gerätemasse (Gehäuse- oder
the Rack- Ground). See DIN VDE 0100- Gestell-Masse). Siehe DIN VDE 0100-540,
540, VDE 0800-1 ... -2 / IEC 64/886/CDV. VDE 0800-1 ... -2 / IEC 64/886/CDV.

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 41
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5. Equipotential Grounding (CC) / Potentialausgleich-Erdung


6. Over Voltage Protection Equipment Earth or Grounding Conduction /

Überspannungsschutzgeräte- (Erd-)Ableitung
at the building, as a rule, the point is mark- dieser Punkt in der Regel mit einem der
ed with one of the above mentioned sym- vorgenannten Symbole gekennzeichnet.
bols.
See DIN VDE 0845, and also EN 61000, as Siehe DIN VDE 0845, und auch EN 61000,
far as prEN 55101 (IEC 801). sowie prEN 55101 (IEC 801).
7. Combined Functional- and Protective Earth and Grounding (FPE) /

Kombinierte Funktions- und Schutzerdung
at the building, as a rule, the point is mark- dieser Punkt in der Regel mit einem oder
ed with one or two of the above mentioned zwei der vorgenannten Symbole gekenn-
symbols. zeichnet.
VDE 0800-310. und VDE 0800-310.
8. Lightning Protection Earth or Grounding / Blitzschutzerdung

bols.
See DIN VDE 0109 (IEC664), and Siehe DIN VDE 0109 (IEC664), und
see VDE 0185-1 with part 103 siehe VDE 0185-1 mit Teil 103
(IEC 1312-1). (IEC 1312-1).
9. Customers or Users Specific Earth or Grounding /

Kunden- oder anwenderspezifische Erdung
bols.
See for an example VDE 0115-3. Siehe als Beispiel VDE 0115-3.
42 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
10. Protection Classes of Equipment: / Schutzklassen von Geräten:

The equipment, as a rule, is marked with Das Gerät ist in der Regel mit diesem Sym-
this symbol. bol gekennzeichnet.
It are distinguished between the following Es wird zwischen folgenden Maßnahmen

methods: unterschieden:
Equipment with Geräte mit

Protective Earthing and Grounding Schutzerdung
(Protection Class 1) (Schutzklasse 1)

Double or Enforced Isolation Doppelter oder Verstärkter Isolation

Protective Low Voltages Schutzkleinspannungen
(FELV / PELV / SELV) (FELV / PELV / SELV)

Telecommunications Network Voltage Telekommunikationsnetz-Spannung
(TNV) (TNV)
In case equipment of different classes is to Falls Geräte unterschiedlicher Schutzklas-

i be connected and combined together, care sen miteinander verbunden oder kombini-
must be taken and the electrical safety reg- ert werden, ist Vorsicht geboten und es
ulations dealing with this case are to be sind die nach den Vorschriften notwendi-
watched, to avoid hazardous to human and gen Maßnahmen anzuwenden, um
equipment. Schaden von Mensch und Gerät zu ver-
meiden.
Furthermore only such equipment as well Außerdem dürfen nur solche Geräte, auch
as measurement equipment is allowed to Meßgeräte, angeschlossen werden, die
connect to, being manufactured under the nach den anerkannten Regeln der Elektro-
approved rules of the electrotechnics and technik gebaut wurden und über die
provided with the corresponding approvals. entsprechenden Prüfkennzeichen verfü-
gen.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 43
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.2.1 The Equipment Grounding in a Rack Environment

The rack is grounded by screwing it to the grounded planar cable shelf.
⇒ If a planar cable shelf is not used during installation (e. g. installation as an indi-
vidual or stand alone rack), the rack must be connected in a conventional man-
ner to the existing system protection ground. An M6 grounding bolt, to which a
grounding cable can be connected, is provided for this purpose in the upper sec-
tion of the rack. The minimum cross section of the copper grounding cable must
be 16 mm.
If the subracks are not grounded via the rack, always ensure that a suitable method of
! grounding for them is provided.
4.2.2.2 The Equipment Grounding in a Stand Alone Environment

The stand alone equipment is grounded by the equipment accessory grounding cable.
⇒ If a stand alone equipment or device is used, ground it with the accompanied ac-
cessory grounding cable to the next grounding potential point of the room or the
building.
Make sure, (by measurement) that the chosen grounding point is connected with
the common room or building grounding potential.
The minimum cross section of the copper grounding cable (high-flex copper wire
isolated) from the device or the equipment to the room or building grounding
point for the user must be as a minimum 2,5 mm.
The minimum cross section of the copper grounding cable from the room or the
building to its common ground potential must be 16 mm or an equivalent cross
section on using metal grounding rails for it.
If there is no grounding point, always ensure that a suitable method of grounding for the
! stand alone equipment is provided.
Refer to the rooms or the buildings grounding plans and schemes, and / or watch the
guidelines of the local power and electricity supplier.
4.2.3 Cable Arrangement

All electrical lines and cables (power cabling, connection lines for the telecommunica-
tions center, cabling between the subracks, and the rack terminal panel) as well as the
optical fiber cables (FO) for the transmission lines, are routed through the lateral sup-
ports of the rack and are secured with cable ties.
4.2.4 Subrack Arrangement in a Rack

Subracks of different types (f. e. SMA1K-CP and SMA16 or may be other vendors) be-
side one single SL16 may be arranged in the same rack.
4.2.5 Subrack Interfacing

Subracks with terminal panels will interface via the cables to the rack terminal panel,
which in turn will interface to the local equipment and other racks. For details, refer to
the local or proprietary cabling documentation.
44 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.6 Power Supply and DC-Current Supply Interfacing

The rack is to be supplied with a DC voltage of a minimum of 40 Volts to a maximum of
72 Volts. The maximum power consumption for the rack may be approximately.
1200 Watt with maximum equipment.
The SLD/T16x subrack will consume (without a fan unit):
SLD/T16, SLD/T16B: 290 Watts fully equipped.

SLD/T16E, 420 Watts fully equipped.
SLD/T16BE:
Care must be taken if non SLD/T16 equipment and other vendor equipment is being
! mixed up in a rack and if the SLD/T16E or SLD/T16BE is used with the other equipment
having much more than 350 Watt waste heat and there is less free space between the
subracks.
If temperature is raising above specifications, in extreme cases, it might be necessary
to use an additional fan unit between both subracks.
For connecting the cables (see Fig. 4.2) the cover of the relevant fuse panel must be
removed.
– Battery cables between telecommunications center and rack fuse panel
must be connected first, before switching on the power to the rack.
– Turn the individual circuit breakers of the fuse panel to the “off” position for starting
or continuing work on a none-communication traffic carrying system.
– Battery cables between fuse panel and subracks
must be connected first, before switching on the power to each subrack.
Fig. 4.2 Schematic View of the Rack Power Supply Cabling
The protection voltage source must not be connected to the terminals of the working
i voltage source.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 45
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.6.1 Rack Supply and Rack Power Interfacing

The battery voltage (36 V to 72 V), provided by the telecommunications center, is to be
fed in the fuse panel to the terminals (plus and minus) of the connector strip. Two multi
core single cables with a cross-section of maximum 25 mm2, minimum 6 mm2 (e. g.
P-wire cable H07V-R, order no. 5DA1130-5) are used for this purpose, inserted into the
terminals at the top of the fuse panel, and secured by screws from the front.
When connecting the cables, note their polarity!
4.2.6.2 Subpart Supply and Subrack Power Interfacing

Power is fed from the fuse panel to the double row subrack using the rack cabling com-
partment (see Fig. 4.3) schematics.
Individual battery leads should be connected to each fuse panel, leading to the connec-
tor block of the circuit breaker in the fuse panel. The connection to the subrack is estab-
lished using a 3-pin Sub-D connector in terminal panel 101 of the subrack. For this, a
suitable shielded cable for C1[103], D1[104] of type V42256-R636-A50 should be used.
Redundant battery feed cables to the subrack are provided (C1[103] for working, and
D1[104] for protection). They must be used routed in different ways to ensure the func-
tioning.
To the Terminal field of the rack To the Terminal field of the rack
101
A1 B1
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
CUST- IN/OUT
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
A1
A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 ON
A2
A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7
ON
PSUTP
A3
A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8
EBSL
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU TIF
301
M1 N1 P1
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1 L1
T3/T4 T3/T4
75Ω
AUX1 AUX3 AUX5 F E&M Bw7R Q Q 120Ω
AUX2 AUX4 AUX6 M2 N2
Fig. 4.3 Schematic View of the Power Supply and the Control Cables between
Fuse Panel, Rack Terminal Panel and SLD/T16E Subrack
46 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.7 Signalling Interfaces and Lines

Fig. 4.4 shows the general assignments of the Bw7R connectors of the relevant sub-
rack feed to the connectors of the rack signal distributor. For example, the subrack 1 is
a SLD16 device and the subrack 2 may be a SLT16E (Fig. 4.1), or it may be empty with
a blind cover. Furthermore up to 3 devices occupying an approximately space of a
SLD16 might be possible to mount in a rack (see Fig. 4.1).
Mixing up the cables by connecting them to connectors Q/B3 (QST/B3) (308) or Q/F
! (QST/F) (307), instead of Bw7R Alarm (309). It can result in damage to the SCU.
The cables are normally labeled (for example 309) with the panel plug number, as
shown in the last set of above brackets, to connect them properly.
Alarms ZA(A) and ZA(B) of connectors 1 to 6 are be routed to connector 7. From there,
the alarms are passed on to central service observation ZBBeo. Alarms a, b and el of
connectors 1 to 6 reach connector 8, from which they are forwarded to the signal loop
in the telecommunications center or to the adjacent signal distributor.
Signal distributor
Detail A
SigVt To central service
Rack observation in the
8 telecommunica-
tions center
Rack terminal panel 7
A
To signal loop in
1
the telecommuni-
2
cations center or
3
from the adjacent
Bw7R signal distributor
4
Subrack 1 5
6
Bw7R
Bw7R
Subrack 2
DCM
Fig. 4.4 Connector Assignment for Central Alarms
4.2.8 External Synchronization Interfacing

For frequency-synchronized operation of the network-external reference clocks, T3 can
be fed into the subrack (see Fig. 4.4 to Fig. 4.11, connections T3 / T4). The option of
choosing between two clock inputs is available via an LCT / NCT setting (see OMN:SL).
In addition, the output T4 is available for external clock supply.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 47
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.9 Spare Space below the Subracks

Below the subrack 1 some space is available for a second and a third SLD/T16 or an-
other non SL-type subrack, depending on the single or double row subrack frames used.
This space may be occupied, or left free, depending on the locally recommendations.
Using this free space for other or non Siemens equipment care is to be taken and atten-
tion should be paid to the remarks of Chapter 4.2.4
4.2.10 Power Supply Cables

The cover of the relevant fuse panel must be removed in order to connect the power
supply cables (see Fig. 4.4).
– Battery voltage cables between the telecommunications center and the fuse pan-
el:
In the terminal panel, the battery voltage (40 V to 72 V) supplied by the telecommu-
nications center must be routed to the (plus and Minus) terminals of the connector
strip. For this purpose, two stranded single cables with a conductor cross-section of
max. 25 mm2 and min. 6 mm2 (e. g. H07V-R P-wire cable, order no. 5DA1130-5) are
inserted into the terminals at the top of the fuse panel and then secured from the
front.
Observe the polarity of the cables!
– For further work, set the individual circuit breakers of the fuse panel to the “Off” po-
sition.
– Battery voltage cables between the fuse panel and the subracks:
Voltage is supplied from the fuse panel to the subrack via the rack cabling. Separate
battery voltage cables must be connected to each subrack and leading to the termi-
nal block of a circuit breaker in the fuse panel. Each connection to the subrack is
made via a 3-pin sub-D connector in terminal panel 101 of the subrack, using a
Type V42256-R520-A50 cable.
The battery voltage terminals on the subrack are designed for redundancy (A1 for
operation and B1 for standby) and are used in different ways.
The standby voltage source should not be connected to the terminals of the operating
i voltage source.
4.2.11 Signalling Cables

Fig. 4.4 shows the assignment of the Bw7R connector of each subrack to the connec-
tors of the signal distributor.
Cross-connection of the connecting cable to connector Q instead of Bw7R can result
! in damage to the SCU module.
Alarm messages ZA(A) and ZA(B) from connectors 1 to 6 are routed to connector 7.
From there, the alarms are relayed to the ZBBeo signal assignment distributor. Alarm
messages a, b and el from connectors 1 to 6 are routed to connector 8, from which they
are relayed to the signal loop in the telecommunications center or to the adjacent signal
distributor.
48 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.2.12 External Synchronization

For synchronized-frequency operation of the network, T3 external reference clocks can
be fed into the subrack (see Fig. 4.7 to Fig. 4.9, terminals T3 / T4). There is a choice of
two clock inputs settable from the LCT / NCT (see OMN:SL). Output T4 can also be used
for an external clock supply of other equipment.
4.3 Construction of the Subracks

The subracks are mechanically designed (in accordance with ETSI 300-119-4) for the
installation in a rack, last, which conforms to ETSI Standard 300-119-2 (Part 3).
The location of the cable terminals on the subracks is designed to enable the cabling in
the rack to conform to ETSI recommendations (electrical connections and optical fiber
cables to the right and left respectively of the subrack).
Specially-formed (rounded) cable guides ensure that the glass fibers are being prevent
from being over bent and having the correct radius when the optical fiber connections
are installed and secured.
The openings by which the FO lines leave the subracks are dimensioned to meet the
EMC and ESD requirements.
The type and number of modules installed in the subracks is dependent on the particular
application (see 5.3).
Two types of subrack are available: single-row and double-row.
– Single-row subracks (see Fig. 4.9) can accommodate up to 25 modules:
a maximum of 9 modules can be inserted in the upper section and a maximum of 16
modules can be inserted in the lower section.
– Double-row subracks (see Fig. 4.10) can accommodate up to 38 modules:
a maximum of 10 modules can be inserted in the upper section, with a maximum of
17 modules in the lower section and a maximum of 11 modules in the lower section.
For preference, the subracks should be installed into the rack in the following sequence,
i.e. commencing with the lowest rack mounting location. This will simplify subsequent
routing of the cables for additional subracks.
1. Subrack at the bottom / cabling at the bottom (rack trunking)
2. Subrack in the middle / cabling in the middle (rack trunking)
3. Subrack at the top / cabling at the top (rack trunking)
Note the weight information on the label on the subrack!
! Maximum weight to be lifted by 1 person = 18 kg.
The locating holes for attaching the subracks are identified by numbers (height units,
starting at the top) on the front of the rack uprights.
A mounting bracket is fitted to each side of the subracks; these mounting brackets are
used to attach the subracks to the pre drilled rails of the racks.
The subracks must be located on the rack (on the mounting bolts supplied), working
from the front, and then secured at the appropriate installation height.
If the subrack is not to be mounted in an ETSI rack, provision must be made for ade-
! quate grounding. For more information to grounding see hints in Chapter 4.2.2.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 49
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.3.1 Subrack Terminal Panel Cabling

The slots 201 to 212 and the terminal panels 101 and 301 (with Sub-D connectors A1
to P1) are located in the upper section of the subracks (see Fig. 4.7 to Fig. 4.8) and are
accessible from the front. These incorporate all the electrical connections.
Power supply terminals A1 and B1 are located in terminal panel 101.
When LTU modules are used, the slot 201 to 212 forms the data interface for the tribu-
tary connections and, using the TIF telemetry interface module, contacts for monitoring
external customer-specific equipment.
The terminal panel 301 incorporates all the connections for signalling, controlling and
servicing.
The optical connections are routed to the relevant modules in their mounting positions
4nn and 5nn.
All the copper and optical fiber cables are routed through the lateral cabling compart-
ments of the racks. The cables are installed from the outside (left, right) to the inside
(middle) (see Fig. 5.1).
4.3.2 Power Supply

Connectors A1 and B1, for a connection to the operating voltage sources 1 and 2, are
located in the terminal panel 101.
The terminal B1 is provided for the redundant operating voltage (standby operating volt-
age).
Input voltages (DC): 40 V to 72 V
Maximum power consumption of the subracks:
– SLD/T16: 290 W
– SLD/T16E: 420 W
The pin assignment is shown in Fig. 11.5.
4.3.3 Electrical Interfaces

The tributary interfaces are located in their mounting positions 201 to 209 of each sub-
rack and are implemented to the cable lines using the LTU modules. The number of trib-
utaries is dependent on the number of tributaries. The terminal assignment is described
in Chapter 11.
The matching types of connector and cable are listed in Tab. 4.5.
4.3.4 Optical Interfaces

The optical cables are connected to the OIS modules (see Fig. 4.7 to Fig. 4.8). The op-
tical fiber cables are routed using corresponding cross-connection eyelets in the sub-
racks and fed direct to the relevant module. The OB and OP modules are connected
inside the subrack using optical fiber cables fed to the OIS modules.
The matching optical fiber cables are listed in Tab. 4.5.
50 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.3.5 The Monitoring, the Signalling and the Operating Interfaces
4.3.5.1 Terminal Panel 301

The interfaces for controlling and servicing purposes (see Tab. 4.1) are located in ter-
minal panel 301. They are in the form of 9-, 15- or 25-pin Sub-D connectors.
Designation of the Sub-D Con- Function

nector in Terminal Panel 301
AUX1 to AUX6 User-specific auxiliary channel AUX1, V.11 and G.703
F Serial interface to the PC
E&M 2-wire and 4-wire E&M interface, external ringer
Bw7R Bw7R Signalling
Q Communication channel to the TMN
T3 / T4 Network clock synchronization, T3IN and T4OUT
Telephone symbol 2-wire DTMF handset
Tab. 4.1 Interfaces for Service and Operation
4.3.5.2 Monitoring at an EIPS1- Module

4 monitoring outputs, M1 to M4 (75 Ω coaxial, –20 dB), are located on the front of each
module for an external signal monitoring of the 4 bidirectional interfaces 155 Mbit/s /
140 Mbit/s.
The matching types of connector and cable are listed in Tab. 4.5.
4.3.6 Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) for the LAN Connection

The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) forms the point of transition from an Ethernet LAN
interface, either using coaxial 10Base2 (standard supply), twisted pairs STP 10BaseT
(optionally) or LWL 10BaseF (on special demand) medium, to the balanced Q-B3 inter-
face of the network element (NE). The MAU kit provides a set of 3 MAU for a whole rack.
For future update an empty space for a fourth MAU is left in the MAU holder plate
(see Fig. 4.6). One MAU unit is provided for each subrack. The MAU is used to inter-
connect all the systems of a rack or a number of racks (NE and LCT/NCT) using one of
the above mentioned media, standardly a coaxial cable medium
(10Base2/RG58/Z=50Ω ). This makes it possible to connect a operating terminal (AUI
side of MAU) to the LAN (MDI side of MAU) with the aid of the LAN to another device on
the LAN (MDI side of MAU) using Ethernet (Standards see TED) to all connected NE
(AUI side of their MAUs) or to a TMN system (see 7.1.2) being also connected in any
way (by local LAN-Network or using a Communication Link by WAN-Network to a far
away located NCT) or both.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 51
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4 Rack Compartments (Subracks)
4.4.1 Rack Terminal Panel

The rack terminal panel is located at the top area of a communications equipment rack
(see Fig. 4.1).
It comprises a terminal panel subrack S42023-P326-A1 in which special rack interface
boxes may be mounted depending on the local requirements. It can also be a customer-
specific one. For an example (see Fig. 4.5):
The following modules may be used:
– Signal distributor SigVt box (SigVt case) with Sub-D connectors for connecting the
signal lines (Bw7R signalling)
– Distributor module VtM1 box (VtM1 case) for optional applications.
– Media Attachment Unit Mounting (MAU Mounting) available in a special mounting kit
for maximum equipping with three modules each.
(Standard is for a 50 Ω Impedance Coax-Type -10Base2- LAN medium with local
network length limited to 2500m and if for more distance is needed repeaters must
be used),
or optionally a 10BaseT Cat 5 STP type (network length limited to 100m) as well as
on a special demand a LWL (10BaseF with network length limited to 2000m) type
interface module for the same Ethernet standard having an equal mounting space.
– Clock Line Adapter CLA is a box having T3 / T4 Clock to Line Adaptation on two
module inside, which is designed as an optional for SL16 equipment.
– Up to three Fuse Panels, each of them holding a maximum of six circuit breakers,
may be attached to the rack panel.
If three fuse panels are used there is no more space next to the SigVt for a VtM1.
The used fuse strength for a SL16 subrack is a 16A circuit breaker with the part num-
ber:
V42278-Z52-A13.
The used fuse strength for an additional like CLA box is a 4A circuit breaker with the
part number:
V42278-Z52-A8.
For further details, see the document ETSI System Rack S42021-A121-Z20-*-7683.
i
52 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
SigVt signal distributor VtM1 distribution module1)

for Bw7R Signalling
8 Subrack for terminal panel

7
1
2
1
2 3
3 4
5
4
5 6
6 7
8
Mounting plate
MAU
Medium Attachment
Unit for Q interfaces
Fuse panels each with up to

6 circuit breakers
Connector arrangement on SigVt signal distributor for Bw7R Signalling

Connector No. Connection 1) Not used in the version described
1 to subrack 1
2 to subrack 2 (if any)
3 to subrack 3
4 to subrack 41)
5 to subrack 51)
6 to subrack 61)
7 to the ZBBeo signal assignment distributor
8 to the signal loop in the telecommunications center
or from the adjacent signal distributor
Fig. 4.5 3-D View of the Standard Rack Terminal Panel

on a Common ETSI-Rack
4.4.1.1 Signal Distributor (SigVt)

The signal distributor (see Fig. 4.5) is required if a connection is to be made via relay
contacts to a local light signalling equipment (LZE) or to a central service observation
system ZBBeo. It is to be installed in the left-hand section of the rack terminal panel. The
signal distributor incorporates the central alarm contacts (4 central alarm points ZA,
each for a maximum of 6 subracks) for remote supervision and Signalling in accordance
with the Bw7R-type signals (a, b, el) for a local light signalling equipment (LZE) for all
the subracks installed in the rack.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 53
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4.1.2 Distributor Module 1 (VtM1)

The rack distribution module VtM1 (see Fig. 4.5) is intended for general use, and can
be used in addition to, or as an alternative for the subrack signal distributor (not fitted to
the equipment described here).
4.4.1.3 Medium Attachment Unit (MAU)

If a connection to a craft terminal NCT is to be made or to a network is to be established,
the terminal panel (see Fig. 4.5) must be equipped with standard 10Base2 Coaxial-LAN
transceivers MAU. The MAU-Units (up to 4) are mounted in the rack terminal panel us-
ing a fitting kit. For details, (see Fig. 4.6).
The BNC socket (T-piece) of the last Coaxial-MAU cable end is to be equipped with a
i 50 Ω RF terminating resistor as shown in Fig. 4.6.
Plate and bolts

LCT/PC connection
C42393-A88-D17
via coax/BNC cable
Bolt to subrack for fuse panel
4 x AF cable
V42256-R518-A50
to Q-B3 connection of the
subrack using 15 pole Sub-D
connectors
1)
Coaxial cable 0.5 m

S42023-L3130-S15 2.5 m
M3
4 x MAU
S42024-Z464-A1 Coaxial cable 0.5 m
1) S42023-L3130-S15
10Base2 LAN connection, e. g. to the adja-

cent rack.
Extend LAN cable using:
10Base2 02Y(ST)CY0.95/2.5 coax. cable
1) Cover
V45466-B13-C5
C42393-A88-C165 Two BNC M 50 Ω coaxial connectors
V42250-Z56-A12
1)
RF adapter RF termination
BNC/TM 50 Ω BNC/M50 Ω
V42250-Z53-A20 V42252-Z3-C1
1) One of each supplied in the MAU kit S42024-P133-A3
Fig. 4.6 Installing the 10 Base2 Coaxial LAN Transceiver(s) MAU-Unit(s),

Ethernet-LAN (Example)
54 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) implements the transition from the coaxial feed of
the Ethernet interface (MDI) to the symmetrical Q-B3(QST-B3)-interface (AUI) of the
network element or the user terminal LCT/NCT (Standards see TED).
Depending on the customer’s demands, the optional use of a twisted pair STP
(10BaseT) or another interface -may be an optical one (like 10BaseF)- instead of the
Ethernet-BNC one, is possible. It has the same space but needs a different mounting
kit. For information, contact SIEMENS.
There is provision for a MAU for each subrack (except for the fan shelf). The MAUs in-
terconnect all the systems of a rack or interconnect a number of racks using in the stan-
dard version coaxial cable (RG58). This allows connecting the rack and the subrack with
a craft terminal LCT (with restricted access) or with an operations system such as a TNM
using the Q3/B3 (direct access local or remote) for a LAN (Ethernet). For details,
(see 7.2.1).
4.4.1.4 Clock Line Adapter (CLA) Box

The Clock Line Adapter consists of two printed circuit boards mounted in a box for plac-
ing it in the rack terminal panel frame. One CLA box can supply three subracks using
one of its channels for one subrack.
A green indication LED for the service status of the module located at the front panels
right bottom edge is available (see Fig. 4.7).
The module is supplied by a cable connection to the rack terminal’s fuse panel from the
both power supplies.
The CLA box is used to convert local timing clocks T3 / T4 (NE Side with 2048 KHz) lev-
els to and from a transmission line level (Line Side with 2048 Kbit/s). It has 3 channels
for both directions, each having T3 output and T4 input (T3 / T4 #1 ... T3 / T4 #3).
Each channel on both sides leads to a Sub-D 9-pole connector. The NE Side (A# plugs)
has male connectors and the Line Side (B# receptacles) has female connectors. A1 (X1)
is the first channel, A3 (X2) the second channel, and A5 (X3) is the third channel on the
Line Side. B1 (X12) is the first channel, B3 (X13) the second channel, and B5 (X14) is
the third channel on the NE Side. The NE Side are the right hand side located recepta-
cles and the Line Side are the left hand side located ones. Each of the NE side plugs is
connected by confectioned cables to the T3/T4 connectors on the dedicated subracks
terminal panel. Each of the Line side receptacles is connected to an equipment’s trans-
mission channel used for the transmission of only synchronizing clock signals.
Each channel A2 (CH1), A4 (CH2) and A6 (CH3) has its own Sa-Bit selector switch
(BCD switch), which settings are valid for both communication directions.
For detailed description see TED.
For pin assignment (see 11.1.4).
If CLL is stated, it can be an equipped CLL or CLL64-2,
! except for use of CLA which must have a CLL64-2.
If questioned, use the Card Label for evaluation.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 55
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 4.7 Front side View of the Clock Line Adapter (CLA) Module
4.4.1.5 Fuse Panel

The fuse panel for the subracks provides one fuse each. For redundant power supply of
the subrack, a second fuse panel with a second fuse is required. Circuit breakers for
D.C. voltages from -40 V to -72 V and 16 A nominal current must be used for the sub-
racks. If other type of equipment subracks accompany the SLD/T16 in the same rack,
the nominal current of the fuses depend on the power consumption at the nominal 48 /
60 Input Supply-Voltage of the device and may be differ between 4A and 20A.
Each subrack is equipped with an A1 terminal for operating voltage and a B1 terminal
for standby operating voltage (redundancy). For details (see Fig. 4.9) and
(see Fig. 4.10).
If the subrack is intended for operation in an ETSI rack or if it is to be operated without
i a rack, a fuse (circuit breaker) with a 16 A nominal current (part number V42278-Z52-
A13), having the appropriate tripping characteristics, must be incorporated in the power
supply cable to each subrack.
If additionals within the rack are used, like a CLA box in the rack terminal panel, it is to
be fused with a 4 A nominal current (part number V42278-Z52-A8) fuse (circuit breaker).
56 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
blue
–
red
+
yellow/black
⊥ N U Battery voltage input from the
Cable + telecommunications center
screen (max. 25 mm2)
Connec-
tor strip
Battery voltage ca- “Signalling” input (power supply failure)

bles to the subracks Only required in conjunction with the
or additions monitoring unit module in the fuse panel
+ Sig
Access for extraction tool

(both sides)
Circuit breakers
Fig. 4.8 View of the Fuse Panel with the Cover Removed
If enough space is available, the terminal panel can be supplied with a third fuse panel,
if necessary. In this case, there is no more space for a VtM1 or another module next the
SigVt and the MAU module.
For fuse types used for the SL16 equipment see the information point on the previous
sheet or (see Tab. 4.5).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 57
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4.2 Subrack SLR for the SLD16

101
A1 B1
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
CUST- IN/OUT
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
A1 Fit a blanking pan-
A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
⇐ el if no module is
inserted!
A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
Blanking panel
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 ON
A2
A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7
ON
PSUTP
A3
A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8
EBSL
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU TIF
301
C1 G1 H1 J1
E1 F1
A1 B1 D1
T3/T4 T3/T4
75Ω
120Ω
Q G2 H2 SRAP-PI
AUX1 AUX2 F E&M Bw7R
A EL RT
B
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416
EIPS1, OB, OP, OIS1, OIS4

OB, OP
OB, OP

A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
(405)
(411)
SCU
OHA
SNL
SNL
CLL
CLL
Fig. 4.9 View of the SLD16 Single-Row Subrack with Equipping Options
58 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4.3 Subrack SREL for the SLD16E
101
A1 B1
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
CUST- IN/OUT
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
A1
Fit a blanking pan-
⇐
A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
el if no module is
A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 inserted!
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 ON
A2
A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7
ON
PSUTP
A3
A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8
EBSL
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU TIF
301
M1 N1 P1
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1 L1
T3/T4 T3/T4
75Ω
AUX1 AUX3 AUX5 F E&M Bw7R Q Q 120Ω
AUX2 AUX4 AUX6 M2 N2 SRAP-PI
A EL RT
B
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417
CS4, EIPS1, OB, OP, OIS1, OIS4


OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
CLL
CLL
OHA
OHA
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511
OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
OB, OP
A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
OIS16
SCU
OHA
SNL
SNL
Fig. 4.10 View of the SLD16E Double-Row Subrack with Equipping Options
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 59
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4.4 Terminal Fields (Panels) of SLD / SLT16-Subracks

The subrack equipment has 3 different terminal panels for the different purposes like
power supplying, communication traffic interfacing, and control as well as servicing for
the subrack device.
4.4.4.1 SLD/T16 Field 101 and Field 301 Schematic
Fig. 4.11 Schematic View of the Subrack Terminal Field

with Numbered Cabling
60 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.4.4.2 Terminal Field (Panel) 101

The Terminal Panel 101 is the interfacing field for the power supplying of the equipment.

The Terminal Panel 200 is the interfacing field for the electrical tributary and line com-
munication traffic interfaces of the equipment. It is subdivided in slots starting with the
location number 201 and ends with 2nn depending on the type of subrack used.

The Terminal Panel 301 is the interfacing field for the controlling and servicing purposes
as well as special communication channels of the equipment.
4.4.5 Spare Space for an Additional Subrack or an Other Equipment

If the rack is only used for one SLD/T device, the spare space may be left empty for fur-
ther equipping purposes or may be occupied by other communication equipment, de-
pending on the local necessity, the user purposes or any other demands, as far as
combining the SLD/T with different vendor equipment. Equipment mounting should be
start from the bottom to the top of a rack.
For specialities call SIEMENS.
4.5 Power Supply and the Power Supply Cabling

The Terminal Panel 100 has the connectors A1[101] and B1[102] for the connection of
the operating voltage sources 1 and 2.
The DC input supply voltage within a range of -40 V to -72 V is recommended.
The maximum power consumption of the two SLD/T16B or SLD/T16BE is about:
• SLD/T16B-2.5 (heavily equipped subrack / single row) 220W typical / 290 Watt
maximum (without a fan shelf);
• SLD/T16BE-2.5 (heavily equipped subrack / double row) 240W typical / 420 Watt
maximum (without a fan shelf).
For details see:
TED,
and for connector assignment:
(see 11.1).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 61
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
4.6 Interfacing
The electrical interfaces are all located on the terminal panels either of the rack terminal
panel or the subrack’s terminal panels.
Optical interfaces and monitoring interfaces are located on the modules directly.
4.6.1 Rack Terminal Panel

As described in general (see 4.2.5) and (see 4.4.1), the rack terminal panel is the inter-
face between the network room cabling of the power supplies, the clock supplies, the
LAN management, the Line-Network (only on electrical interfaces), the Network-Con-
trol-Terminal (LCT), the signalling, and the synchronization. It may be for a small tribu-
tary communication network, and on the other side to the subracks of the adjacent rack.
For detail, see also Chapters 5, 6, 7 and 8.
4.6.2 Subrack Terminal Panels

The electrical interfaces of the subracks are located on the subracks terminal panels.
4.6.2.1 SLD/T16 Subrack Terminal Panel

For Details:
– General scope (see 4.2.7), Overview (see 4.4.2).
– Overview (see 4.4.2).
– Pin assignment for power (see Fig. 11.5).
– Pin assignment for electrical communication interfaces (see Fig. 11.6).
– Pin assignment for equipment surveillance (see Fig. 11.13).
4.6.2.2 SLD/T16E Subrack Terminal Panel

For Details:
– General scope (see 4.2.7), Overview (see 4.4.3).
– Overview (see 4.4.3).
– Pin assignment for power (see Fig. 11.5).
– Pin assignment for electrical communication interfaces (see Fig. 11.6).
– Pin assignment for equipment surveillance (see Fig. 11.12).
4.6.3 Electrical Communication Traffic Interfaces of the SLD16/SLT16

The electrical HBT interfacing is performed by the EIPS1 with the aid of additional and
optional cable interfaces LTU.
The additional or optional modules are responsible for impedance matching and protec-
tion switching for the STM-1, either as a SDH (155 Mbit/s) Signal, or as an alternative
PDH (140 Mbit/s) signal for the cable interface of the tributaries to be protected.
The tributary cable interfaces are located in the slots 201 to 212. The number of modules
is determined by the number of tributaries. For assigning the connections, see
Fig. 11.6. For suitable connectors and cable types, see Tab. 4.5.
62 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.6.4 Optical Communication Traffic Interfaces SLD16 / SLT16

Optical Transmisson Connections are established directly to the OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2,
OP and OB units. Otherwise the optical connections are established to the optical line
cable lines or to the optical tributary cable lines.
The fibre optics (FO) cables are routed via the corresponding hot-wired (by jumpers)
eyes of the subrack directly to the relevant module (see Fig. 4.1).
For suitable fibre optics (FO) cables, see Tab. 4.5.
4.6.5 Surveillance and Power Supply of the Equipment

Using the Terminal Panel Interfaces of the SLD16 / SLT16
4.6.5.1 SLD/T16 x Terminal Panel (Section 101) with Slot 101 to 104
Label of Sub-D Connector Plug / Function

in Terminal Panel 300 (Location)
No.:
UBAT1 (working power supply), A1 (103), Power Supply of Communication Equipment

UBAT2 (protection power supply) B1 (104)
Tab. 4.2 Interfaces for Power Supply of Communication Equipment and Cooling
4.6.5.2 SLD/T16 Terminal Panel (Section 301) with Locations 301 to 310
The interfaces for control and service purposes (see Tab. 4.1) are located at the termi-
nal panel 300. They are implemented by 9, 15 or 25-pin Sub-D connectors.

No.:
AUX 1 and AUX 2 all equip- A1 (301), User-specific auxiliary channel AUX1 ... 2, V.11 and G.703
ment types B1 (302)
F C1 (303) Serial interface to PC
E&M (or PABX) D1 (304) 2-wire and 4-wire E&M interface, external ringer
Bw7R E1 (305) Bw7R signalling
Q F1 (306) Communication channel to TMN
T3/T4 G1 (307), Network clock synchronization, T3 IN and T4 OUT

H1 (308)
Tel. J1 (309) 2-wire DTMF-Handset
Tab. 4.3 Interfaces for Service, Surveillance and Operation
4.6.5.3 SLD/T16E Terminal Panel (Section 301) with Locations 301 to 310
The interfaces for control and service purposes (see Tab. 4.1) are located at the termi-
nal panel 300. They are implemented by 9, 15 or 25-pin Sub-D connectors.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 63
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

No.:
AUX 1 and AUX 6 all equip- A1 (301), User-specific auxiliary channel AUX1 ... 6, V.11 and G.703
ment types B1 (302),
C1 (303),
D1 (304),
E1 (305),
F1 (306)
F G1 (307) Serial interface to PC
E&M (or PABX) H1 (308) 2-wire and 4-wire E&M interface, external ringer
Bw7R J1 (309) Bw7R signalling
Q K1 (310) Communication channel 1 to TMN
Q L1 (311) Communication channel 2 to TMN
T3/T4 M1 (312), Network clock synchronization, T3 IN and T4 OUT

N1 (313)
Tel. P1 (314) 2-wire DTMF-Handset
Tab. 4.4 Interfaces for Service, Surveillance and Operation
64 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4.7 Overview of the General System Parts

All the Sub-D connectors of the subracks in the rack are equipped with pin contacts and
i M3 threaded studs (no UNC threads!).
If necessary, the connecting cables must be fabricated or pre-fitted using the specified
connector kits.
Designation Product Number Remarks
ETSI rack S42023-P331-A1 Bolted, for 3 single-row or 2 double-row subracks
Subrack terminal S42023-P326-A1 For accommodate SigVt, VtM1, MAU and terminal panel
panel
SigVt S42024-P129-A1 For Bw7R Signalling, Qty. 1 per rack

signal distributor
Signal cable V42256-R518-A50 For connecting the subrack to the SigVt signal distributor, Qty. 1 per subrack
Fan -Alarm Adapter S42024-L5045-A1 For expanding the TIF interface by 1 input for the fan shelf (Fan-Alarm TIF interface), Qty. 1
Signal cable V42256-R638-A50 For connecting the fan shelf to the Fan-Alarm Adapter, Qty.2 (9-pin connectors);
One for the fan shelf to the Fan-Alarm Adapter and one for the fan shelf to the terminal panel
(Fan-Alarm COPL64 interface)
MAU kit, 10Base2 S42024-P133-A3 Including MAU S42024-Z464-A1, for connecting a subrack to an Ethernet LAN
MAU mounting C42393-A88-D17 Plate, for attaching a maximum of four MAUs per rack
Fitting kit (M3) S42024-P133-A1 Channel section panel, AF cable, for mounting the MAU (included in the 10Base2 MAU kit)
RF termination, 50 Ω V42252-Z3-C1 BNC, to the Ethernet LAN line termination, 2 required for each LAN bus
Coaxial cable S42023-L3130-S15 RF coaxial cable (RG-58):

BNC/BNC, 0.5 m, for connecting MAU to MAU
AF cable V42256-R518-A50 AF cable:

15-pin, 2.5 m, for connecting MAU to subrack (Q interface);
(Qty. 2 included in the 10Base2 MAU kit)
Fuse panel S42024-P123-A1 In 6 sections, excluding fuses, for operating and standby power supply; 2 required
Fuse, 4 A V42278-Z52-A8 2 required for each external additional for operating and standby power supply
Fuse, 16 A V42278-Z52-A13 2 required for each subrack for operating and standby power supply
Mains connecting ca- V42256-R520-A50 2 required for each subrack for operating and standby power supply,
ble for connecting the fuse panel to the subrack
Tab. 4.5 System Components
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 65
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Sub-D connector kit V42256-A82-B126 3-pin, high current (incorporated in the mains connecting cable)
V42256-A82-B19 9-pin, for connecting operating terminal, clock frequency transmission and telephone
V42256-A82-B111 15-pin, for connecting SigVt (contact 8) to the signal loop in the telecommunications center
or from the adjacent signal distributor
V42256-A82-B211 25-pin, for connecting SigVt (contact 7) to the ZBBeo signal assignment distributor in the tele-
communications center
V42256-A82-B311 37-pin, for connecting the alarm inputs / outputs of the TIF module
Coaxial connector V42250-Z58-C102 1.6 / 5.6 straight, pin with snap-in fixing,
for connecting the tributary channels of LTU modules
Coaxial connector V42250-Z57-A110 1.0 / 2.3 straight, pin with snap-in fixing,
for connections to monitor channels M1 to M4 of the EIPS1 modules
Coaxial RF connector V42250-Z56-A12 BNC, for connecting Ethernet LANs to MAU (MDI-Side)
RF-adapter V42250-Z53-A20 BNC, for connecting MAU to LCT / NCT or adjacent rack
Power supply cable V42266-Z1001-C1 YV (St) CY 1x2x1.4 / 2.2 bl / sw, diameter = 6.1
2 required for each subrack for operating and standby power supply,
for connecting fuse panel with subrack (incorporated in the mains connecting cable)
PC cable V42256-Z49-A157 Prefabricated PC cable:

Null modem cable, for connecting the subrack (F interface) to the LCT / NCT (RS232)
AF cable V42255-Z1000-B1 AF jumper cable:

S-02 YS (St) Y 1x2x0.4 / 1.00 120 Ω, diameter = 2.9 (1 pair);
V42255-Z1001-A3 S-09 YS (St) CY 2x2x0.6 / 1.2 120 Ω, diameter = 7 (2 pairs)

for electrical clock supply to the subrack (G1 / H1)
V42255-Z1001-A4 S-09 YS (St) CY 4x2x0.6 / 1.2 120 Ω, diameter = 9 (4 pairs)

for electrical clock supply to the subrack (G1 / H1)
V42255-Z1001-A7 S-02 YS (St) CY 8x2x0.4 / 0.8 120 Ω, diameter = 6.9 (8 pairs)
V42255-Z1001-A2 S-09 YS (St) Y 14x2x0.4 / 1.0 150 Ω, diameter = 9.5 (14 pairs)
V42255-Z1000-B5 S-Y (St) Y 20x2x0.6 diameter = 12.5 (20 pairs)

to the TIF module
RF cable, coaxial V45466-B13-C5 02Y (St) CY 0.95 / 2.5 (RG-58)

for connecting Ethernet LANs to MAU (MDI-Side)
RF cable, coaxial V42251-Z61-C5 02Y (St) CY 0.45 / 2.0 VSGR 75 Ω, diameter = 3.4
for connecting the tributary channels of LTU modules
RF cable, coaxial V42251-Z61-C4 For connection to monitor channels M1 to M4 of the EIPS1 modules
ESD grounding cable V42259-Z49-A18 For handling modules containing electrostatically-sensitive devices
Handset cable V42025-Z467-A3 Handset
Optical fiber cable, C39195-Z137-X402 LSH / HRL 0.8 m

E2000 / HRL for connecting OIS (E2000 coupling) to OB or OP
C39195-Z137-C612 LSH / HRL 12 m, 2-off

for connecting OIS (E2000 coupling) to WL optical wavelength multiplex system
Optical fiber cable, V42253-Z179-S20 DIN / DIN 20 m, 2-off

DIN for connecting OIS (DIN coupling) to FOD Fiber Optic Distributor
Tab. 4.5 System Components (Cont.)
66 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Optical fiber pigtail, V42253-P179-S20 DIN 20 m, 2-off per OIS (DIN coupling)
DIN to the splice connection
Optical fiber cable FC V42253-Z159-S20 FC/PC / FC/PC 20 m, 2-off

/ PC Connection for OIS with FC / PC coupling
Optical fiber pigtail FC V42253-P709-S20 FC / PC 20 m, 2-off per OIS (FC / PC coupling)

/ PC to the splice connection
Optical fiber cable SC V42253-Z169-S20 SC / SC 20 m, 2-off

Connection for OIS with SC coupling
Optical fiber cable V42253-Z189-S25 DIN/HRL / DIN/HRL 25 m, 2-off

DIN / HRL Connection for OIS with DIN coupling
Optical fiber pigtail V42253-P209-S20 DIN / HRL 20 m, 2-off per OIS (DIN / HRL coupling)
DIN / HRL to the splice connection
*)Special Add-ons, Kits, Options, etc. are not subject of this documentation.
Call SIEMENS or Representative for order and use.
Tab. 4.5 System Components (Cont.)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 67
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5 Preparation of the Modules

and the Subracks
General Remarks
☞ Are the following cards and modules mentioned in a general description it is also
stated for their extended and upgrade ones not named in detail:
CLL -> CLL64-2,
OIS4 -> OIS4-2,
OIS16 -> OIS16-2,
SCU -> SCU-R2 -> SCU-R2E.
5.1 Preliminary Remarks

All SLD16 R2.5 hardware can be used with previous Software (SW) versions and con-
i nection to SONET devices is now possible using the OIS16-2 and the OIS4-2 module
(see OMN:SL).
Conversion tables SONET/SDH are described in short form in the Chapter 8.13.8.
All the modules are designed for plug-in insertion.

The modules can be inserted and pulled while the power supply is connected without
causing damage or impairing the function of the other modules in the subrack. Modules
of the same type are interchangeable. But take care to only run those modules which
have a hardware revision level released for use, otherwise not all features will run well.
Before an (active) module is extracted and removed, it must be taken out of service us-
! ing the LCT (the module must be disconnected in order to avoid unnecessary alarms).
Insertion of a module into its specific slot is automatically registered by the SCU module.
The Technical Description, TED, contains an overview of the available modules and the
possible equipping options.
All the optical fiber cables (FO) and the copper cables are routed out of the subrack and
into the side of the rack (see Fig. 5.1).
68 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
A1 B1
A A A A A A A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A A A A A A A A
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
A A A A A A A A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A A A A A A A
T3/T4 T3/T4
75Ω
120Ω
G2 H2
AUX1 AUX2 F E&M Bw7R Q
5 cross-connection
eyes for optical fibre
cables
OIS16/OIS16-2 OIS16/OIS16-2
Fig. 5.1 View of the Subrack (1-Row Version Example) for Cable Installation
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 69
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

(Sub Sections 101 to 104 / A1 to B1)
The modules in the upper subsections 101 to 104 are plugged in and screwed tight as
subrack terminal panel items of the connection field (section) 100. The sub sections
No. 103 (A1) and 104 (B1) are for the subrack main power (103), and hot standby pro-
tection power (104).
5.1.2 Modules in the Sub Section

(Slots) 201 to 212
The slots 201 to 209 are used for the LTU-Modules and the slot 211 is especial for the
TIF-Module. The equipping of the slots 205 to 209 depends on the type of SLD/T16. The
slots 210 and 212 will be left empty for future or additional interface use, and each are
covered with a blanking panel. The modules are plugged into rows of contact and
screwed home in the right part of the connection field (panel) 200 of the subrack.
The mechanical coding elements on the modules with SIPAC-S connectors (for slots
201 to 212) ensure that each module in the subrack can only be plugged into one slot,
which corresponds to the module type. This excludes mis-equipping of the subracks and
thereby possible damage to the modules.

(Sub Sections 301 to 314 / A1 to P1)
The layout and the amount of subsections of the panel 301 depends on the type of
SLD/T16 being used.
The modules in the slots 301 to 314 are not pluggable modules and screwed tight as
rack items of the connection field. They are all D-type (Sub D) male connectors.
The sub sections, mainly receptacles and configuration switches, are labeled with a let-
ter plus a number and an additional mnemonic, marking its feature.
5.1.4 Modules in the Sub Sections

(Slots) 401 to 417 and 501 to 511
The mechanical coding elements on the modules with SIPAC-S connectors ensure that
each module in the subrack can only be inserted into a slot corresponding to the partic-
ular type of module. This prevents incorrect equipping of the subracks and, in turn, pos-
sible damage to the modules.
The modules for slots 401 to 416 in single-row subracks and, in addition, for slots 417,
501 to 511 in the double-row subrack are each equipped with a pull-and-insert aid
(see Fig. 5.5) for example. They are inserted and latched into their position from the
front.
They are further secured by closing the subrack cover. The subrack cover comprises an
RF-resistant hood, which is attached to the right side of the subrack by means of lift-off
hinges. On the left side, it is latched into the subrack by means of levers.
70 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.1.5 Modules Containing

the Management Information Base (MIB)
The MIB is stored in the backplane EEPROMS.
5.1.6 Modules in the Sub Section (Slot) 512

with the Sub-Slots 512_1
The SRAP-PI module (with a connector for the headset / phone set) is located in sub-
slot 512_1.
5.2 Settings for the Modules in the Subrack Terminal

Panel 301, 400, 500,
and the Procedures on the Modules
No adjustments should be made on the modules. Links which are not illustrated have
been set by the manufacturer and must not be altered by the user.
These links are solely provided for making adjustments in the test department.
5.2.1 Clock Line Adapter (CLA)

The A2, A4 and A6 switches (Fig. 4.7) on the CLA module, mounted in the rack terminal
panel, are to be adjusted for the relevant Sa-Bit according to the net planning specifica-
tions. Bit related positions for the switch, as detail (see Fig. 5.2), are according to
Tab. 5.1.
Switch A2, A4 and A6, 1) Sa-Bit Bit Level in Signal / BCD-Weight

Position
1 SASEL 0 High (1) / 1
4 not used High (1) / 8
1) Default value is OFF (0) position
Tab. 5.1 Channel 1 ... 3 Sa-Bit Configuration Switch (A2, A4, A6) Assignment
Fig. 5.2 CLA Box Sa-Bit Selector Switch n=1 (A2), =2 (A4), =3 (A6)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 71
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.2.2 Telemetry Interface Module (TIF)

The A2 and A3 switches (Fig. 4.6 to Fig. 4.8) on the TIF module (S32011-Q130-X100),
either mounted in Slot 211 or as a compartment of the TIF-box (S42023-D3520-A1) lo-
cated in the rack terminal panel, the last one as not common used for the SLD/T TIF-
function, determine whether the two co-directional 64-Kbit/s channels of the OHA mod-
ule are used for (CUST-AL and CUST-CT) alarms (connected to the TIF module) or are
routed to the AUX1, 3, 5 interfaces or the AUX2, 4, 6 interfaces (G.703).
Switch A21) Switch A31) Custom No. 01-08 Custom No. 09-16 AUX 1, 3, 5 AUX 2, 4, 6
OFF OFF X X
ON OFF X X
OFF ON X X
ON ON X X
1) Default value is OFF
Tab. 5.2 64-kbit/s Channel and Configuration Switch Assignment
5.2.3 Subrack Terminal Panel 300

On the terminal panel (Fig. 4.6 to Fig. 4.8), there are connectors G1 and H1 (SLD/T16),
or M1 and N1 (SLD/T16E), for clock frequency transmission T3 / T4 = 2048 kHz located.
The impedance matching of the T3 / T4 clock can be either 75 Ω unsymmetrical (unbal-
anced) or 120 Ω symmetrical (balanced). Both impedances can be configured with the
aid of the associated switches G2 and H2 or M2 and N2. The default setting is 75 Ω.
5.2.4 Modules SCU-R2 and SCU-R2E

This is the SLD/T16 subrack main local switch control and processing unit. Two types
of SCU units are usable, the SCU-R2 [64 MB RAM] (S32011-Q125-X101), and the
SCU-R2E [80MB RAM] (S42024-D5012-A100). The only difference between the two is
the amount of RAM space available, as mentioned as the value in the trailed rectangular
brackets above.
A button for to trigger a hardware reset is located on the front of the module. This ini-
tiates the shutdown of the network element.
There is no traffic interruption. The communication is merely terminated.
72 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.2.5 OB Module
Check whether all jumpers are plugged on the X106 jumper connector, thus that there
is a connection done to the ICS bus (see Fig. 5.3).
Pull-and-insert aid
Laser unit
SIPAC-S female connector
Fiber optic plug

connector
X106
2 1
Pull-and-insert aid
Fig. 5.3 OB Module, Jumpers Setting for the ICS Bus
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 73
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.2.6 OP Module
The jumper settings on the OP module (see Fig. 5.4) fixed whether OP module is in use
with module OIS4/OIS4-2 1) or OIS16 / OIS16-2.
Jumpers Locality X205 Using of OP Module
13 – 14 open Operation with module OIS4/OIS4-21)
13 – 14 plugged Operation with module OIS16/OIS16-2
1) In versions below SLD/T16 R2.5 there is no use with OIS4/OIS4-2
Tab. 5.3 OP Module, Jumper Settings
Insertion and extraction aid
Laser unit
Fiber optic plug

connector
X205
1
X106
1
Insertion and extraction aid
Fig. 5.4 OP Module, Jumpers Setting
74 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.2.7 OIS Modules

The switch settings on the OIS4-2 and OIS16-2 modules are fixed whether the module
is in use in equipment under Releases earlier than R2.5 for setting of the FEC or CON-
CATENATION CONVERSION.
For SW Releases starting with R2.5 and upwards the switch position is ignored by the
i SW.
Do not touch any other switches or jumpers on the module which are not mentioned for
! setting purposes.
5.2.7.1 OIS4/OIS4-2 and OIS16/OIS16-2 Modules

Mechanical
coding Pull-and-insert aid
Pivoting
Optical receiver
Slip-on
couplings
Pigtail ends
Optical transmitter
Mechanical coding
Pull-and-insert aid
Fig. 5.5 OIS4/OIS4-2/OIS16/OIS16-2 Module
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 75
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.2.7.2 OIS 1 Module

Mechanical coding
Port 1, out
Port 1, in
Port 2, out
Optical Optical Port 2, in

receiver transmitter
Port 3, out
Port 1 Port 1 Port 3, in
Port 4, out
Port 2 Port 2
Port 4, in
Port 3 Port 3
Port 4 Port 4 Slip-on couplings

Pigtail ends
Mechanical coding
Fig. 5.6 OIS1 Module
76 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3 Subrack Equipping Options

The local craft terminal (LCT) can be used to ascertain the subrack equipping options
i using a Possible Equipping Table, PET (see OMN:SL).
The individual subracks are used to accommodate modules in what are referred to be-
low assigned slots.
Slot Possible Box, Remarks on Connection Types

or Card or Connector
Panel Type Equipping
or
EBP
Designa-
tion
103-104 Power Supply Input Connections: Male 3W3 D-type (Sub D)
A1 -B1
201-206 Low Bandwidth Connections: Male 6 x 12 x 1 / 2 SU SIPAC-S
Tributary Access (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
201-210 LTU(S) Depending on the use of EIPS1;
Connections:
For each EIPS1 are necessary:
4x Coax adapter for 140 / 155 Mbit/s.
209 is a Blanking Panel in the SLD16 Frame.
210 EBSL(S) Depending on the use of EIPS1 (protection);
(>V1 / >R4.1) Connections: No one on front side. Only back-
plane connections. EBSLS, which needs a
PSUTP, supports the LTU.
211 TIF Depending on the use of EIPS1;
Connections: see above;
212 PSUTP Depending on the use of EBSLS;
(>V1 / >R4.1) Connections: No one on frontages;
[optional necessary
for EBSL(S)]
301 - 302 AUX (1) and (2) Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 25 pins.
A1 - B1 Interfaces, (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(V.11 / G.703)
(SLD16 only)
301 - 306 AUX (1) until (6) Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 25 pins.
A1 - F1 Interfaces, (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(V.11 / G.703)
(SLD16E only)
303 QST/F-Interface Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 9 pins.
C1 (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
304 4W E+M / PABX In- Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 25 pins.
D1 terface (EOW) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
Tab. 5.4 Over all Equipping Options for Modules
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 77
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

or
EBP
Designa-
tion
305 Bw7R Alarm Inter- Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 15 pins.
E1 face (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
306 Q-Interface Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 9 pins.
F1 (SLD16E only) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
307 QST/F Interface Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 9 pins.
G1 (SLD16E only) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
307 T3(1) and T4(1) Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 9 pins.
G1 Interfaces (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16)
308 QST/B3 Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 15 pins.
H1 Ethernet Interface (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16E only)
H1 Interfaces (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16)
309 Bw7R Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 15 pins.
J1 Alarm Interface (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16E only)
309 Handset Interface Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 15 pins.
J1 (EOW) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
K1 (SLD16E only) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
L1 (SLD16E only) (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
M1 Interfaces (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16E only) M2 Switch for 75 / 120 Ohm
Clock-Line-Impedance
N1 Interfaces (Pin assignment as in SM1/4 R2)
(SLD16E only) N2 Switch for 75 / 120 Ohm
Clock-Line-Impedance
314 Handset Interface Connections: Male D-type (Sub D), 9 pins.
P1 (EOW)
(SLD16E only)
401 OHA Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet.
Only in the SLD16 Frame. (Full features OHA /
Single row subrack only)
Tab. 5.4 Over all Equipping Options for Modules (Cont.)
78 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

or
EBP
Designa-
tion
401 Slot usable for all left side mentioned modules
working, except (line by line related):
CS4, Only in the SLD16E Frame;
EIPS1, Only in the SLD16E Frame;
OB, OP, Only in the SLD16E Frame;
OIS1, Only in the SLD16E Frame;
OIS4 / OIS4-2 Only in the SLD16E Frame.
Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet.
402-404 Slot usable for all left side mentioned modules
CS4, Only in the SLD16E Frame;
EIPS1, All Subrack Frames;
OB, OP All Subrack Frames;
Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet
EIPS1, Only in the SLD16 Frame,
OIS16 / OIS16-2 Only in the SLD16 Frame (T#1 or L#3),
OIS1, Only in the SLD16 Frame,
OIS4 / OIS4-2 All Subrack Frames;
OB, OP
405 OHA Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet.
Only in the SLD16E Frame. (Full features OHA)
OIS16 / OIS16-2, Only in the SLD16 Frame (L#1),
OB, OP All Subrack Frames;
407 SNL Slot usable for all left side mentioned modules
407 Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet.
OHA Only in the SLD16E Frame. (Limited features)
407-408 Switching Network for Line Systems;
SNL Only in the SLD16 Frame.
OB, OP Only in the SLD16E Frame;
Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet;
All Subrack Frames.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 79
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

or
EBP
Designa-
tion
EIPS1,
OIS16 / OIS16-2, Only in the SLD16 Frame (L#2),
OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2, Only in the SLD16E Frame,
OB, OP All Subrack Frames.
CS4, Not in the SLD16, SLD16E subrack frame;
EIPS1, Not in the SLD16E subrack frame;
OIS1, Not in the SLD16E subrack frame;
OIS4 / OIS4-2, Not in the SLD16, SLD16E subrack frame.
OB, OP
EIPS1, Not in the SLD16E subrack frame;
OIS16 / OIS16-2, Only in the SLD16 Frame (T#2 or L#4),
OIS1, All the SLD16 subrack frame;
OIS4 / OIS4-2, Not in the SLD16, SLD16E subrack frame.
OB, OP
CS4, Not in the SLD16, SLD16E subrack frame.
EIPS1, All the SLD16 subrack frame;
OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
OB, OP
EIPS1, All the SLD16 subrack frame;
OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
OB, OP
80 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

or
EBP
Designa-
tion
CLL, Only in the SLD16 subrack frame;
CLL64-2, Neccessary for use of an external CLA box;
EIPS1, All the SLD16 subrack frames.
OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
OB, OP
CLL, Only in the SLD16 subrack frame;
CLL64-2, Neccessary for use of an external CLA box;
EIPS1, All the SLD16 subrack frames.
OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
OB, OP
416 Slot usable for all left side mentioned modules,
except (line by line related):
CLL, Only in the SLD16E subrack frame;
CLL64-2 Neccessary for use of an external CLA box;
Connections: Male 10 SU SIPAC-S.
(Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet);
417 Slot usable for all left side mentioned modules,
except (line by line related):
CLL, Only in the SLD16E subrack frame;
CLL64-2 Neccessary for use of an external CLA box;
Connections: Male 10 SU SIPAC-S.
(Connections: Male 8 pin row, 10 SU ERmet).
501 OHA Only in the SLD16E Frame.
Connections: Male 10 SU SIPAC-S. (Limited fea-
tures OHA /double row subrack only)
502 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 502 (T#1 or L#5);
OB, OP Only in the SLD16E Frame.
503 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 503 (L#3);
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 81
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

or
EBP
Designa-
tion
504 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 504 (L#1);
505, 506 SNL 505-x and 506-y;
Only in the SLD16E Frame.
507 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 507 (L#2);
508 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 508 (L#4);
509 OIS16 / OIS16-2, 509 (T#2 or L#6);
510 Blanking Panel Blanking Panel;
(Empty Slot) (Reserved for a special use of 2nd SCU for later
and advanced extension.)
Only in the SLD16E Frame.
511 SCU R2 or Only in the SLD16E Frame
SCU R2E Connections: Male 10 SU SIPAC-S.
Minimum Equipping is for a SLT16 in a none ring-structure:

One of the Slots 402, 403 and 412, 413 with an EIPS1, Slot 406 with an OIS16/OIS16-
2, 407,408 one with a SNL and 414, 415 one with a CLL or a CLL64-2.
The slot 401 with an OHA and the slot 416 with a SCU.
If CLL is stated, it can be an equipped CLL or CLL64-2.
! If questioned, use the Card Label for evaluation.
82 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.1 Subrack SLD16

This is the 1-Row subrack version.
For a front panel schematic view (see Fig. 4.9).
5.3.1.1 Electrical Tributary Interfaces

The EIPS1 modules (see Tab. 5.5) can be inserted into the slots 402 to 405 and 410 to
413.
These are tributary modules which can be used to transmit and receive four electrical
STM-1 or PDH signals (configurable with the LCT, see OMN:SL).
Slot 413 can be used for a module protection 1:N of the slots 402 to 405 and 410 to 412.
For a subrack, the SLT16 configuration provides sufficient slot options (four are re-
quired) for EIPS1 modules in order to generate full access to the STM-16 line capacity.
The SLD16 configuration provides eight slots for EIPS1 modules, thus allowing access
to the full drop / insert capacity of the STM-16 channel on both line sides (west / east).
The slots 201 to 208 for the LTU modules are located in the upper section of the sub-
rack. All the electrical STM-1 or 140-Mbit/s tributary signals are connected using the co-
axial connections (A1 to A8) of the LTU modules and are not directly connected to the
EIPS1 modules. From there, the electrical tributary signals are routed to the associated
EIPS1 module using the backplane trails.
On the front panel, the EIPS1 modules are equipped with 4 monitor outputs for mea-
surements intended for maintenance purposes.
Slots 209, 210, 211, and 212 may have blank panels if not used for other purposes.
Slot 211 may be used as a customers equipment control and supervisory interface, be-
ing occupied with a TIF-module (see 5.3.1.8).
CP (Card Protection)
• To enable an EIPS1 module to be protected against a card failure by an additional
EIPS1 module, the two modules are connected together via the backplane at the
155-Mbit/s (ISDH) level.
1:N (Multiplex Card Protection)
• To enable an EIPS1 module to be protected against a card failure by the available
EIPS1 protection module in the frame, the modules are connected together via the
backplane at the 155-Mbit/s (ISDH) level.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 83
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Slot Equipping Option Remarks
402 empty, Can be used in combination with equipment in

EIPS1, slot 413, as an 1:n Equipment protection.
OB,
403 Can be used in combination with equipment in
OP,
slot 413, as an 1:n Equipment protection.
OIS1 or
404 OIS4 / OIS4-2 Can be used in combination with equipment in
Slot can be used for OB/OP/OIS1/OIS4/OIS4-
2 if slot 405 is not equipped with
OIS16/OIS16-2.
405 *) Can be used in combination with equipment in
Slot can be used for OB/OP/OIS1/OIS4/OIS4-
2 if slot 411 is not equipped with
OIS16/OIS16-2.
413 Can be used as an 1:n Equipment protection
of slots 402 to 412.
Tab. 5.5 Equipping Options for EIPS1 Modules
The following LTU slots are connected via the backplane cabling to the EIPS1 slots
(see Tab. 5.6):
LTU Slot EIPS1 Slot ICS Address
201 402 T#1

202 403 T#2
203 404 T#4
204 405 T#3
205 410 T#6
206 411 T#5
207 412 T#7
208 413 T#8
Tab. 5.6 Assignment of the LTU and EIPS1 Modules in the SLD16
84 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.1.2 Optical Tributary Interfaces / Line Interfaces

The slots 402 to 405 and 410 to 413 can be equipped with OIS1 / OIS4 / OIS4-2 mod-
ules; the slots 405, 406, 409 and 411 can be equipped with OIS16 / OIS16-2 modules
(see Tab. 5.7). These modules are line interfaces being used to send and receive opti-
cal STM-1/4/16 signals.
1+1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Single Ended
(Independent Switching on both sides: no casual traffic)
• To enable an OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 module to be protected against a line failure by an
additional OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 module, the two modules are connected together via
the backplane at the 155-Mbit/s (ISDH) level.
1+1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Dual Ended
(Switching according to ITU G.783 A3.4.1 [MSP 1 + 1])
1:1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Extra Traffic
- only for OIS16/OIS16-2 modules -
• To enable an OIS16/OIS16-2 module to be protected against a line failure by an ad-
ditional OIS16/OIS16-2 module, the two modules are connected together via the
MS-BSHR/2 Extra + Extra Traffic
(Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 2 fiber) and
MS-BSHR/4 (Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 fiber)
• For a MS-BSHR circuit, there are additional ISDH links between the slots.
402 Empty / Can be used in combination with equipment in

EIPS1 / slot 403, as a working interface for 1+1 MSP.
OIS4 / OIS4-2 / OIS1 / (ICS address: T#1)
OB / OP
EIPS1 / slot 402, as a protection interface for 1+1 MSP.
OB / OP
Tab. 5.7 Equipping Options with OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 Modules
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 85
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

OIS1 / OB / OP (ICS address: T#4)
Empty / Can be used in combination with equipment in
OIS4 / OIS4-2 / slot 405, 406 and 409 as a working interface for
OIS16 / OIS16-2 MSP and
(using both404+405 for MS-BSHR/2 (Line West working).
slots for it)
OIS16 / OIS16-2 Can be used in combination with equipment in
slot 405, 406 and 409
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line West working).
OIS4 / OIS4-2 / slot 405 as a protecting interface for MSP
OIS16 / OIS16-2 and
(using both 404+405 for MS-BSHR/2 (Line West working).
slots for it)
slot 404, 406 and 409
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line West protecting).
OIS16 / OIS16-2 slot 409, as a working interface for MSP and
for MS-BSHR/2 (Line West (LW) working).
slot 404, 405, 409 and 411
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line West (LW) working).
OIS16 / OIS 16-2 slot 406, as a protection interface for MSP and
for MS-BSHR/2 (Line East (LE) working).
slot 404, 405, 406 and 411
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line East (LE) protecting).
OIS4 / OIS4-2 / slot 409, as a protection interface for MSP
OIS16 / OIS16-2 and MS-BSHR/2 (Line West working).
(using both 410+411
slots for it)
Can be used in combination with equipment in
slot 404, 405, 406 and 409
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line East working).
Tab. 5.7 Equipping Options with OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 Modules (Cont.)
86 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

OIS4 / OIS4-2 / slot 410, as a protection interface
OIS16 / OIS16-2 for MS-BSHR/2 (Line East working).
(using both 404+405
slots for it)
slot 404, 405 and 409, 410
for MS-BSHR/4 (Line East working).
OB / OP
OB / OP
Tab. 5.7 Equipping Options with OIS1/4/4-2/16/16-2 Modules (Cont.)
The modules can be equipped with any of four different optical couplings, as follows:
– E2000 / E2000
– E2000 / DIN
– E2000 / FC/PC
– E2000 / SC
The OIS16 modules are available with different optical wavelengths for use in networks
with the WL Wavelength Multiplex System.
The optical connectors of the modules are marked with colored frames to provide rapid
identification of the optical wavelength (see Tab. 5.8).
Wavelength Color Coding
1560.61 nm brown
1558.98 nm red
1557.36 nm orange
1555.75 nm yellow
1554.13 nm green
1552.52 nm blue1)
1550.92 nm violet
1) No special color code - same color as the
enclosure
Tab. 5.8 Color Coding of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Optical Connector for WL Interfacing
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 87
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
1549.32 nm white
enclosure
Tab. 5.8 Color Coding of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Optical Connector for WL (Cont.)Inter-
The transmit and receive lines must be correctly connected when fitting the appropriate
! coupling elements to the pigtail ends of the module (with a view to subsequent connec-
tion to optical fiber cables in the rack).
5.3.1.3 Optical Booster / Preamplifier (OB / OP)

Up to eight OB optical booster modules or OP preamplifier modules can be inserted into
unoccupied tributary slots 402 to 406 and 409 to 413.
Inside the subrack, the modules are connected via optical fiber cables to the OIS4/OIS4-
2/OIS16/OIS16-2 modules.
5.3.1.4 EIPS1 Backup Switch Line (EBSL)

The EBSL module at the slot 210 is mandatory if using an equipment protection 1:n for
EIPS1 modules. It makes a concentration n:1 of the traffic signals between the LTU
modules (working) and the LTU module (protecting).
5.3.1.5 Power Supply Unit Tributary Protection (PSUTP)

The PSUTP module at the slot 212 supplies the EBSL module and also the LTU mod-
ules which are supplied themselves on the other side by the EIPS1 modules.
5.3.1.6 Switching Network Line (SNL)

The slots 407 and 408 can be equipped with SNL modules. All OIS16/OIS16-2 and
EIPS1 modules incorporate the 155-Mbit/s ISDH interfaces on the backplane. These
signals are routed to the SNL module in slot 407 and to the redundant module in the slot
408. The SNL module can be used to cross-connect these signals (configured via the
SCU). If required, in this way a SNL module can interconnect with up to 64 inputs and
64 outputs.
Slot No. Module ICS Address
407 SNL SN#1

408 SNL SN#2
Tab. 5.9 Assignment of the Slot No. and CLL Modules in the SLD16
5.3.1.7 Overhead Access (OHA)

Only the slot 401 can be equipped with an OHA module. The OHA module can be used
to gain access to the overhead bytes (SOH / POH) of the line and / or the tributary inter-
faces for speech and data communication.
88 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
The OHA module incorporates the following supplementary channel interfaces:

– Two 64-Kbit/s data channels with an interface conforming to ITU-T-Recommenda-
tion G.703
– Four data channels with an interface conforming to ITU-T Recommendation V.11
– One 2-wire interface for a 2-wire DTMF handset
– One PBX interface
– Two 4-wire E&M interfaces.
401 OHA OH
Tab. 5.10 Assignment of the Slot No. and OHA Module in the SLD16
5.3.1.8 Telemetry Interface (TIF) Module, TIF- Function

The external customer alarms (see 5.2.2) can be read in, using the TIF module in the
slot 211 and cab be transmitted using a G.703 channel connected to the OHA module.
In the other direction, control and alarm signals can be transmitted from the TIF to the
external destinations.
The TIF function may also be present in a rack using a TIF-box located in the rack ter-
! minal panel. This is most probably in a rack having mixed type of equipment and com-
binations of subracks, like a SLD/T16 plus a SMA16 in the same rack for example. In
this case, the TIF-box is used by the SMA16, having no space for a TIF-module inside
the SMA16 subrack.

and Use of an External CLA Box
The CLL module, which centrally generates the system clock T0 required by the individ-
ual modules, is installed in slot 414. The redundant CLL module can be inserted into slot
415. Each module selects a reference clock, which is fed in via an external interface (T3)
or which is obtained from the STM line signal (T1). This reference clock is then convert-
ed into 4 mutually-synchronous clocks (1 Hz, 2 kHz, 6.48 MHz and 155.52 MHz) and
distributed via the backplane. If no reference clock is available, the module automatically
generates the clock in “free running mode”. If a high-quality reference clock is available,
the CLL supplies a 2.048-MHz reference clock to T4 for use with other devices.
An external Clock Line Adapter (CLA) may be taken for transmitting and receiving syn-
chronous clock signals T3/T4 for use of high quality clock signal. In this case an CLL64-
2 must be used.
In order to operate a subrack, it is essential that a CLL module must be installed in one
i of the two slots for clock preparation.
414 CLL, CLL64-2 CU#1

415 CLL, CLL64-2 CU#2
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 89
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.1.10 Synchronous Control Unit (SCU)

All the modules are controlled via the SCU module in slot 416, which is connected to the
local craft terminal (LCT). The SCU is connected to all other modules via the ICS bus on
the backplane.
Two types (SCU-R2 and SCU-R2E) of SCU or SCU-R may be used. For more detailed
information on difference see Chapter 5.2.4.
In every case, a SCU module is required in order to be able to control and interrogate a
i subrack.
The used SCU type may be a SCU-R2 or a SCU-R2E.
(The difference between the two types is only in the on board available RAM memory
space).
5.3.1.11 Subrack Alarm Panel and Phone Interface (SRAP-PI)

In the module (connector) in sub-slot 512-1 are the sub-rack alarm and indication fea-
tures as well as an phone interface connector for EOW purpose accessible.
The Subrack Alarm Panel (Indicator Field) is located at the right hand side top of the
subrack frame, beneath the EOW phone (handset).
5.3.1.12 Telephone Handset for the Two-Wire-Interface (2WHS)

A Phone Handset (S42025-Z467-A3) is equipped in the space between subrack termi-
nal panel and the module frame (on top of the last) of the SLD16 R2.5 subrack.
90 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.2 Subrack SLD16E

This is the 2-Row subrack version.
For a front panel schematic view (see Fig. 4.10).
5.3.2.1 Electrical Tributary Interfaces

EIPS1 modules can be inserted into slots 401 to 404 and 411 to 415 (see Tab. 5.12)
These are tributary modules which can be used to transmit and receive four electrical
STM-1 or PDH signals (configurable with the LCT, see OMN:SL). Slot 414 can be used
for a module protection 1:N of the slots 401 to 404, 411 to 413 and 415.
For a subrack, the SLT16E configuration provides sufficient slot options (four are re-
quired) for the EIPS1 modules in order to generate a full access to the STM-16 line ca-
pacity.
The SLD16E configuration provides eight slots for EIPS1 modules, thus allowing access
to the full drop / insert capacity of the STM-16 channel on both line sides (west / east).
The slots 201 to 209 for the LTU modules are located in the upper section of the sub-
rack. All the electrical STM-1 or 140-Mbit/s tributary signals are connected via the coax-
ial connections (A1 to A8) of the LTU modules and not directly to the EIPS1 modules.
From there, the electrical tributary signals are routed to the associated EIPS1 modules
using the backplane trails.
The slot 211 may be used as a customers equipment control and a supervisory inter-
face, being occupied with a TIF-module (see 5.3.2.9).
On the front panel, the EIPS1 modules are equipped with 4 monitor outputs for mea-
surements intended for maintenance purposes.
CP (Card Protection)
• To enable an EIPS1 module to be protected against a card failure by an additional
EIPS1 module, the two modules are connected together via the backplane at the
155-Mbit/s (ISDH) level.
1:N (Multiplex Card Protection)
• To enable an EIPS1 module to be protected against a card failure by the available
EIPS1 protection module in the frame, the modules are connected together via the
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 91
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
401 Empty, Can be used in combination with equipment in

CS4, slot 415, as an 1:n equipment protection.
EIPS1 Slot can be used for CS4.
slot 415, as an1:n equipment protection.
403
Slot can be used for CS4.
404
slot 415, as an 1:n equipment protection.
413
415 Empty / Can be used in combination with EIPS1 equip-
EIPS1 ment in slots 401 ... 404, 411 ... 414,
as an EIPS1 working interface
for 1:n EIPS1 equipment protection.
Tab. 5.12 Equipping Options for EIPS1 Modules
The following LTU slots are connected via the backplane cabling to the EIPS1 slots
(see Tab. 5.13):
LTU Slot EIPS1 Slot ICS Address
201 401 T#1

202 402 T#2
203 403 T#3
204 404 T#4
205 411 T#5
206 412 T#6
207 413 T#7
208 414 T#8
209 415
210 (EBSL) 415
Tab. 5.13 Assignment of the LTU and EIPS1 Modules in the SLD16E
92 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.2.2 Optical Tributary Interfaces / Line Interfaces

The slots 401 to 404 and 411 to 415 can be equipped with OIS1 / OIS4/OIS4-2 modules
(see Tab. 5.14); slots 502 to 504 and 507 to 509 can be equipped with OIS16/OIS16-2
modules (see Tab. 5.15). These modules are line interfaces, which can be used to send
and receive optical STM-1/4/16 signals.
1+1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Single Ended
(Independent Switching on both sides: no casual traffic)
1+1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Dual Ended
(Switching according to ITU G.783 A3.4.1 [MSP 1 + 1])
1:1 MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) Extra Traffic
– only for OIS16/OIS16-2 modules –
• To enable an OIS16/OIS16-2 module to be protected against a line failure by an ad-
ditional OIS16/OIS16-2 module, the two modules are connected together via the
MS-BSHR/2 Extra + Extra Traffic
(Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 2 fiber) and
MS-BSHR/4 (Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 fiber)
• For a MS-BSHR circuit, there are additional ISDH links between the slots.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 93
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

OIS4 / OIS4-2 / OIS1 slot 402 as a working interface for 1+1 MSP.
(ICS address: T#1)
slot 401 as a protection interface for 1+1 MSP.
(ICS address: T#2)
(ICS address: T#4)
slot 403 as a working interface for 1+1 MSP.
(ICS address: T#3)
(ICS address: T#6)
(ICS address: T#5)
(ICS address: T#7)
(ICS address: T#8)
slots 401 ... 404 and 411 ... 414 as an 1:N MSP
equipment protection.
(ICS address: T#9)
Tab. 5.14 Equipping Options for OIS1/4 Modules
94 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

OIS16 / OIS16-2 slot 509, as a Tributary working interface for 1+1
MSP.
(ICS address: TL#1)
slot 508, as a working Line interface for MSP
and for MS-BSHR/2 (East).
(ICS address: LE#2)
slot 504, 507 and 508 for MS-BSHR/4 (East).
slot 507, as a working Line interface for MSP
and for MS-BSHR/2 (West).
(ICS address: LW#1)
slot 503, 507 and 508 for MS-BSHR/4 (West).
slot 504, as a protection Line interface for MSP
and for MS-BSHR/2 (East).
(ICS address: LW#2)
slot 503, 507 and 508 for MS-BSHR/4 (West).
slot 503, as a protection Line interface for MSP
and for MS-BSHR/2 (West).
(ICS address: LE#1)
slot 503, 504 and 507 for MS-BSHR/4 (East).
slot 502, as a Tributary protection interface for
1+1 MSP.
(ICS address: TL#2)
Tab. 5.15 Equipping Options with OIS16/OIS16-2 Modules
The modules can be equipped with any of four different optical couplings, as follows:
– E2000 / E2000
– E2000 / DIN
– E2000 / FC/PC
– E2000 / SC
The OIS16/OIS16-2 modules are available with different wavelengths for use in net-
works with the WL Wavelength Multiplex System.
The optical connectors are marked with colored frames to provide rapid identification of
the optical wavelength (see Tab. 5.16).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 95
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
1560.61 nm brown
1558.98 nm red
1557.36 nm orange
1555.75 nm yellow
1554.13 nm green
1552.52 nm blue1)
1550.92 nm violet
1549.32 nm white
enclosure
Tab. 5.16 Color Coding of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Optical Connector for WL
The transmit and receive lines must be correctly connected when fitting the appropriate
! coupling elements to the pigtail ends of the module (with a view to subsequent connec-
tion to optical fibers in the rack).
5.3.2.3 Optical Booster / Preamplifier (OB / OP)

Up to twelve OB optical booster modules or OP preamplifier modules can be inserted
into unoccupied tributary slots 401 to 404, 406 and 408 to 415, 502 to 504 and 507 to
509. Inside the subrack, the modules are connected via optical fiber cables to the
OIS4/OIS4-2 or OIS16/OIS16-2 modules.
406 OB / OP OA#1
408 OB / OP OA#2
409 OB / OP OA#3
410 OB / OP OA#4
Tab. 5.17 Assignment of the Slot No. and OB /OP Modules in the SLD16E
5.3.2.4 EIPS1 Backup Switch Line (EBSL)

The EBSL module at the slot 210 is mandatory if using an equipment protection 1:n for
modules EIPS1. It makes a concentration n:1 of the traffic signals between the LTU
modules (working) and the LTU module (protecting).
5.3.2.5 Power Supply Unit Tributary Protection (PSUTP)

The PSUTP module at the slot 212 supplies module EBSL and also the LTU modules
which are supplied by the EIPS1 modules.
96 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.3.2.6 Through-Connection Card for 4xSTM-1 (CS4)

The slots 401 to 404 and 411 to 414 can be equipped with CS4 modules. This module
is necessary for the through-connection of the 4xSTM-1 traffic of an EIPS1 slot to the
slot of an OIS16/OIS16-2 module at slot 502 and 509. When a tributary module
OIS16/OIS16-2 is used in the slots 502 / 509, the CS4 modules are marked by the ap-
plication SW for the SLD16E as related to the slots 401-404 / 411-414.
401 CS4 CS#1

402 CS4 CS#2
403 CS4 CS#3
404 CS4 CS#4
411 CS4 CS#5
412 CS4 CS#6
413 CS4 CS#7
414 CS4 CS#8
Tab. 5.18 Assignment of the Slot No. and CS4 Modules in the SLD16E
5.3.2.7 Switching Network Line (SNL)

The slots 505 and 506 can be equipped with the SNL modules. All OIS16/OIS16-2 and
EIPS1 modules incorporate 155-Mbit/s ISDH interfaces to the backplane. These signals
are routed to the SNL module in slot 505 and to the redundant module in slot 506. The
SNL module can be used to cross-connect these signals (configured via the SCU). If re-
quired, in this way an SNL module can interconnect up to 64 inputs to 64 outputs.
505 SNL SN#1

506 SNL SN#2
Tab. 5.19 Assignment of the Slot No. and OB /OP Modules in the SLD16E
5.3.2.8 Overhead Access (OHA)

The slot 405, 407 and 501 can be equipped with the OHA module. The OHA modules
can be used to gain access to the overhead bytes (SOH / POH) of the line and / or trib-
utary interfaces for speech and data communication. Commonly this is done for the
main lines (rings) and main tributary lines (rings).
At slots 407 and 501 the module has the reduced function (Ltd.) with access to two more
64 Kbit/s data channels according to ITU-T recommendations G.703.
Ringing signal of the slot 501 is not available on the PABX interface (see Fig. 11.9).
The OHA module incorporates the following supplementary channel interfaces:
– Two 64-Kbit/s data channels with an interface conforming to ITU-T Recommenda-
tion G.703
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 97
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
– Four data channels with an interface conforming to ITU-T Recommendation V.11

– One 2-wire interface for a 2-wire DTMF handset
– One PBX interface (software in preparation)
– Two 4-wire E&M interfaces.
405 OHA OH#1

407 OHA (Ltd.) OH#2
501 OHA (Ltd.) OH#3
Tab. 5.20 Assignment of the Slot No. and OHA Modules in the SLD16E
5.3.2.9 Telemetry Interface (TIF)

The external customer alarms (see 5.2.2) can be read in using the TIF module in the slot
211 and cab be transmitted using a G.703 channel connected to the OHA module. In
the other direction, control and alarm signals can be transmitted from the TIF to the ex-
ternal destinations.

and the Use of an External CLA Box
The CLL module, which centrally generates the system clock T0 required by the individ-
ual modules, is installed in slot 416. The redundant CLL module can be inserted into slot
417. Each module selects a reference clock, which is fed in via and external interface
(T3) or which is obtained from the STM line signal (T1). This reference clock is then con-
verted into 4 mutually-synchronous clocks (1 Hz, 2 kHz, 6.48 MHz and 155.52 MHz) and
distributed via the backplane. If no reference clock is available, the module automatically
generates the clock in “free running mode”. If a high-quality reference clock is available,
the CLL supplies a 2.048-MHz reference clock to T4 for use with other devices.
An external Clock Line Adapter (CLA) may be taken for transmitting and receiving syn-
chronous clock signals T3/T4 for use of high quality clock signal. In this case an CLL64-
2 must be used.
414 CLL, CLL64-2 CU#1

415 CLL, CLL64-2 CU#2
In order to operate a subrack, it is essential that a CLL module must be installed in one
i of the two slots for clock preparation.
5.3.2.11 Synchronous Control Unit (SCU)

All the modules are controlled via the SCU module in slot 511, which is connected to the
operating terminal (LCT). The SCU is connected via the ICS bus on the backplane to all
the other modules.
98 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
510 Empty (for future use only) UCU#2

511 SCU-R UCU#1
Tab. 5.22 Assignment of the Slot No. and SCU Modules in the SLD16E
In every case, a SCU module is required in order to be able to control and interrogate a
i subrack.
The used SCU type may be a SCU-R2 or a SCU-R2E.
(The difference between the two types is only in the inboard available RAM memory
space).
The empty slot no. 510 is reserved for future equipment extending by a 2nd SCU but
not used in the SL16E-2.5 equipment.
5.3.2.12 Subrack Alarm Panel and the Phone Interface (SRAP-PI)

In the module (connector) in sub-slot 512-1 are the sub-rack alarm and indication fea-
tures as well as an phone interface connector for EOW purpose accessible.
The Subrack Alarm Panel (Indicator Field) is located at the right hand side top of the
subrack frame, beneath the EOW phone (handset).
5.3.2.13 Telephone Handset for the Two-Wire-Interface (2WHS)

A Phone Handset (S42025-Z467-A3) is equipped in the space between subrack termi-
nal panel and the module frame (on top of the last) of the SLD16E 2.5 subrack.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 99
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.4 Typical Configurations

Typical examples include:
• A SLD16 synchronous line add / drop device
implemented with the SLD16 subrack (SRL) (see 5.4.1)
– With flexible cross-connection options for tributary channels,
– EIPS1 modules protection switching,
– OIS4-2 module has additional SONET concatenation mode,
– MS-BSHR/2 protection switching, extra traffic and SONET mode,
– MS-BSHR/4 protection switching and SONET mode;
• A SLD16 synchronous line add / drop device
implemented with the SLD16E subrack (SREL) (see 5.4.4)
– With flexible cross-connection options for tributary channels
– EIPS1 modules protection switching
– EIPS1 1:N modules protection switching
– OIS4-2 module has additional SONET concatenation mode.
– CS4 interconnection switching
– 1+1 MSP protection switching for OIS1
– 1+1 MSP protection switching for OIS4 / OIS4-2
– MS-BSHR/2 protection switching
– MS-BSHR/2 protection switching, extra traffic and SONET mode
– MS-BSHR/4 protection switching and SONET mode.
For other equipping options, see the TED and OMN:SL.
i
5.4.1 Configuration as a SLD16

and the Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 Fiber
The synchronous line equipment (heavy equipped) with a flexible access and an access
to the tributaries within the STM-16 line signal (see Fig. 5.7).
The LCT can be used to configure the choice between a STM-1 signal and a 140-Mbit/s
signal for each channel (see Chapter 8).
Line side Line side
west MS-BSHR/4 east
optical optical
STM-16 STM-16
optical optical
STM-16 STM-16
electr. opt. opt. opt.

Tributary side
140 Mbit/s (PDH) STM-1 STM-4 STM-16
or STM-1(SDH)

with MS-BSHR/4 Protection Switching
100 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
The following modules must be inserted into the corresponding slots (see Tab. 5.23):
Slot Module Operating Mode
401 OHA Working

402 EIPS1
403
404 empty
405 OIS16 / 4F Shared Ring Protecting (East) with #406, #409, #411
OIS16-2
406 4F Shared Ring Working (West) with #405, #409, #411
407 SNL Working
408 empty
409 OIS16 / 4F Shared Ring Protecting (West) with #405, #406, #411
OIS16-2
410 empty
411 OIS16 / 4F Shared Ring Working (East) with #405, #406, #409
OIS16-2
412 OP Optional
413 OB
414 CLL, Working
CLL64-2
415 empty, Protection
CLL,
CLL64-2
416 SCU SCU-R2 or SCU-R2E
Tab. 5.23 Configuration as a SLD16 with Access to Tributary Channels
Slots 201 to 204 must be equipped with LTU modules.
5.4.2 Configuration as a SLT16

with a Fixed Access to the Tributary Channels
and the 1+1 Multiplex Section Protection
The synchronous line terminal with a permanent access to the tributaries within the
STM-16 line signal and having MSP (see Fig. 5.8).
The LCT can be used to configure the choice between a STM-1 signal and a 140-Mbit/s
signal for each of the 16 channels (see Chapter 8).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 101
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Tributary side Line side

140 Mbit/s
or
STM-1 electr.
STM-1 opt. STM-16, Working

optical
STM-4 opt.
STM-16, Protection
STM-4 opt.
Fig. 5.8 SLT16 Synchronous Line Terminal
Slot Module Operating Mode / Corresponding Slot
401 OHA Working

402 EIPS1, OIS1, Optional
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
403
OP, OB
404 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working with #405
(both Slots)
405
EIPS1, OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2
(each slot)
406 OIS16 / OIS16-2
407 SNL
408 SNL
409 OIS16 / OIS16-2
410 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working with #411
(both Slots)
411
EIPS1, OIS1,
OIS4 / OIS4-2
(each slot)
412 EIPS1, OIS1, Optional
OIS4 / OIS4-2,
413
OP, OB
414 CLL, CLL64-2 Working
415 empty, Protection
CLL, CLL64-2
416 SCU Working
Tab. 5.24 Configuration of the SLT16
102 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
5.4.3 Configuration as a SLD16 with

Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 2 Fiber
The synchronous add / drop multiplexer with a MS-BSHR/2 protection switching
(see Fig. 5.9).
The LCT can be used to configure the choice between STM-1 signal and 140 Mbit/s sig-
nal for each of the 16 channels (see Chapter 8).
Line side Line side
west MS-BSHR/2 east
optical optical
STM-16 STM-16
Tributary side electr. optical optical
140 Mbit/s STM-1 STM-16

or or
STM-1 STM-4

401 OHA
402 EIPS1 Working
403 Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) with #402
404 OIS1 Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) with #405
405 Working
406 OIS16 / OIS16-2, (OB or OP) Working (West)
407 SNL Working
408 empty, SNL Protection
409 OIS16 / OIS16-2, (OB or OP) Working (East)
410 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working
(both slots are occupied)
411
or Protection
(OIS4 / OIS4-2, OB or OP)
Tab. 5.25 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/2 Protection Switching
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 103
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
412 OIS4 / OIS4-2 Working

413
Protection
414 CLL, CLL64-2 Working
415 empty, CLL, CLL64-2 Card Protection
416 SCU SCU-R2, SCU-R2E
Tab. 5.25 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/2 Protection Switching (Cont.)
5.4.4 Configuration as a SLD16E

and the Multiplex Section
Bidirectional Self Healing Ring / 4 Fiber (BSHR-4)
Text starts here.
Line side Line side
west MS-BSHR/4 east
optical optical
STM-16 STM-16
optical optical
STM-16 STM-16
Tributary side
STM-16 STM-16

401 empty, CS4, Working

EIPS1
402 empty, Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) with #401
CS4,
OIS1
Tab. 5.26 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/4 Protection Switching
104 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

CS4,
404 Working
OIS1
405 OHA Tributary Side
406 OB or OP
407 OHA Line Side or Tributary Side
408 OB or OP
409 OB or OP
410 OB or OP
411 empty, Working
CS4,
412 Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) with #411
EIPS1
CS4,
414 Working
OIS1
415 EIPS1, Working
OB, OP,
OIS1, OIS4 / OIS4-2
416 CLL, Working
CLL64-2
417 empty, CLL, Card Protection
CLL64-2
501 OHA Line Side
502 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (West) Tributary Line #1 and #2
503 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (West) Line #1 and #2
504 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (West) Line #3 and #4
505 SNL Working
506 SNL Protection
507 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (East) Line #1 and #2
508 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (East) Line #3 and #4
509 OIS16 / OIS16-2 Working (East) Tributary Line #1 and #2
510 empty Blank Panel
511 SCU SCU-R2, SCU-R2E
Tab. 5.26 Configuration as SLD16 with MS-BSHR/4 Protection Switching (Cont.)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 105
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
5.5 Connection of the Optical Fiber Cables (FO)

The optical fiber connectors on the optical modules conform to DIN 47 256 and they can
be equipped with the appropriate couplings for use with E2000, DIN, SC or FC / PC con-
nectors.
The connection and the disconnection of the optical connections on the modules is sim-
plified by the use of an easily-accessible pivoting mechanism. It is unnecessary to clamp
the optical fiber cable and the minimum bend radius must always be maintained.
For cable laying in the subrack, see Fig. 5.1.
To ensure minimum attenuation values when making an optical connection, the individ-
ual connecting components must be correctly located and securely attached. This ap-
plies equally to the optical fiber connections on the modules.
If required, e.g. in the event of an excessive optical attenuation, the light output surfaces
of the optical fiber connectors must be cleaned using a suitable cleaning fluid (e.g. iso-
propanol 99 %).
A protective cap must be fitted to optical fiber connections which are not in use.
i
The optical fiber connections must be handles carefully and correctly. The specified min-
imum bend radius of 30 mm must be maintained during cable laying.
In every case, it is essential to avoid any kinking (even momentary) of the cables and
the optical connectors must not be subject to impact. In addition, force must not be ap-
plied to the connectors
Damaged optical fibre cables must be handled with care.
! Broken glass fibers can be sharp and may cause injury.
106 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6 Switching on the Network Element
6.1 General
Chapter 6 describes (Start-up) of the complete SLD/T16 R2.5, including the individual
cards during commissioning. Start-up includes all activities from switching on the power
(or after a software reset) until normal operating status is achieved.
The term “Start-up” covers the response of a module up to the point where normal op-
erating status is achieved.
Features of the Start-up process for a module are:
• no effect on the rest of the system,
• normal operation is rapidly achieved,
There are two different kinds of start, a cold start and a warm start. A cold start is initiated
automatically when power is switched on, after a restored power failure.
A warm start is initiated by a software command (reset), or by the software watchdog
(time-out), or triggered by the reset button (manually).
The module must reach its normal mode within one minute of a reset.
6.2 Preparation
– Before switching on (circuit breaker moved into position “0”), check supply voltages
1 and 2.
– Do this by unplugging the power supply cable at connector DC input of
the SLD/T16 terminal panel (sub rack):
SLD16 (see Fig. 4.9),
SLD16E (see Fig. 4.10).
– Switch on the circuit breaker (to position “I”), in the rack terminal panel (position 1).
– Measure the DC voltage at the contacts of the power supply DC output at the con-
nector of the supply cable (for contact assignment see Fig. 11.5).
The measured value must lie between –40 V and –72 V measured against the com-
mon potential (GND) for the lower and the upper limit.
Nominal supply voltage is either 48 Volt or 60 Volt.
Make sure that the polarity is correct!
– Then switch the circuit breaker off again (position “0”).
– Re-connect the power supply cable to the sub rack.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 107
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
6.3 Checking of the Power Supply
6.3.1 Rack Mounted SLD/T16

Before the Synchronous Line Equipment mounted in a rack is switched on
(power switch,
located in the rack terminal panel,
is moved into position "I"),
the supply voltages 1 and 2 should be checked.
⇒ This involves unplugging the power supply cable at the SLD/16 (sub rack).
⇒ After the circuit-breakers are switched on, a voltage in the range –40.5 V to
–75 V is to be measured at the pins of the Faston connectors (pin assignments
see Chapter Fig. 11.5). Ensure that the polarity is correct.
⇒ The circuit-breakers should then be switched off, the power supply cables re-
connected to the sub rack and the circuit-breakers being switched back to “ON”.
6.4 Switching “ON” the Network Element
The racks or sub racks Power Die “EIN” Stellung des Stromver-
Supply Switch or Circuit Breakers sorgungs-Schalters oder
position “ON” is marked with IEC Sicherungsautomaten von Gestell
symbol shown beside. oder Baugruppenträger ist mit
dem nebenstehenden IEC Sym-
bol gekennzeichnet.
– Switch on the circuit breaker in the rack terminal panel into position “I” or at the AC
/ DC converter and charger power supply connect the AC cable to the mains.
– The network element is now powered and starts up automatically.
As described in general under 2.5 there are procedures to do switching on the power for
the whole equipment and its devices.
6.4.1 Cards, Components, Modules and Response

of the NE During Start-Up
6.4.1.1 System Controller Unit (SCU) and

Peripheral Controller Units (PCUs)
The System Controller Unit SCU is located in a special slot of the sub rack frame and its
slot location depends on the sub rack type. It communicates with the interfaces to a local
LCT / NCT (using RS232 / V.24) in the sub rack as QD2 (Q-F) for local management, or
using a partner NCT by the Q-B3 (LAN) interface, which has access to a network man-
agement system and monitors remotely the communication of the SLD/T16. It also re-
ports any fault in the sub rack (including processor part fault) via the local alarm
Signalling (Bw7R). Both are signaled to the sub rack alarm panel and to higher-level
monitoring devices.The Peripheral Controller Unit PCU is located on each card to form
the sub counter part (slave processors) of the SCU.
After the supply voltage is applied, the system executes a cold start without taking ac-
count of any existing configurations of the transmission hardware, i.e. payload data
108 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
transmission will be interrupted. The start process includes a complete hardware test
(SCU test, PCU tests, and a test of the transmission ASICs). A cold start always reloads
the controller firmware.
Hardware / software faults are displayed via the Bw7R interface and by the two LEDs
(Fault, Service) of the cards (see Tab. 6.1) and (see Fig. 6.1). If a fault occurs, commu-
nication has already been established between the LCT or the network management
system, an additional message is sent to the connected LCT and / or the network man-
agement system.
If a valid NE-VCDB corresponding to the system equipment is already stored in the MIB
on the card, the network element will be configured and started accordingly. If not, the
system goes in the status “Idle”. In this status a new NE-VCDB software can be loaded
via the LCT or using the LAN connection from the network management system or the
LCT.
6.4.1.2 Possible Faults During Start-Up

The SCU monitors its own Start-up procedure. If a fault occurs, the SCU reacts as fol-
lows:
• Fault during HW test
If it is found during the power on self test (POST) that the SLD/T16 does not meet
the minimum requirements for booting, the Start-up procedure is aborted.
This fault is indicated by the red LED on the module.
• Fault during SW Start-up
The software components of the SCU synchronize each other during Start-up.
If successful synchronization could not be achieved, the Start-up is aborted.
This fault is indicated by the red LED on the module and indirectly using the SRAP-
Panel (watchdog being tripped).
Refer to the notes given in the Chapter 2.4.1.
The power supply voltage must not be disconnected during Start-up, as this may cause
i damage to the system software files.
During Start-up, no alarms should be displayed on the Bw7R Signalling system
(SRAP-PI, LZE, ZBBeo).
Tab. 6.1 shows the response of the module LEDs (see Fig. 6.1) during start-up.
Operating Mode Red Fault LED Green Service Status LED
Start of the NE software On On
Integral self-test, boot software OK Off Off
Load boot software request, boot software OK, On On

Application software not OK
Operating status attained, boot software OK, Off Off

Application software OK
Error; for remedial action refer to MMN On Off (switched on by the NE control
software)
Tab. 6.1 Response of the Module LEDs During Start-Up
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 109
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fault LED (red)
Service status LED (green)
At the LTU, TIF and CS4 modules, there are no LEDs.
Fig. 6.1 Display Elements on the Modules
110 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6.4.1.3 Boot Phase

The boot phase is the same for all cards irrespective of whether the start is a cold start
or a warm start.
After power or (or after a SW reset), the microprocessor registers are new initialized, the
interrupts disabled and the LEDs on the front are switched on. A memory test is then
done. If it is successful, the hardware is initialized and a brief HW test is done. The next
step is to test the check sum of the ASW stored in the FEPROM. If this is OK, the ASW
is started. The boot phase is now complete and the system ready to operate.
The module goes into the “Idle” status if the ASW does not match or when the HW prod-
uct code numbers of the cards do not match or when there is no valid / appropriate NE-
VCDB available.
In this state new software can be loaded via the network management system or the
LCT.
6.4.1.4 Starting the ASW (Cold Start)

This phase involves starting the SLD/T16 up to the point where the normal operating
state is achieved.
When the boot phase is completed, the LEDs are switched off. When power is switched
on, the external and internal interfaces of the module will remain in a defined state.
Information is then exchanged with the system and peripheral controllers on the mod-
ules, which ensures that
• the version of the ASW is valid for the card hardware,
• the configuration data is valid consistent with the MIB configuration,
The ASW conducts a RAM initialization in the ASIC and a SL bus test. A Variable Con-
figuration Data Block (VCDB) containing the latest configuration data, is then loaded.
Once the VCDB has been correctly loaded in the FEPROM and no faults reported, the
SCU enables the complete card functions, which then switches to the normal "Active"
status.
6.4.1.5 Possible Faults During Software Start-Up

If faults are detected during the boot phase, a cold or warm start, the red LED stays
on and the green LED goes out. No information is sent to the SPC to report the detect-
ed defective card. The only indication of a fault occurrence is that the Fault LED lights
up.
If faults are detected in the hardware test, which follows the boot phase after a cold
start, the red LED comes on and the Start-up is interrupted. If possible, the SCU sends
an equipment alarm to inform of an occurred HW fault. The module then switches to the
“unavailable” status.
6.4.2 Switching “ON” the Complete Rack

Each rack is fused at a power-supply distributor in the communications-equipment
room. The rack can be switched on completely by its fuses there.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 111
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
6.4.3 Switching “ON” the Complete Subrack

Each sub rack having its DC power supplying fused with two circuit-breakers, located in
the racks terminal panel fuse-board, one for the working and one for the protection line.
Switch on procedure starts with switch on first the DC protection one, and then the DC
working one.
6.4.4 Switching “ON” the Additions

Additions are fused, depending on their power consumption, either with circuit-breakers,
or with glass / ceramic-tube based fusible links.
Switch on the circuit breaker or set in the fuse in the fuse holder, both, for the working
and the protection DC power supply line. Start with the protection one.
Switch on the accompanying circuit-breaker or put in the glass / ceramic-tube based fus-
ible link by screwing it into the fuse holder or connect the DC line cables.
6.5 Switching “OFF” the Network Element

As described in general under 2.4 there are procedures to do switching off the power for
the whole equipment and its devices.
6.5.1 Switch “OFF” the Complete Rack

Each rack is fused at a power-supply distributor in the communications-equipment
room. The rack can be switched off completely by its fuses there.
6.5.2 Switch “OFF” the Complete Subracks

Each subrack having its DC power supplying fused with two circuit-breakers, located in
the rack terminal panels fuse-board, one for the working and one for the protection DC
line.
Switch off procedure starts, (on a communication traffic free SLD/T16), after having
saved necessary set-up and configuration data, with switch off first the protection power
supply, and then the working one.
6.5.3 Switch “OFF” the Additions

Additions are fused, depending on their power consumption, either with circuit-breakers,
or with glass / ceramic-tube based fusible links (for example in heavy equipped racks
the fans or the fan-unit).
Switch off or remove the fusible link, both, the working and the protection DC power sup-
ply line.
Switch off the accompanying circuit-breaker or remove the glass / ceramic-tube based
fusible links by screwing it out of the fuse holder or disconnect the DC line cables.
112 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6.6 Emergency Switching “OFF” the Network Element
The racks or sub racks Power Die “AUS” Stellung des Stromver-
Supply Switch or Circuit Breakers sorgungs-Schalters oder
position “OFF” is marked with IEC Sicherungsautomaten von Gestell
symbol shown beside. oder Baugruppenträger ist mit
dem nebenstehenden IEC Sym-
bol gekennzeichnet.
An Emergency Switch “OFF” in case of fire, smoke, or other hazardous, may be done
either by the SLD/T16 sub racks main power switch or if the cause is not yet locatable
to a sub rack with the racks main power switch, located in the Rack Terminal Panel.
Refer also to Chapter 2.4.
Emergency Power “OFF” for SLD/T16: Not-Abschaltung “OFF” für SLD/T16:
! → UBAT2 → “OFF” → UBAT2 → “OFF”
→ UBAT1 → “OFF”. → UBAT1 → “OFF”.
All supply voltages are off. Alle Versorgungsspannungen aus.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 113
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7 Connecting the Operating Terminal to a Net-

work Element and
Configuring the Operating Terminal
7.1 The LCT and the NCT Operating Terminals

Network elements can be operated and monitored, using either an operating terminal
(LCT or NCT) or a network management system (TNM).
Preferably, the LCT operating terminal should be used for mobile operation and the NCT
operating terminal should be used for stationary operation. In principle, the same hard-
ware can be used for both terminals; however, in view of the different operating modes,
we recommend that a notebook should be used for the LCT and a desktop PC for the
NCT. Two types of software – one LCT software package and one NCT software pack-
age – are available to match the different types of hardware; the NCT software package
also includes the LCT software package. For this reason, the operating terminal with
NCT software installed can be used in either LCT or NCT mode.
The decision whether to use the LCT mode or the NCT mode is based on the installation
of the relevant version either the UniGATE gateway software [LCT] or the UniGATE
gateway software [NCT].
When connected via the Q-F interface, LCT mode provides access to the local network
element. When connected via the Q-B3 interface, up to 150 network elements in a spe-
cific address range can be selected (without the option of a graphical network view).
NCT mode (connection via the Q-B3 interface) permits monitoring of all the alarms re-
ported by any of the accessible network elements. A background bitmap (preferably a
geographical map) can be assigned to each communications channel to enable the net-
work elements to be positioned according to their geographical location.
LCT/NCT LCT/NCT
NE-UniGATE NE-UniGATE
with local access with network access
Ethernet-LAN
RS232/V.24 Ethernet, e.g. 10Base2
Q-F Q-B3 Q-B3
Multiple Multiple
A local NE NEs NEs
DCC
Fig. 7.1 Interface Associations of the LCT and NCT
114 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
7.1.1 Composition of the Operating Terminal and Devices

for a Connection to the Ethernet
The operating terminal can only be operated from a PC with the Windows NT 4.0 (ser-
i vice pack 4 or above) or Windows 2000 operating system installed.
Hardware System Requirements

For example, a notebook may be used as a LCT or a desktop PC may be used as a
NCT, configured as follows:
1. Composition of the notebook as a LCT:
– E.g.: SNI SCENIC Mobile 510 or Mobile 750 notebook or an advanced one;
– RAM: 64 MB;
– Hard disk capacity: 200 MB (standard netto capacity is about 4 to 10 GB!);
– One floppy disk drive (1,44 MB),
(as an optional extra a ZIP-drive can be ordered);
– One CD-ROM drive,
(as an optional extra a DVD-ROM-drive can be ordered);
– One spare battery pack 14,4 V / 40 Wh,
(a second one may be ordered as an optional extra);
– RS232 / V.24 cable, 2.5 m;
– Mains 230V AC to 19V DC (2,6 A DC) Power Supply with Charger Circuit as an
internal and external usable compartment of the notebook;
– As an optional extra a KfZ (Automobile) Power Supply Adapter 12 V DC to 19 V
DC (2,6A DC Output) can be ordered.
2. Composition of the desktop PC as a NCT:
– E.g.: SNI SCENIC Pro C5 or an advanced one;
– RAM: 64 MB;
– Hard disk capacity: 500 MB minimum
(standard netto capacity is about 8 to 20 GB!);
– Mouse;
– RS232 / V.24 cable, 2.5 m;
– 17-inch, 19-inch or 20-inch monitor;
– Mains 230V AC line connection cable
as an external compartment of the desktop PC.
Minimum System Hardware Requirements

Minimum System Requirements (for use of other PC equipment as stated above):
CPU: Pentium(TM) 90 MHz
RAM: 64 MB
Hard Disk Drive (HDD): 200 MB (for LCT) or 500 MB (for NCT).
Required Hard Disk (HDD) space for installation:
11 MB, additional approx.,
50 MB, for SW Download of the NE SW;
Operating System (OS): Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP4
or
Microsoft Windows 2000 SP1
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 115
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
LAN Hardware Requirements

The following equipment is required for connection to the Ethernet 10Basex (x=2, =T, or
=F) LAN:
1. Ethernet set, consisting of:
– Ethernet card and driver floppy disk for the operating terminal
– 10Base2 (coaxial) cable (standard set and use) 4 m , or 10BaseT (STP) cable
(optionally set and use) 4m, or 10BaseF (LWL) cable (special demand set and
use) 4m and depending on the set used connecting the MAU MDI-side to LAN-
line.
– HF termination, 2 off
– HF adapter (tee-piece), 1 off
2. MAU kit, consisting of:
– MAU (MDI side with 10Base 2 (Coax) / or 10BaseT (STP) / or 10BaseF (LWL)
depending on the Kit and use) /
(Standard supply Kit is MAU with MDI side 10 Base 2 to AUI side as Qx (Q-B3)
with 15 pole Sub-D Connector)
– Mounting
– HF adapter (tee-piece), 1 off
– NF cable (connection between the MAU’s AUI-side and the AUI-side as sub rack
connection using Q-B3/Qx, with a length of 2.5 m)
Software Requirements
The software comprises three components:
• the OSI Stack V1.7.1 software
• the NeProxy Software
(as an option if system is used for communication routing the LANs on internet)
• the NE-UniGATE V6.x gateway software
• the Application Software (ASW) specific to the network element (NE):
– SL16 - 2.5 (Single-Row subrack) or
– SL16E - 2.5 (Double-Row subrack).
The Application Software (ASW) requires at least Version 5.70 or higher release and
build level of the “COMCTL32.DLL” file.
Automatic update of the “COMCTL32.DLL” file during installation on former operating
system software is only possible if the user is logged in having administrator rights. A
reboot is neccessary to operate with the update. Boot drive and installation drive must
be different.
116 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
7.1.2 Hardware for Connecting the Operating Terminal

to a Network Element
The following options are available for connecting the operating terminal to the local net-
work element or to the remote network elements (see Tab. 7.1):
Operating Terminal
Network Element Interfaces Connection Elements Operating Function
Operating Mode Interface
LCT RS232 Q-F interface in the sub rack Null modem cable Communication with the con-
or (COM 1, ...) terminal panel (9-pin sub-D connector) nected NE, e.g. for addressing
NCT or maintenance
PC: LAN / Ether- Q-B3 interface in the sub rack Normal case: MAU kit for Requirement: addressing of
net connection terminal panel 10Base2 Ethernet the network elements is com-
Notebook: de- Normal case: connection via (see Fig. 7.2) plete.
pending on type, 10Base2 LAN / Ethernet Special case: special con- LCT: communication per ses-
e.g. via external (see Fig. 7.2) necting cable from the PC or sion with up to 150 NEs (alter-
LAN / Ethernet Special case: direct connec- the notebook to the Q-B3 inter- nating)
card tion of the operating terminal to face NCT: communication per ses-
the Q-B3 interface sion with up to 150 NEs
Tab. 7.1 Connection Options: Operating Terminal / Network Element(s)
A 50 Ω (Ohm) termination must be fitted to the open end of the Ethernet connection
i (tee-piece) on the MAU and on the LCT / NCT. If a number of NEs are connected, this
applies to the MAU of the last sub rack in the series.
10Base2 10Base2 (50-Ohm)/10Base2 STP/10BaseF LWL ter-

Subrack mination or to the next rack (NSAP n)
MAU-MDI
NF 2.5 m 10Base2 (Coax) / or 10BaseT (STP) / or 10BaseF (LWL) *)
Q-B3 10Base2 (Coax) / 10BaseT (STP) / 10BaseF (LWL) 4 m cable

(Ethernet)*)
NSAP2 Qx/Q-B3
MAU-AUI
*) Depending on the LAN-cable used,
standardly 10Base2 (coax) type
NF 2.5 m 10Base2 MAU MDI side to

Qx (AUI-side)
(required if the Ethernet card
Subrack has no coaxial LAN terminal)
Ethernet card in
the notebook
Q-B3 NSAP (local)
NSAP1 LCT/
NCT
10Base2 (50-Ohm)/
or 10BaseT/ or
10BaseF
LWL termination *)
Fig. 7.2 Connection of the Operating Terminal to the Q-B3 Interface

of the Sub Rack
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 117
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2 NE Software and Software Parts Installation
7.2.1 Installing the Ethernet Software

Certain card drivers must be installed before the Ethernet interface can be used for data
transfer. Some of these drivers are supplied with the operating software and some are
included with the installation floppy disks for the Ethernet adapter.
The software is installed on a system either using Windows 2000 or Windows NT oper-
ating system from the disk drive (e.g. floppy drive A:\ or from the CD-ROM drive e.g. L:\
or from any other storage device onto the hard disk C:\ of the computer).
The installation sequence is described in the LCT Components (readme.* file)
i installation instructions located on floppy disk No. 1 or on the CD ROM of the application
software.
7.2.2 Installing the OSI Stack Software V 1.7.x

Before installing the Operating Terminal software and the NE Unigate V6.x software the
OSI Stack Operation V1.7.x software for Windows 2000 (with Service Pack 1) / Win-
dows NT (with Service Pack 4) has to be installed.
Before installation, read the “readme.*” file on floppy disk No. 1 or on the CD ROM of
i the application software. Some preparation is needed (see 7.2.2.1) before starting the
installing procedure.
7.2.2.1 Preparation for Installing the OSI Stack

Before Installing the OSI stack software prepare some information for the values to enter
in the mask fields of the interactive GUI-windows for configuration of the OSI Stack soft-
ware. Proceed as follows:
1. Ask the System Administration if there are own NSAP-allocation rules being used,
and let assign the NSAP addres(ses) and proceed with step 3., else do step 2 pro-
cedure.
2. If the network control computer (host) has its own Ethernet Adapter or Ethernet
Card, use the default Local NSAP mask setting:
495349454d454e53414700000001xxxxxxxxxxxx01 with adding the MAC Address
(XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX) of the used Ethernet Adapter/Card - without the dashes (-)
inbetween - editing it into the xxxxxxxxxxxx part of the address string.
(To get the MAC address and used IPs from the used computer and connected net-
work use the command of the operating system “Windows NT” or “Windows 2000”:
Click on the <Start> button of the Windows Operating System and select the <Pro-
grams> menu item, which again displays a menu from which <Administration>
menu item is to be choose and from the now appearing menu select <MS-DOS>
menu item.
In the displayed (black) window part enter at the prompt ipconfig/all or ipcon-
fig.exe/all command. All LAN access parameters of the computer and the Ethernet
adapter or the Ethernet card for the LAN-network is shown. Note down or keep by
copy the address value for the MAC address being entered or past later on as a part
of the NSAP address into the NSAP address field of the mask appearing during in-
stallation setup of the OSI stack software.).
118 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
3. If no LAN access is there only serial access is possible.

Use the predefined address string:
495349454d454e5341470044455354000001 in this case.
7.2.2.2 Installation of the OSI Stack Software

Copy the compressed file from the Installation Diskette or the Installation CD-ROM into
the pre given default directory mentioned in the installation instructions help files (like
readme/installation) or following the displayed information of the guideance information
to go ahead and when a restart is needed.
Anyway, the procedure is summarized here:
1. Start the installation by double-clicking on the “setup.exe” file and following the in-
structions on the screen;
2. If neccessary,
if the Flag “Start Stack as Service” (see Fig. 7.6) is set,
then it will install automatically,
else follow the instructions and guidance printouts appearing on the screen:
3. <Start>;
4. <Settings>;
5. <Control Panel>;
6. <Network>;
7. <Protocols>;
8. <Add>;
9. <Have Disk>;
10. The installation protocol is now automatically carried out;
11. Close the window and Restart the craft terminal.
Fig. 7.3 OSI-Stack Icon
By clicking on the <OSI Stack Configuration> button in the ”Q-B3” folder under,
the window "OSI Stack Configuration V1.7.1" is opened (see Fig. 7.6).
This window has several option fields, an “OpWin Configuration” area and some
Stack parameter setting buttons beside the <OK> and <Cancel> buttons for the window
itself.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 119
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.2.3 Bind Stack Software and OSILLC Driver to the Operating System
The Operation System of the used Computer, as for example Windows NT, needs bind-
ing of the stack and protocol drivers.
After marking the flag “Start Stack as Service” in the “OSI Stack Configuration V1.7
Build 002” window, open the “Control Panel” screen (see Fig. 7.4) of the Windows
NT and double-click on the “Network” Icon. Do the set-up process like shown by the
“Screen-shot” window (see Fig. 7.5) and with the underwrited text remarks, showing the
subwindows one beside one, enter the neccessary values for operation of the protocol
drivers under Windows NT operation system. Processing steps using the Windows 2000
Operation System is very similiar and need not mentioned here.
Restart the used computer by software restart with the appearing information window.
Open here with double-click for starting set-up of

net and protocol drivers.
Fig. 7.4 “Systemsteuerung (System Control)” Window
120 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.5 LAN “Network” and Related Set-Up Windows

Use “Protokoll (Protocol)” folder
and if the needed protocol is not already in the systems protocol driver list press the
<Hinzufügen (=Add)> button, which opens the
“Auswahl Netzwerkprotokoll (Choose Network Protocol)” window.
Use <Diskette(Drive)> button for entering the path to any system drive and to the di-
rectory where the desired LAN protocol driver source is stored.
Use magnifying scale in online document to show details of the windows
i (scale about ~200% or 1:2).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 121
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.3 Configuration of the OSI Stack Software
Fig. 7.6 “OSI” Window

The window contains areas, buttons, flags, and fields.
Local NSAP address string;

at x-positions enter MAC address
Enable Loopback: unmarked as default
(do only mark for maintenance, simu-
lator and test purpose / reset to de-
fault unmarked for normal operation)
Local IP-Address (for RFC 1006): NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN
(Possible value range:
000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255)
refer to private network addresses al-
lowed (see 8.12) and enter only those
released from network management.
Default value: 127.0.0.1 (Loopback)
(only if serial communication instead
of LAN is used and if “Enable Loop-
back” flag is marked).
Number of Channels and Ctx: 200
as a network dependent default value
Bind to Network Interface Card: 1 ... 4
network interfaces or cards
OpWin Configuration area: -----------------------------------
Open Stack, when Operator starts: unmarked as default
Stop Stack, when Operator stops: unmarked as default
Start Stack as Service: unmarked as default /
marked for use of NE-PROXY.
Stack parameters: see button description
In this window the stack parameters by <ES-IS>, <Transport> and <manl. Routes>
buttons are displaying the configuration windows each, by clicking on the relevant button
(see Fig. 7.7), (see Fig. 7.8) and (see Fig. 7.9).
122 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Stack Parameters for ES-IS Configuration by <ES-IS> button

The following default settings are defined with the “ES-IS Configuration” window
(End System to Intermediate System) opened (see Fig. 7.7):
Fig. 7.7 “ES-IS Configuration” Window

The following default settings are defined with the “Transport Configuration” window
opened (see Fig. 7.8).
Stack Paramters for Transport Configuration by <Transport> button
Fig. 7.8 “Transport Configuration” Window

Using the <Configuration> <Interface parameters...> menu items the “Interface Pa-
rameters” window is opened and selecting the <Transport> button to display the
“Transport Configuration” window.
The following default settings are defined:
Window Timer [s] 16

Retransmission bound: 4
Retransmit timer [ms] 8000
Maximum TPDU size [128 x 2 n] 3
(TransmitCounter):
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 123
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Maximum TIDU size [1100 + 512 x n] 6

(Receive Counter):
Default LifeTime [0.5s]: 50 ... 127
Credit Window Size: 4
Proposed use of checksum: marked
Use extended format: marked
Enable delayed acknowledge: marked
If it becomes necessary to change any of the parameters, the relevant values must be
selected by double-click (or by clicking with the right-hand mouse button on the param-
eter menu).
The default values can be restored at any time by clicking on the <Cancel> button the
new settings by the <OK> button.
Stack Parameters for Manual Route by <manl. Routes> button

The following default settings are defined with the “Manual Routes” window opened
(see Fig. 7.9).
Fig. 7.9 “manl. Routes Configuration” Window

Using the <Configuration> <Interface parameters...> menu items the “Interface Pa-
rameters” window is opened and selecting the <manl. Routes> button to display the
“Manual Routes” window.
This window has a white area subwindow with a framed field to enter a Local NSAP ad-
dress for routing using the <Add>, <Edit> or <Remove> button to enter the values for
a Manual Route. Direction of the Manual Route must be choosed with <Up> and
<Down> button. At last, confirmation to the system is done by <OK> button or no
change to the existing setting by <Cancel> button.
Pressing the <Add> button gives another option configuration window,
the “Route” window (see Fig. 7.11).
It helps to enter the “Address Prefix” in the so called field, Next Hop Flags: “Net” and
“SNPA”, and the election between 1 ... 4 possible Network Interface Adapters or Net-
work Interface Cards. At last, confirmation to the system is done by <OK> button or no
change to the existing setting by <Cancel> button.
124 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.10 “Route” Configuration Window

This mask window gives an additional help to enter manually routers by its Address Pre-
fix and the next hop address. The flags “NET” and “SNPA” are settable. NET or NET
address is the network entity title constructed and will be coded like a NSAP address
according to ISO 10589. SNPA or SNPA address is the Initial Domain Identifier (IDI) as
a part of the NSAP address.
The “Address Prefix” field is to be feed with the area address of the router or gateway,
having in the last block of the dotted decimal notation the address value as “0”.
The “Next Hop” field is to be feed, depending on the flag, either with the Network Ad-
dress (flag NET is true) or with the MAC-Address (flag SNPA is true).
Entries to the “Route” only makes sense if the stack is working as IS router.
i
OSI STACK Protocol Operation Control Window
Under Windows NT control, start window (see Fig. 7.11) with double-click on “op-
win.exe”.
Fig. 7.11 “OSI STACK Operator” Protocol Operation Control Window
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 125
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.4 Installation and Configuration of the NeProxy

As an option for communication by using the internet as route the “NeProxy” software
is added.
Double-Click on “NeProxy 6.x nnn B 108.exe” in the installation directory for the Uni-
GATE software.
The “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-Proxy” window (see Fig. 7.19) appears having the
4 folders:
• General
with the “Version” and “Service Status” information areas;
• Limits (see Fig. 7.13)
with information and settings for the maximum number of local network members.
• Communication (see Fig. 7.14)
with information and settings for Identifiers, SAP-Addresses and Ports
• Security (see Fig. 7.15) with the “User” subwindow (see Fig. 7.16).
Fig. 7.12 “NE-Proxy - General” Main Window
126 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.13 “NE-Proxy - Limits” Window
Fig. 7.14 “NE-Proxy - Communication” Window
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 127
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
For the “Communication with Clients” the window allows the setting of the appropri-
ate TCP/IP Port number if not automatically been got from the operating systems envi-
ronmental variables.
The <OSI Control Applet ...> button will open the same window as under Fig. 7.6 dis-
played.
Additionally the window allows the setting of the “Local T-, S-, and P” Selectors.
The Q-B3 option should be selected for communication, when using the Ethernet inter-
face of the LCT/NCT.
The <OK>, <Abbrechen (= Cancel)> and <Hilfe (= Help)> buttons are available to pre-
pare, ignore or call for more information about what to do.
Watch the Note in the “NE-Proxy - Communication” window for validation of the set-
tings after pressing the <OK> button.
Fig. 7.15 “NE-Proxy - Security” Window

This window allows the clients loggins, password change and password setting.
128 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.16 “NE-Proxy - User” Main Window

Different Users may be entered here.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 129
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.5 Installing the NE Unigate V6.x Software

Before installing the Operating Terminal Software the NE Unigate V6.x software for Win-
dows 2000 / Windows NT (with Service Pack 4) has to be installed.
i the application software.
1. Start the installation by double-clicking on the “setup.exe” file and following the in-
structions on the screen;
2. Install the “NE UniGATE” protocol software:
3. <Start>;
4. <Settings>;
5. <Control Panel>;
6. <Network>;
7. <Protocols>;
8. <Add>;
9. <Have Disk>;
10. Click on “NE UniGATE” icon and start with the <OK> button;
11. The installation protocol is now automatically carried out;
12. Close the window and Restart the craft terminal.
Fig. 7.17 “UniGATE Icon” Window
130 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.6 Starting the NE UniGATE Software

The “UniGATE” program for the LCT or NCT is started by double-clicking on the relevant
“NE-UniGATE[LCT/NCT]” icon either for LCT or NCT in the “Siemens NE-UniGATE”
program group if it is yet not started by double-clicking on the appropriate selection win-
dow which then opens the GUI LCT:(see Fig. 7.19) or NCT:(see Fig. 7.20).
Following the opening image, the logon window appears.
(This window can also be opened using the menu commands: <Security> <Logon...>.)
First and initial values for User name is: “ADMIN” and for Password is: “siemens-00”
and must be changed after initial operation and start-up of the system to a secure one
by the system administrator for the normal operation (see 7.3).
Fig. 7.18 “NE-UniGATE Login” Window

For the relevant entries for access to the system, see the Operating Manual of the Uni-
GATE gateway software.
The data for access authorization should only be used for initial commissioning of the
LCT / NCT processor program. Different user IDs and passwords should be entered,
particularly in the case of multiple users.
For more information about access authorization and system administration, see Chap-
i ter 7.3.1.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 131
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.7 NE UniGATE Grafical User Interface (GUI)
Fig. 7.19 “SIEMENS TransXpress NE UniGATE[LCT]” GUI-Window

The LCT Main Window (GUI of UniGATE) (see Fig. 7.19) supplies the operator with
some tools accessible with the items available on the toolbar.
The following control and command tools are available:
• File
• View
• Network
• Symbol
• Fault
• Configuration
• Security
• Options
• Window
• Help
The program group “Offline” mode opens automatically when the Enter key is pressed.
Additional settings can be made via the menu bar of the program but these are not rel-
evant for initial establishment of communication with the sub rack. For further informa-
tion, see OMN:SL.
132 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.20 “SIEMENS TransXpress NE UniGATE[NCT]” GUI-Window

The NCT Main Window (GUI of UniGATE) (see Fig. 7.20) supplies the operator with
some tools accessible with the items available on the toolbar. The configuration menu
has the additional item: <Background> (see Fig. 7.22)..
The following control and command tools are available:
• File
• View
• Network
• Symbol
• Fault
• Configuration
• Security
• Options
• Window
• Help
The program group “Offline” mode opens automatically when the Enter key is pressed.
In order to initiate communication with a network element, the required interface must
be first selected (for initial commissioning for local connection of the operating terminal:
the Q-F interface / for initial commissioning for the remote operation the Q-B3/QST in-
terface) and the interface parameters must be set. This is done, in turn, with the aid of
the “Configuration” menu and the options.
<Configuration>, <Use Network Interface>, and <Configuration>, <Use Serial Line
Interface> (see Chapters 7.2.11.1 and 7.2.11.2).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 133
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.8 Installing the Operating Terminal Software

In order to facilitate communication with the network element, before commissioning the
network element, the operating software must be installed on the operating terminal.
i the application software.
The operating software comprises the following components:

• OSI Stack V 1.7 Build 002;
• NE-UniGATE V6.x;
• SLD16 Application SW (ASW);
• SLD16E Application SW (ASW).
The NE-UniGATE is a non-manufacturer-specific gateway software, which is also used
with other TransXpress products (e.g. synchronous multiplexers). It establishes commu-
nication with an NE.
The “NE-UniGATE” and the relevant “Application SW” program components are re-
quired for communication with the NE.
7.2.9 Configuring the Operating Terminal

To ensure compatibility of the color representation of the alarm symbols when using
i notebook computers, the color intensity of the graphics on the desktop PC must be
configured with 16 bit.
The Q-F interface should be used for initial commissioning of the desired subrack or net-
work element (NE).
The use of Q-B3 interface is only possible if the network element (NE) is addressed as
a single element at the LAN with its own default address, being the master device if the
LCT terminal is connected to the NE’s Q-F interface.
In absence of an LCT the NE is on the LAN as a slave device and the responsible NCT
can act as the master device.
7.2.10 Configuration of the Communication Control Interfaces

To get access to an NE several possibilities are provide to control the Siemens SDH
Network Elements.
In case a LCT is used basically the serial line interface provides the access. Secondarily,
with an additional hardware interface like a LAN-adapter, the network based access is
possible too.
When a NCT is used, basically the network interface will do the work.
All parameters are settable in “Offline” mode.
The configuration of the NE for the LAN communication is done using
the “Configuration” menu,
from the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]” GUI
window is opened
By selecting and marking the <Use Network Interface> or the <Use Serial Line Inter-
face> menu item.
Clicking on the <OK> button, the “State” of this interface is changed to the new values
or the <Abbrechen(=Cancel)> button leaves it as is.
134 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.21 “UniGATE and Configuration Menu” Example Window
Fig. 7.22 “Configuration Menu”
7.2.11 Configuration of the Options

The configuration of the NE for the LAN communication is done using
the “Options” menu,
from the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]” GUI
window.
By selecting the <Use Network Interface> or the <Use Serial Line Interface> menu
items, the relevant communication settings mask windows are accessible.
Clicking on the <OK> button, the “State” of this interface is changed to the new values
or the <Abbrechen(=Cancel)> button leaves it as is.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 135
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.11.1 Communication Settings for LAN Network Access

This Settings mainly get access to the values neccessary for basic IP communication
parameters, like IP Address, Port and Connection-, Packet-, and Telegram Time param-
eters, as well as an access to the OSI Control Panel described above and in previous.
It replaces former used <QST> settings.
For the TMN control communication using the Ethernet interface, internal interface of
the PC by Ethernet LAN card or external by PCMCIA LAN Card or any other Ethernet
LAN module using the appropriate standard interfaces for the connection of the
LCT/NCT,
select the “Option” item of the command bar from the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-
UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]” GUI window command line and click on the
<Network> of the “Communication Settings” window. The setup mask window appears
(see Fig. 7.23).
.
Fig. 7.23 “Communication Settings” for “Network” Window
OSI Area Button and Remark

OSI Control Panel press button if OSI is used
it show the OSI config win-
dow (see Fig. 7.6).
Please Reboot after OSI Configuration default action
NE-Proxy Area Flags and Fields

Use NE-Proxy flag default = unmarked
IP-Address field *) and (see 8.12)
Port number field automatically recovered
*) Depends on the values proposed by the netplaning management.
Connections Area Flags and Fields

Enable Initial Connect flag default = marked
Connect Max. field default = 50 *)
136 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Connections Area Flags and Fields

Connect Interval (s) field default = 30 *)
Connect Time-out (s) field default = 120 *)
Enable Reconnect field default = marked
*) Depends on the network parameters.
Telegrams Area Flags and Fields

Time-out (s) field default = 250 *)
*) Depends on the network parameters.
7.2.11.2 Communication Settings for Serial Line Access

This Settings mainly get access to the values neccessary for basic serial line communi-
cation parameters, like COM Port Number and its Byte size, QD2 serial access Param-
eters (Baud-Rate, Parity and Stop-Bits used), QST serial access (Baud-Rate, Parity and
Stop-Bits used), PPP Dialup (Q3) Connection-, Packet-, and Telegram Time-Out pa-
rameters. It replaces former used <Q-F/QB3> settings.
For the TMN control communication using the Serial Line interface, internal COM-n in-
terface of the PC or Control Computer,
select the “Option” item of the command bar from the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-
UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]” GUI window command line and click on the
<Serial Line> of the “Communication Settings” window. The setup mask window ap-
pears (see Fig. 7.24).
.
Fig. 7.24 “Communication Settings” for “Serial Line” Window
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 137
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
The following default settings are defined for SDH networks:

[RS232/QD2/QST] area:
[Q-F] or
[Serial Interface according to EIA-RS232/V.24/DIN 66 066]
/ LCT by LCT/NCT device adapter cable
ComPort 1 ... 8 *)
ByteSize 8
*) Depends on the available COM n Ports on the PC or Computer used.
[QD2] or [Serial Interface according to EIA-RS232/V.24/DIN 66 066]

/ with SISA-GK device adapter cable
BaudRate 9600
Parity Even *)
StopBits 1
*) Depends on the NE device interface (Even is default value for all SLD/T16-2.5 NEs).
[QST] / with LAN adapter/card by LCT/NCT device
BaudRate 19200
Parity Even *)
StopBits 1
Telegram TimeOut(s) 50
*) Depends on the NE device interface (Even is default value for all SLD/T16-2.5 NEs).
If it becomes necessary to change the parameters, select the relevant values by double-
click (or by clicking with the right-hand mouse button on the parameter items in the menu
fields). If COM-Port 1 is occupied for example by mouse use instead COM-2 Port or any
other free COM-n Port of the PC or Control Computer.
[PPP Dialup (Q3)] area:
[PPP] / Dialup with Q3 device interface or modem
Phone-Book Entry: MPU-F 1)

User: LCT/NCT 2)
NE IP-Address: NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN 3)
NE T-Selector: 4)
NE S-Selector: 5)
NE P-Selector: 6)
Local IP Address: 7)
1) Message Protocol Unit for F-interface
(default mnemonic MPU-F represents covered parameters).
2) Set to used type of control manager.
3) Shown address value in window as an example (here local loopback 127.0.0.1).
Set to address value proposed by the netplanning department according to
internet specifications (see 8.12).
138 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4) Transport selector
(default mnemonic “tse” represents covered parameters/value).
5) Session selector
(default mnemonic “sse” represents covered parameters/value).
6) Presentation selector
(default mnemonic “pse” represents covered parameters/value).
7) Local IP Address
(default empty “” represents no net connect as seen with the loopback address
127.0.0.1 under NE IP Address).
[Telegrams]
Telegram TimeOut(s) 80 *)
*) default value (time depends on the connected line parameters)
7.2.11.3 Background
This Windows are only available for the NCT operation for the screen’s Background Pic-
ture (Map, Net Scheme etc.)(see Fig. 7.25) and (see Fig. 7.26)
Fig. 7.25 “Background” Window
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 139
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.26 “Background” Window
7.2.11.4 Communication with NeProxy Access

Mark Flag “Use NE-Proxy“ (see Fig. 7.23) and do set-ups mentioned in 7.2.4.
140 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.12 NE Addresses
After setting of LAN Interface and Serial Line Interface communication parameters, se-
lect from the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]”
GUI window command bar the “Configuration” menu and from it the item:
“NE Addresses .. “.
Fig. 7.27 “NE Addresses” Window

Select from the “Assign NE Addresses” window’s left side “Not Active” list subwin-
dow the desired NE type by highlighting it.
Press the <Edit> button.
The “Edit NE Address” window appears for inputs.
7.2.12.1 NSAP Address of the Operating Terminal

Any operating terminal being connected to a LAN network using the Ethernet, must be
assigned to a NSAP (Network Service Access Point) address.
The procedure is as follows:
– A standard address (default) is already specified in the UniGATE software.
– Default specification must be changed if several NE computers are used in the net.
– For this purpose select:
<Options> <Communications Settings>
which displays the “Communications Settings> window.
to select the “Local...” panel in the opened window.
– “Local NSAP address:”, max. 40 characters,
(Default: 47 00 99 02 76 00 00 33 10 00 00 00 02 XX XX XX XX XX XX 01
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 141
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
with XX XX XX XX XX XX representing the (unique) MAC address

of the terminal’s LAN adapter);
– “Local IP address:”,
(Default: 218.20.34.112 in normal LAN or 127.0.0.1 in serial and loopback configu-
ration);
– “Maximum Number of Connections:” (Default: 50);
– “Bind to Network Interface Card:” (Default: 1),
and the “OpWin Configuration” box;
– The following settings can be edited directly in the window;
– Then close down the operating terminal and restart it to activate the new NSAP ad-
dress.
– Select:
<Configuration>, <Assign ...>, <NE Addresses>,
and “Local ...>” to open the window:
“Edit local machine address” (see Fig. 7.6)
– The “NSAP-Address” of the operating terminal is only readable here,
the “TSAP-ID”: SYNEC-OS, can be edited here directly in the window.
7.2.12.2 NSAP Addresses of the Network Elements

All the network elements are also assigned their own NSAP addresses in order to en-
sure that they can be clearly identified and addressed in the LAN by the operating ter-
minals. These addresses must be input to the operating terminal with the associated
identification parameters in a table.
The procedure is as follows:
– In the UniGATE software,
the “” window must be opened using the menu path:
<Configuration> <Assign...> <QSTB3-Addresses...>.
– The right-hand “Not active” sub-window contains a list of all the network elements
for which the address parameters have already been entered but which do not yet
form an integral part of the operating terminal program, i.e. they neither appear in
the network presentation window nor can they be selected or interrogated by the op-
erating terminal program.
– The address parameters of network elements selected from this list can then be
changed in the editing window which is opened by pressing the “Edit...” button
(see OMN:SL).
It is only advisable to transfer the NE addresses into the “Active” window if the corre-
! sponding network elements have already been configured with the corresponding ad-
dress parameters (see Chapter 8).
The values specified by the network planner are to be entered, in order to avoid potential
i collisions in the network and to comply with ISO standards 8348 and 10589.
142 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.28 “Add NE address” for “QST Protocol” Window
Identifier: = Network element type (e.g. SLD16E 2.5),

(max. 18 characters);
Protocol: = Protocol Type (e.g. QST / cannot be set or modified);
NSAP: Address (max. 40 characters) of the network element,
T-Selector: SYNEC-OS,
NE Type: = Type of NE using a dedicated number for it
(e.g. 01 for SLD16, 02 for SLD16C, 03 for SLD16E, 10 for
SMA16);
APS Feature : = Version designation (e.g.: 01.01)
and current version value is: 01.07;
Buttons: <Template> = formular values for the fields to modify to the to
be set ones;
<OK> = new values set are the default ones,
<Cancel> = former values set are the default ones;
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 143
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.29 “Add NE address” for “QD2 Protocol” Window
Identifier: = Network element type (e.g. SMA1/4 R2.3(M)),

Protocol: = Protocol Type (e.g. Q3/QST/QD2 / be set or modified);
Device class: = Device class number;
Device model: = Number;
Device variant: = Number;
Manufacturer: = Manufactorer code number;
Buttons: <Template> = formular values for the fields to modify/change
into the to be set ones;
– To accept network elements in the operating terminal program, the required network
elements must be transferred from the “Not active” list to the “Active” list (using
the arrow keys).
– Only the network parameters for the “Not active” elements can be changed using
the “Edit” button. Therefore, the arrow key must be used to transfer “Active” ele-
ments from the left-hand panel to the right-hand panel beforehand.
It is only advisable to transfer the NE addresses into the “Active” window if the corre-
! sponding network elements have already been configured with the corresponding ad-
dress parameters (see Chapter 8).
144 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.30 “Add NE address” for “Q3 Protocol” Window
Identifier: = Network element type (e.g. SLD16E R2.5),

Protocol: = Protocol Type (e.g. Q3 / be set or modified);
NSAP/IP: Address (max. 40 characters) of the network element,
S-Selector: default = empty field;
P-Selector: default = empty field;
Device Data: ---------------------------
NE Type: ;
APS Version: ;
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 145
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.2.13 Select Properties and NSAP/IP Addresses of the Operating Terminal

See Properties menu item and window (see Fig. 7.31).
Fig. 7.31 “Properties” Window
Identifier: = Network element type (e.g. SMA1/4 R2.3(M)),

Protocol: = Protocol Type (e.g. Q3/QST/QD2 / be set or modified);
NE Type: ;
APS Version: ;
EM Server: Address (max. 40 characters) of the network element,
Application: Directory Path and File of the Application,
Icon Subtitle: =;
Description: =;
146 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Device variant: = Number;

Manufacturer: = Manufactorer code number;
7.2.14 Connect to Network

After setting of LAN Interface, Serial Line Interface communication parameters and the
NE Addreses, select the “Network ” menu.
..
..
7.2.15 Starting the NE Application Software

The Application program for the LCT or NCT is started by double-clicking first on the
“SL16 - 2.5 / SL16E - 2.5” software icon located on the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-
UniGATE [LCT/NCT] - [offline/online]” GUI window (see Fig. 7.21) if the ASW is yet
not started.
Single-Row Sub Rack
Double-Row Sub Rack

Fig. 7.32 “NE Start Icons”
The data for access authorization should only be used for initial commissioning of the
LCT / NCT processor program. Different user IDs and passwords should be entered,
particularly in the case of multiple users.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 147
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
7.3 Access Authorization
7.3.1 Access Authorization

A prompt appears in the NE-UniGATE “Logon” window, requesting entry of the name
and password of the operator. The access authorization for the operator is classified into
five authorization classes. When the application software is selected, NE-UniGATE
specifies the parameters for the relevant authorization level.
The authorization classes (user classes) are assigned by the application software as fol-
lows:
• Class 0 Maintenance
The operator can read everything but cannot make any adjustments.
• Class 1 Operation
The operator can read everything but cannot make any adjustments.
• Class 2 Configuration
The operator can perform configuration operations on the application software.
• Class 3 Supervisioring
The operator can perform configuration operations on the application software.
• Class 4 ADMINISTRATION
The operator is not subject to any restrictions in the operating software and the ap-
plication software.
Important Remark
☞ The Application Software (ASW) requires at least Version 5.70.0.0 of the

“COMCTL32.DLL” file.
Automatic update of the “COMCTL32.DLL” file during installation on former op-
erating system software is only possible if the user is logged in having adminis-
trator rights. A reboot is neccessary to operate with the update. Boot drive and
installation drive must be different.
During initial commissioning, the “SIEMENS TransXpress NE-UniGATE [NCT]” win-

dow (see Fig. 7.33) is visible.
From the menu bar select the <Security> <User...> items in the User Manager can
be used to define names, passwords and user classifications with different rights for dif-
ferent users.
After the completion of the installation the customer may change the initial setup value
to secure ones by its own. This is done with the help of the “Change Password” window
mask (see Fig. 7.36).
148 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.33 “NE User Administration” Window
Fig. 7.34 “Add NE User” Window
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 149
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 7.35 “Delete NE User” Window
Fig. 7.36 “Change NE Password” Window
For operation of the menus, see:

i OMN:SL.
150 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8 Configuring the Network Elements

Each network element must be configured and operated independently. Since each NE
is equipped with its own communications interface, for configuration purposes they must
be connected in sequence to the operating terminal.
During configuration (setting parameters with the aid of an operating terminal, LCT /
NCT), it is assumed that the network elements are equipped in accordance to the net-
work planning specifications.
The recommended sequence of operations is as follows:
1. Entering the “Access Rights (Start-up and Logs)” (see 8.1).
2. Entering the “NE Location and NE Name (NE Data ...)” (see 8.2).
3. Entering the “Sub Rack Data” (see 8.3).
4. Entering the “Second (Redundant) Power Supply” (see 8.4).
5. Entering the “Persistence Time Configuration” (see 8.5).
6. Entering the “Bw7R Configuration” (see 8.6).
7. Entering the “MAC-Address of the NE” for the NE device(see 8.7).
8. “Activating the NE” (see 8.8).
9. Entering the “SLD/T16 Network Additional Equipping (Limited Equipping)”
(see 8.9).
If optional OHA modules are equipped, go ahead with the next item No.10
(see 10.),
otherwise, proceed with No. 13 (see 13.).
10. Configure the OHA module(s)
in the Slot 401 (single-row sub rack)(see 8.9),
in the Slot 405, 407, 501 (double-row sub rack) (see 8.10).
11. Set-up of the Channel 1 (single-row sub rack) (see 8.9.1.1),
Channel 1 (double-row sub rack)(see 8.10.1.1),
and if used of the Channel 2 (single-row sub rack) (see 8.9.1.2), the
Channel 2 (double-row sub rack) (see 8.10.1.1),
of the optional TIF module (see 8.10).
12. If used, set-up of the Channel 2 (single-row sub rack) (see 8.9.1.2), the
Channel 2 (double-row sub rack) (see 8.10.1.1), and
of the optional TIF module (see 8.10).
13. Entering the “SLD/T16 Network Element Equipping (Full Equipping)”
(see 8.10).
14. Setting the “Date and Time (NE Time ...)” (see 8.11).
15. Setting the “Message Communications Functions (MCF)” (see 8.12)
(CLNS, DCC-Channels, Ethernet-Channel, Gateway, IP, ISO/OSI and Stacks).
16. Setting the “Synchronization and Clocks (SEC)” (see 8.13).
17. Overview of the Network Element Types (see 8.14).
18. Entering the Network Element Equipment Configuration (see 8.15).
19. Define “Data Upload” and “Data Download” for Configuration Data (see 8.16).
20. If used, set the “Sa-Bits” of the CLA Box (see 8.17).
21. Set the “Alarm Displays (Settings)” (see 8.19).
22. If used, Configurations and Settings for SONET Connection (see 8.15.12).
When the SCU module is delivered, it is already loaded with the necessary SW:
– the APS (Application Program System) (see 8.16.1),
– all parameters entered will be stored in the VCDB
(Variable Configuration Data Block).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 151
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
A software download is only necessary in the event of software modifications (see

OMN:SL and MMN), or in special cases, when the hardware is extended by the above
mentioned additional modules. However, once the settings have been entered, it is pos-
sible to transfer them to other similar types of elements in the network by uploading /
downloading the VCDB.
For details of the configuration stages, also refer to the Help function in the menu bar
i or press the F1 key.
Interconnecting with SONET networks is now possible (see 8.13.8)

i and (see 8.15.12).
152 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.1 Entering the Access Rights (Start-Up and Logs)

Access is barred in order to prevent simultaneous configuration of other NEs, e.g. via a
remote NCT.
The configuration of a network element can be started in several NE-States. The best
way be to perform all set-ups with the NE remaining in the “Idle” and “Maintenance”
mode. After having completed the configurations, first switch the NE to the “Active”
mode and watch the alarms. If neccessary, make changes to remove the cause of any
alarms. Finally, switch to “Operation” mode. But to do this, access rights must be spec-
ified. For more details on the NE states (see 8.8).
Before a network element can be configured, the access right should be set as follows:
1. In the Main Window menu bar, select the item with the left mouse button:
<Security>.
2. A 5-item menu is displayed having the items:
<Access>,
<Request Write Access>,
<Release Write Access> (greyed out),
<Activity Log>,
<NE Password>.
3. Select the menu item:
<Request write access>.
4. Now the previous greyed out <Release Write Access> is highlighted indicating the
user that the write access rights are now with his LCT/NCT NE.
(Selecting the first item: <Access> shows the user a information window showing the
access rights specifically by “You”, “Nobody” or “Other User” messages.)
5. To protocol the actions the <Activity Log> menu item may be initiated.
6. If a password is to be set or changed, use the <NE Password> menu item.
7. Confirm the setting(s) using <Apply>, <Default> and <Close> buttons.
Once configuration has been completed, the same procedure described must be per-
i formed with the security menu item: “Release write access”.
On starting an already partially or fully configured SL16 2.5/SL16E 2.5 NE user inter-
i face, an overlaid: “Access” window is visible,
which will show the “Access Management” window for information.
Quit this window with the <Close> button.
If the access rights are already set, they can be made visible by selecting:
i “Access Management” window,
displaying the “Current writing Element Manager” rights.
Quit this window with the <Close> button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 153
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.1.1 Options Setting Window

The “Options Setting” window is accessible from the “General Window” Tool Bar by
clicking on the <Options> and on the submenu item: <Settings> tool button clicking on
it with the left mouse button.
A “Option Settings” window is displayed, containing a five area view, the <OK> and
the <Cancel> button. For installation purposes the default features of the following areas
may be set:
1. Alarm Severity Threshold: major (default)
2. Open at Startup: Module View (default) or Access Window (for first installation)
3. Time Display: GMT (default) or Local Time
4. Save on Exit: Alarm Severity Threshold
5. General: Tool bar
8.1.2 Access Information Window

This window is for information only, who (node) is the current writing Element Manager.
8.1.3 Activity Log

The “Activity Log” is loaded from the NE to the LCT automatically when a file save has
been quitted. No operator action is needed.
The “Activity Log” data is stored in the protected RAM of the SCU card.
If a deletion is needed during installation, the SCU card is to be pulled out or a power-
supply failure should be initiated (removing power suppling).
8.1.4 Security NE and LCT NE Password

This is only available for user class “Administrator” only. If the installator has this
rights, he is able to change it.
The “Security NE” window is displayed with the fields:
1. Old LCT NE Password
2. New Password
3. Repeat New Password
and the buttons:
1. <Default>
2. <Apply>
3. <Cancel>
Every of the other two operating systems has its own password.
i The NE LCT password can be reset from the other operating systems (OS and NCT).
154 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.2 Entering the NE Location and the NE Name

In order to be able to address a network element from the remote NCT (for status inquir-
ies or configuration changes), the location and name of the NE must be entered before-
hand, using the procedure as follows:
1. In the “Module View” window select the “NE / Sub Rack” symbol box,
and from the displayed Context Menu select the item:
<Configuration>.
Next click with the right mouse button on the item:
<NE Data...>.
2. The name of the network element must be entered in the 1st field by “NE Name”.
3. The location of the NE can now be entered in the 2nd field under “NE Location”.
4. Finally click the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
In addition, by selecting the “Data” field and then the ,
a specific customer identification number can be entered for:
“Customer Specific” in the field “Card Label” (see 8.3).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 155
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.3 Entering the Subrack Data

To be able to access a SLD/T 16 network element from the remote NCT (for status in-
terrogations or configuration changes), the location and name of the NE should be en-
tered beforehand, if not done previously, using the procedure described in 8.2.
In the “Module View” window:
1. Click on the “NE / Sub Rack ... “ symbol box with the right mouse button,
then select the menu item:
<Configuration>, which opens a submenu.
Next select the submenu item:
 with the right mouse button.
2. The “Sub Rack Data Config” window is displayed. This has 2 folders.
3. In the 1st folder: “Customer Specific” the only field to be filled in is the scroll able
card label field.
4. In the 2nd folder: “Vendor Specific” all the fields are read only, having manufactur-
ing-specific equipment data, and are for information only.
5. Finish the settings by pressing the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
8.3.1 Configuring the NE Subracks

1. Click with the right mouse button on the “NE / Sub Rack ... “ symbol box,
 with the right mouse button.
2. The “Sub Rack Data Config” window is displayed.
3. Perform the appropriate settings.
8.3.2 Configuring the Slots

1. Click on the appropriate “4nn / 5nn“ module number symbol box (Slot Symbol) with
the right mouse button.
Initially the slot is marked “Empty” with no card in it.
Select from the displayed menu the labels for the card types,
which can be run in the appropriate slot,
f.e. like: “OIS1”,
which itself by mouse-click opens a submenu with the items for the provisioning
modes of the card,
f.e. like: “Working”.
8.3.3 Configuring the Modules

1. Click on the appropriate “4nn / 5nn“ module number symbol box, located at
the “Module Symbol Label”, with the right mouse button,
156 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
f.e. like: “OISn”,

then select from the displayed menu beside the arrow the labels for the provisioning
modes,
f.e. like: “Working with #nnn”,
which can be run for the appropriate module.
8.3.4 Configuring the Ports for the Traffic Flow

In the “Sub View <Card> <Slot>” window:
1. Click on the appropriate module symbol box with the right mouse button,
which opens the subview window.
2. In the subview window click on the Port symbol box which opens a menu.
3. Select the item: <Subview> which displays the “Traffic Flow” window,
f.e. like: “OISn <Slot No.> <Port No.> (Bit-Rate) Traffic Flow” window.
Then select from the displayed window the symbol box for the ports,
f.e. like: “STM-1”,
which shows the appropriate port settings.
Now select the submenu item:
< Configuration... > with the right mouse button.
5. Finally click the <Apply> and then the <Close> button. For more details (see 8.12).
8.3.5 Configuring the Special Slots or Cards (Slots for CS4)

This is only relevant using a SLD16E.
i
This subrack uses blocked slots 502 (TL#1) and 509 (TL#2) on configuring
OIS16/OIS16-2 modules.
The assigned Slots for CS4 cards are:
Slot for OIS16/OIS16-2 ICS Address Coordinated Slots for Coordinated

for Slot CS4 Cards ICS Addresses
502 TL#1 401 ... 404 T#1 ... T#4
509 TL#2 411 ... 414 T#5 ... T#8
Tab. 8.1 Slots of CS4 cards assignment to OIS 16 cards
8.3.6 Configuring the CLL and the CLL64-2

1. Click on the “CLL” module symbol box.
2. A 5-item menu is displayed.
3. Select the item: <Configuration>.
4. From the submenu choose: <SEC>.
5. The “SEC Set Enable Clocks” window with the timing scheme is accessible.
6. Setup the timing in accordance to the netplanning.
7. Finish with the <Apply> or the <Update> and then the <Close> button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 157
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
The 2nd card is auto configured during card set-up after card insertion,
and only the User Label Field can be write accessed.
All other features:
• Card State
• User Label (editable)
• EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStart-Up
• MTS Mode
• Selected T0 Bus
are read only fields.
Available Buttons:
<Apply>, <Update>, and <Close>.
8.3.7 Configuring the SNL

1. Click on the “SNL” module symbol box.
3. Select the item: <Configuration>.
4. From the submenu choose: <Cross Connections>.
5. The “Cross Connections” window with is accessible.
6. Setup the cross connections in accordance to the net planning.
7. Finish with the <Apply> or the <Update> and then the <Close> button.
The 2nd card is auto configured during card set-up after card insertion,
and only the User Label Field can be write accessed.
All other features:
• Card State
• User Label (editable)
• EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStart-Up
• Selected T0 Bus
are read only fields.
Available Buttons:
<Apply>, <Update>, and <Close>.
For more details (see 8.15.13.3).
158 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.4 Entering for a Second (Redundant) Power Supply

To be able to access a SLD/T 16 network element’s second power supply configuration
from the remote NCT (for status interrogations or configuration changes), the location
and name of the NE should be entered beforehand, if not done previously, using the pro-
cedure described in 8.2.
<Configuration>,
which opens a submenu.
<Power Supply... >
with the right mouse button.
2. The “NE / Sub Rack Power Supply Config” window is displayed.
3. The only option field is
“Second Power Supply Monitoring”.
This field can be marked (blue-frame) / unmarked (without frame) for supervision
with the state “on / off”.
4. Finish the settings by first pressing the <Apply>, and then the <Close>,
or only the <Close>, button.
8.5 Entering the Persistence Time Configuration

To be able to access a SLD/T 16 network element’s persistency time configuration from
the remote NCT (for status interrogations / configuration changes), the location and the
name of the NE should be entered, if not done previously, using the procedure de-
scribed in 8.2.
<Configuration>,
which opens a submenu.
<Persistence Time ... >
2. The “Persistence Time Config” window is displayed containing two option fields.
3. In the 1st field:
“Raise Time [1 ... 30s]”,
use the flippable switch buttons (up / down arrow) to set the raise-time interval in
seconds.
4. In the 2nd field:
“Clear Time [1 ... 30s]”,
use the flippable switch buttons (up / down arrow) to set the clear-time interval in
seconds.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 159
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.6 Entering the Bw7R Configuration

To be able to access a SLD/T 16 network element Bw7R configuration from the remote
NCT (for status interrogations or configuration changes), the location and name of the
NE should be entered beforehand, using the procedure described in 8.2.
<Bw7R ... > with the right mouse button.
2. The window “Bw7R Config” is displayed.
3. In the 1st folder:
“Communication Alarms”.
All the communications related alarms can be masked “on / off”.
4. In the 2nd folder:
“Equipment Alarms”.
All the equipment based alarms can be masked “on / off”.
5. In both folders, “Communication Alarms” and “Equipment Alarms”,
on highlighting an item from the lists with the right mouse button,
a 2-item menu is available with:
 and <Central Alarm Panel>.
6. “Sub Rack Alarm Panel” allows the settings:
“a”(default), “b”, or “no”,
which can be selected with the left mouse button.
7. “Central Alarm Panel” allows the settings:
“zaa”(default), “zab”, or “no”,
which can be selected with the left mouse button.
8.7 Entering the MAC Address of the NE Device

The default address of the NE has to be changed according to the net planning data for
datalink (layer 2), medium access (sub layer 2a / MAC-Address) of the ISO/OSI Network
Reference Model, using the corresponding LCT/NCT functions.
For details (see 8.12) Message Communication Functions (MCF).
1. Click on the “SCU” module box with the right mouse button.
2. Select from it the menu the item:
<Configuration> and from the displayed submenu the item:
<MCF>.
3. The “MCF+” function is displayed.
4. In the “Message Communications Functions” window opened
mark the “Ethernet” symbol box and click to select
<Configuration...> with the right mouse button on the 2-item menu shown.
5. In the “MCF Ethernet-Link-Config” window opened,
enter under the “Configuration” area the proposed MAC Ethernet Address of the
NE device (subrack) in the so named field.
6. Finish the settings by pressing the <Apply> or <Update>
and then the <Close> button.
160 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.8 Activating the NE

In order to bring the connection between the controller (SCU) and the other modules of
the network element “Online”, the NE status must be changed from “Idle” to “Active”:
1. In the <NE State> menu bar, select <Set to Active>.
2. A new online start-up procedure then begins.
8.8.1 The NE States

To switch the connection between the controller (SCU) and the other modules of the
SLD/T 16 network element, the NE status must be changed from “Idle” to “Active”.
In the menu bar,
select the item: “NE State”,
which shows a menu with 2 areas, each area having a menu with 2 items, one of which
is highlighted, and the other is greyed out.
In the initial state:
1. The first area has the items:
Set to Idle (grey).
Set to Active (highlighted).
2. The second area has the items:
Set to Maintenance (grey).
Set to Operation (highlighted).
After having made all relevant card settings, select the “NE State” from the menu bar
which will show the menu described above.
From the first area of the “NE State” menu, select the highlighted item:
<Set to Active>.
This will switch the NE from “Idle” to “Active” state (mode),
in case the second area items are in the initial state.
The “Maintenance State (Mode)” is for special purposes.
8.8.1.1 The Idle State

The idle state (mode) of the NE is a (working) condition into which the NE is switched
automatically due to an inconsistency in its internal database or being forced into by the
operator. In this state (mode) the user can do a preliminary set-up (dry configuration)
without yet having any real NE hardware. It is also possible to do this with having the
real NE hardware.
For change or replacement of the SCU module, the NE is to be switched into the “Idle”
state (mode).
The operational states (modes) of all cards are frozen in the “Idle” state.
i
8.8.1.2 The Active State

The active state (mode) of the NE is a working condition in which the user can perform
a set-up, or on existing NE hardware performing initial hardware-settings directly.
The operational states (modes) of all cards are updated during NE activation from “Idle”
i to “Active”. The “Active” state is the normal operational state of the NE.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 161
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.8.1.3 The Maintenance State

The maintenance state (mode) of the NE is a working condition in which the user can
also perform a preliminary set-up on an existing NE hardware, in which case all newly
occurring alarm and threshold changes are suppressed.
All spontaneous alarm notifications and threshold crossing notifications are suppressed.
i
8.8.1.4 The Operation State

The operational state (mode) of the NE is a working condition in which the user can
make changes in the hardware set-up, for leading and guiding traffic with all changes
taking effect immediately, on the existing NE hardware.
The operational state (mode) indicates that the NE is in operation and able to perform
i its functions. All alarms and configuration changes are active and displayed on the spot.
8.8.2 The Config DB Management

To switch the connection between the controller (SCU) and the other modules of the
SLD/T 16 network element, the NE status must be changed from “Idle” to “Active”.
1. In the view, click the “NE / Sub Rack ....” symbol box with the right mouse button,
and, from the menu displayed, select the item: <Config DB Management>.
2. The “Config DB Management” window is visible.
It contains the field: “NE State”,
and the area:
“Active Config DB”, with the fields:
“Configuration ID”, and “Config DB Action”.
In addition, there are <Upload> and <Download> buttons.
3. In the non-active state, the field: “NE State” shows “Idle”,
which is set to “Active” with the flip and scroll arrow of the field.
4. The available options in the “Config DB Action” field are now:
“No”,
“Set to Default Config DB”,
or
“Set to Previous Config DB”.
5. For the first time, as an initial value, choose one of the following:
“Set to Default Config DB”,
or
“Set to Previous Config DB”,
or in case of no activation,
set to “No” with the aid of the flip and scroll arrow of the field.
6. Finish the settings by first pressing the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
7. A new online start-up procedure now begins if the NE is activated.
8. To download data from the hierarchically higher level Operating Center, proceed as
described above points 1 to 5,
and then press the <Download> button.
Otherwise, if a locally created database is to be transferred to the higher level Oper-
ating Center, press the <Upload> button and proceed with point 6 of the task list.
For details (see 8.16.2).
162 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.8.3 The Software Management

1. In the view, click the “NE / Sub Rack ....” symbol box with the right mouse button,
and, from the menu displayed,
select the item: <Software Management>.
2. The “Software Management” window is visible.
It contains the area:
“Active APS”,
and the area:
“Inactive APS”,
with the windows:
“Compatibility”, and “Download”.
In addition, there are <Upload> and <Download> buttons.
For details (see 8.16.1).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 163
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.9 Enter the SLD/T 16 Network Element

Additional Equipping (Limited Equipping)
On first operation, if an optional OHA module, supported by a TIF interface, or both,
are equipped, the supervision is with the TIF interface. Otherwise, without an OHA-mod-
ule, the optional supervisioring is by the SCU.
1. With the right mouse button, mark the Slot Number symbol box: 401,
and from the menu displayed select the item: <OHA>.
2. The module symbol box label changes from “Empty” to “OHA”.
3. With the right mouse button, click in the module symbol box.
A menu appears.
Choose <Configuration>,
and in the following sub menu select the item:
<OH Interfaces ... >.
4. The “OH Interfaces“ window is displayed containing 3 areas:
“Channel 1”,
“Channel 2”, and
“Two Wire Handset”,
plus an <Apply> and a <Close> button.
5. Mark the box: “Channel 1“, with the left mouse button.
6. With the right mouse button,
select the item: <Enable TIF>.
7. The “Channel 1” label changes from the initial “G703” to the “TIF” label.
8. Next click on the “TIF” label in the box and select the item:
<Configuration>.
9. In the now opened “TIF #1 Config” window,
use the “Sensors” box on the right
to change the Polarity of Line 1 and Line 2
from the default value “Close” to the opposite “Open”.
10. Close the “TIF #1 Config” window
by pressing the <Apply> button and then the <Close> button.
11. Switch A2 (CH1...8) (see Tab. 5.2) of the unit “TIF module” in the TIF module,
located in the sub rack’s Terminal Panel,
must be set to “ON” by hand (see 5.2.2).
12. Close the “OH Interfaces” window
13. Continue by configuring “Channel 2” (if used) following the same procedure, but
marking instead of the “Channel 1” the other “Channel 2” at point 5.
8.9.1 Configuring the OHA Limited Interfaces

Configuring is performed with the aid of the “OH Interfaces” window.
After making the appropriate entries described in the below sub chapters
first press the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
8.9.1.1 Configuring the G703 #1 Channel

In the “OH Interfaces” window,
click on the “G703#1” functional symbol box with the right mouse button.
Make the appropriate inputs.
164 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.9.1.2 Configuring the G703 #2 Channel

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 165
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.10 Entering the SLD/T16 Network Element

Additional Equipping (Full Equipping)
On first operation, if an optional OHA module, supported by a TIF interface, or both,
are equipped, the supervision is with the TIF interface. Otherwise, without an OHA-mod-
ule, the optional supervisioring is by the SCU.
1. With the right mouse button, mark the desired and equipped Slot Number symbol
box:
405, or 407, or 501,
and from the menu displayed select the item: <OHA>.
2. The module symbol box label changes from “Empty” to “OHA”.
3. With the right mouse button, click in the module symbol box.
A menu appears.
Choose <Configuration>,
and in the following sub menu
select the item:
<OH Interfaces ... >.
4. The “OH Interfaces“ window is displayed containing 3 areas:
“Channel 1”,
“Channel 2” and
“Two Wire Handset”,
plus an <Apply> and a <Close> button.
5. Mark the box: “Channel 1“, with the left mouse button.
6. With the right mouse button,
select the item: <Enable TIF>.
7. The “Channel 1” label changes from the initial “G703”, to the “TIF” label.
8. Next click on the “TIF” label in the box and select the item:
<Configuration>.
9. In the now opened “TIF #1 Config” window,
use the “Sensors” box on the right
to change the Polarity of Line 1 and Line 2
from the default value “Close” to the opposite “Open”.
10. Close the “TIF #1 Config” window
11. Switch A2 (CH1...8) (see Tab. 5.2) of the unit “TIF module” in the TIF moule,
located in the sub rack’s Terminal Panel,
must be set to “ON” by hand (see 5.2.2).
12. Close the “OH interfaces” window
by pressing the <Apply> button.
13. Repeat the procedure if neccessary for the other two OHA modules starting with
item (see 1.) of this set-up.
14. Now press the <Close> button.
15. Continue by configuring the “Channel 2” (if used) following the same procedure,
but marking instead of the “Channel 1” the other “Channel 2” at point 5.
8.10.1 Configuring OHA Interfaces

Configuring is performed with the aid of the “OH Interfaces” window.
After making the appropriate entries described in the below sub chapters
first press the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
166 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.10.1.1 Configuring a G703 #n Channels

8.10.1.2 Configuring a TIF #n Channels

click on the “TIF#2” functional symbol box with the right mouse button.
8.10.1.3 Configuring a PBX Channel

click on the “PBX” functional symbol box with the right mouse button.
8.10.1.4 Configuring the Two Wire Handset

In the “OH Interfaces” window, in the “Two Wire Handset” area,
in the 3 “Telephone Number” fields,
enter the digits for the numbers, using the flip arrows (spin edits 0 ... 9).
8.10.1.5 Configuring the Four Wire E&M #1

In the “OH Interfaces” window, in the “Four Wire E&M #1” area,
in the “Connected Conference” field,
enter the values for the combo box.
(Entry possibilities: “EOW Conf # n” [n=1,2 (-> n=1)] or “None”).
8.10.1.6 Configuring the Four Wire E&M #2

In the “OH Interfaces” window, in the “Four Wire E&M #2” area,
in the “Connected Conference” field,
enter the values for the combo box.
(Entry possibilities: “EOW Conf # n” [n=1,2 (-> n=2)] or “None”).
8.11 Set the Date and the Time

The date and time are controlled by the internal clock of the operating system. The net-
work element can be configured with an offset (in relation to GMT).
In the “Module View” window,
select the “NE / Sub Rack” symbol box,
and from the context menu displayed select the item:
<Configuration>.
1. Now mark the 2nd level menu item:
“NE Time” with the right mouse button.
2. Perform the setting in the “Date / Time Configuration” window opened.
3. Confirm with <Apply> and <Close> button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 167
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.12 Set the Message Communications Functions (MCF)

The settings for the MCF parameters for the network elements are specified according
to the Network Planning Department. In the event of doubt, the default values should be
retained.
Some different addresses and interface types should be entered as the minimum setting
from network element to network element to establish normal operation for the NE in a
telecommunication management network (TMN).
When operating with network elements from other manufacturers (e.g. GPT) the value
i for the “Maximal Number of Areas” for these elements (if configured)
must be set to “3”.
Relations between ISO/OSI Layer Model, Sublayers and Protocols

The ISO/OSI Layers Model is a useful help for understanding the networking and the IP
tunneling.
Basically some relations of common networking (GAN, WAN, MAN and LAN) are nec-
cessary to keep in mind for installation of management and control using the LAN for the
SL16 Network Elements to get access to each NE.
Application and
Application Layer Presentation
Layer
Presentation Layer (for example:
Telnet, FTP, SMTP)
Session Layer
TCP Layer
Internet
Transport Layer
Layer (3c)
Enhancement IP Layer
OSI Network Layer
Layer (3b) (OSI-Network Layer)
Network Layer Subnetwork Access

Layer (3a)
Data Link Layer Logical Link Control Ethernet or X.25

Layer (2b) Protocol Layer
Physical Layer Medium Access

Layer (2a)
ISO/OSI Layer Model Sublayers Model Protocol Layer Model
Fig. 8.1 Relations of Extended ISO/OSI Layer Model,

Sublayers and Former (DoD) Protocol Layers
168 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Common Network Addresses for Use with IPv4

According to international standards (based on IPv4) the IP address space (32 Bit ad-
dresses) being used are devided in class A until class E.
• A class networks uses the IP node address space (first octet [8 bits] identify the
network [127 of them]):
0.0.0.0 until 127.255.255.255 (valid address space)
• B class networks uses the IP node address space (first two octets [16 bits] identify
the network [16 025 of them]):
• C class networks uses the IP node address space (first three octets [24 bits] iden-
tify the network with the bits left identify the host computers):
• D class networks uses the IP node address space:
HOST GROUPADDRESSES and FOR MULTICAST PURPOSE
• E class networks uses the IP node address space:
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE and TEST PURPOSES.
The above address spaces are the valid address space and are restricted by the al-
lowed address spaces. Refer to RFC 950, RFC 1112, RFC 1122, RFC 1517 and RFC
1700. The last one gives information about the current used and occupied address
spaces and also the port numbers for the registered protocols by a link to IANA informa-
tion service in the Internet.
According to RFC 1112 some of the Multicast Addresses are predefined for special use
as for example the Network Time Protocol (NTP) by the IP-Address 224.0.1.1.
The addresses 0.0.0.0 (Backbone Access) and 255.255.255.255 (Broadcasting All) as
well as all 127.x.x.x (Tests by local Loop and should never be seen on the net) shall not
be used, because they are reserved for special services and test purposes.
Common Network Address for Use with IPv6

This is intendent for future Networks and uses a 128 Bits address for the single net-
works. It is not prepared and used in current.
Subnetting
To accomodate multiple physical networks that may be operated by the same organiza-
tion, the concept of a subnet was developed. The interconnected physical networks
within an organization use the same network prefix but the host address in this case has
two parts, a subnet prefix and a host address. The use of subnets effectively reduces
the number of host addresses associated with each network address.
Without Classless Inter Domain Routing (CIDR) according to RFC 1517 a subnet mask
(or prefix length number) must be used to identify the network and its subnetworks. For
example, the subnet mask associated with a Class C address as IP address for a net-
work with no subnets would be an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all
hosts bits set to 0 (255.255.255.0).
But SIEMENS equipment uses Classless Inter Domain Routing (CIDR) according to
RFC 1517 and has no such restrictions dependent of the address class.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 169
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
General Access from and to a Subnet

This type of access is common using a host or n-hosts to communicate on the internet
network ways in an area. The host has an address in the range of private network ad-
dresses (IPv4) and the clients are members on the LAN subnet having the same prefix
address (first three address blocks) as the host for access from outside. This gives a
maximum of 255 members addressable on the subnet.The amount of useable client
member addresses are 255 minus n- host or -servers and minus addresses for special
purpose.
General ISO/OSI Access from and to Subnets

using different Layer 1 and 2 Protocols
Beside the commonly used addresses in any of the hosts or servers special addresses
are used to do a gatewaying, normally over the same physical routes, to communicate
with hosts, servers and members using any possible route from and to a GAN, MAN or
WAN network, which are using different layer 1 and 2 data packets, to access different
systems as members on LANs outside belonging to the same telecommunication pro-
viders TMN. This is done by using the IP tunneling. A special TCP/IP protocol, the OSI
stack, based on the industrial standard Marben-Stack in a SIEMENS communications
equipment adaption for Q3/CMIP, is implemented and operated in parallel to the com-
munication stack function for LAN access of the normal Windows NT/Windows 2000 op-
erating system.
Ethernet-LAN and TCP/IP Connection

If access via an Ethernet-LAN (Standards see TED) to the network element has to be
available using the Q-B3 interface, the address and the interface type should be entered
beforehand.
ISO/OSI Pseudo-LAN Connection

If a connection to an ISO/OSI-Network has to be to establish it needs its own network
address, separately from the Ethernet one. It works “hybrid” like a Pseudo-LAN connec-
tion (Pseudo Network Interface NIF).
OSI Stack
This software includes all basic functions to establish router and gateway functions on
the used Q3-type LAN. The relations of the so called OSI Stack on the OSI Layers and
the Transport and User Services are displayed in Fig. 8.2.
170 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 8.2 Relations of the OSI Stack and the Transport and User Services
IP Tunneling
It needs an adapter, a pseudo network interface and two different NSAP addresses.
The IP to OSI (IP2OSI) adapter provides the possibility of interconnecting the different
DCN networking technologies TCP/IP and ISO/OSI. It makes it possible to tunnel IP traf-
fic through an ISO/OSI domain to the respective destination IP subnet. For this purpose
it uses the ISO/OSI routing principles. So the IP to OSI (IP2OSI) adapter is an applica-
tion which is running at network elements representing crossings between IP and
ISO/OSI networks, called IP to OSI (IP2OSI) gateways. It works at network layer level.
This is done by using the IP tunneling, known in standards discussions as the so called
“Voluntary Tunnel Type”, with a special TCP/IP protocol for it as special encapsulation
protocol. The OSI-Stack and the normal communication stack of the Windows NT/ Win-
dows 2000 operating system are working in parallel (Dual-Stack Operation).
It works in such a way by assemble and re-assamble packet sizes of the source network
LAN packet size to that of the destination LAN packet size containing the original infor-
mation only divided or chained in that packet size the destination node controller can re-
ceive or the source node controller also can receive working in both directions of the
TMN transmission network.
Gateway-Functions (ISO/OSI -> IP and IP ->ISO/OSI)

For IP tunneling the NE works with “gateway” functions. Two different NSAP addresses
must be used for this operation. Both addresses have to be entered getting access from
both sides.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 171
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
TCP IP/OSI Adapter OSI Transport
NSAP with NSAP

selector 33
OSI Network Layer

IP Layer (Static Routing) (Dynamic Routing Multihoming)
Pseudo NIF
IP address
Pseudo
Net Interface Net Interface Ethernet/DCC
Pseudo Driver
(character
Ethernet device driver)
Fig. 8.3 IP2OSI Adapter
Address Spaces Reserved for Private Networks

The following conditions and restrictions are to consider by the operator:
• All IP to ISO/OSI Gateways and Routings have to be in the IS-IS Routing LEVEL 2
and using the implementation of the IGMP Protocol.
• All Pseudo NIF IP addresses have to belong to one IP subnet
(“the IP to ISO/OSI subnet”).
They must be guaranteed to be unique in one ISO/OSI domain.
• According to RFC1597 recommendation the IP addresses for IP to ISO/OSI sub-
net must be in the ranges for private networks (allowed address ranges).
(See also remarks under “Common Network Addresses for Use with IPv4”).
– A class networks uses the IP node address space:
10.0.0.0 until 10.255.255.255 (allowed address space);
– B class networks uses the IP node address space:
172.16.0.0 until 172.31.255.255 (allowed address space);
– C class networks uses the IP node address space:
192.168.0.0 until 192.168.255.255 (allowed address space).
• The static IP routes have to be configured and serviced manually at every IP to
ISO/OSI gateway.
• The configuration of parameters of one IP to ISO/OSI gateway forces the con-
figuration of the whole IP to ISO/OSI tunnel network (all reachable IP to OSI
gateways) because the configuration of the Remote IP to ISO/OSI Gateway Table
are statically.
• The IP to ISO/OSI NSAP is the NSAP of the remote IP to ISO/OSI gateway with
the selector (last byte/word) changed to 0x33.
Tunnel direction IP -> ISO/OSI:

The adapter will be indicated by the Pseudo NIF about an incoming IP packet. After rec-
ognizing the packet size and the NSAP of destination IP to ISO/OSI gateway the adapter
reads the IP packet directly into the data part of a ISO/OSI CLNP PDU having a size of
1492 Bytes. Now the IP packet is encapsulated in a CLNP PDU and labeled with the
172 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
NSAP destination IP to ISO/OSI gateway address as well as the chained handing over
to the CLNS layer using the CLNS service interface.
Tunnel Direction ISO/OSI -> IP:

The adapter receives an ISO/OSI packet from the CLNS service interface and extracts
the IP packet from it. Now the IP packet is handed over to the Pseudo NIF. The Pseudo
NIF has a maximum MTU size of 1005 Bytes (default setting for tunneling). The respon-
sibility for fragmentation has the IP layer. In this way one Ethernet packet fits in an
ISO/OSI CLNP PDU having a size of 1492 Bytes.
The IP tunneling transfer is connection less. The upper layer (TCP or application) are
responsible to ensure the transfer. The regulation of transfer speed of the TCP layer is
given by “sliding window protocol”. So the Pseudo NIF and the adapter will throw the re-
ceived packets if the limit of memory resources is reached.
The need for a future check for the existence of remote IP to ISO/OSI gateways may be
of interest for the installation and the maintenance purposes or for an emulation of IP
multicast/broadcast. As ways to do this the adapter could build and hold a dynamic table
with entries of all currently needed destination gateway NSAPs first of all accessing now
by one of the two checking procedures:
• Periodic ISO/OSI ping
• Periodic verification of existence in the local CLNS database.
For a setup, using the parameters mentioned above, of the IP’s for ISO/OSI Tunneling
(see 8.12.5.1).
Enabling and Disabling Tunneling

The administration state of the IP tunnel Interface can be choose to “Up” or “Down”, this
enables / disables the IP Tunnel feature.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 173
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Scheme of Routing and Tunneling
IP subnet 2
IP subnet 1 134.1.77
128.10.99
OSI IP
PseudoNIF Ethernet
IP OSI NSAP /dev/os0 /dev/et0
Ethernet PseudoNIF 4953349454d75 ... 33 192.168.2.52 134.1.77.3
/dev/et0 /dev/os0 NSAP
128.10.99.1 192.168.2.17 495349454d45 ... 33
OSI domain
pseudo IP subnet
privat 192.168.2
IP OSI
Ethernet PseudoNIF
/dev/et0 /dev/os0 NSAP
132.29.5.7 192.168.2.44 4953349454d95 ... 33
Router
IP subnet 4 IP subnet 3
126.10.5 132.29.5
Fig. 8.4 IP Routing Example through an OSI Domain
Routing Functions
The routing mechanism and the IP tunneling is used from the ISO transport protocol and
The TCP/IP in parallel to allow the communication with ES and IS on different area net-
works, whereas the ISO protocol is the overall protocol and TCP/IP is the basically Layer
3 and 4 protocol.
Two Routing types are possible, the CONS and the CLNS.
CONS is the preferred type for connections over GAN, MAN and WAN access. It uses
a fixed route and fixed addresses.
CLNS is the preferred type for connections over a LAN. It uses virtual routes and virtual
addresses. Virtual is the meaning of not fixed, depending on payload amount or on any
other criterium changing physical or logical addresses of the accessible network or net-
works.
174 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.12.1 Configure the Stack Parameters

Before proceeding, make sure the NE is switched to the active state (see 8.8).
The MAC addresses for the NEs and the LCT/NCT connection (Layer 2 addresses) and
the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) address (Layer 3 addresses) must be defined
beforehand, using a network plan, so that each NE is given a unique address on the lay-
er. Its variable address length is configurable. Within fixed limits it can have any value.
Static IP routing protocol (including ISO/OSI pseudo network LAN interface and IP ->
ISO/OSI adapter for IP tunneling over ISO/OSI) is now possible according to the above
mentioned description. HTTP Service Interface over TCP / IP is now also ready for run.
2. Select from it the menu the item:
<Configuration> and from the displayed submenu the item:
<MCF>.
3. The “MCF+” function is displayed.
4. In the “Message Communication Functions” window, mark the symbol box:
“Stack Parameters”.
5. A 1-item menu is shown, from which the item:
<Configuration...> is to be select.
6. The “MCF Stack Parameters Config“ window is now visible.
7. The window contains 3 areas:
<Layer 4 (Transport)>,
<Layer 3 (NSAP)>,
<Layer 3 (CLNS)>,
as well as the <Apply> and the <Close> buttons.
The <Layer 4 (Transport)> area has 3 fields for entering data:

“Inactivity Time [2 ... 512 s]”(default: 64),
“Maximum No. of Transmissions [3 ... 16]”(default: 3),
“Retransmission Time [250 ... 64.000 ms]”(default: 8000).
The <Layer 3 (NSAP)> area has 3 fields for entering data:
“Area Address”,
“System ID”,
“NSAP Selector [1 ... 255]”.
The <Layer 3 (CLNS)> area has 2 fields for entering data:
“CLNS Maximum Lifetime [1 ... 255]”,
“Routing Principle”.
8. In the “MCF Stack Parameters Config” window:
– Enter the Projected NSAP address (length: 2 to 18 bytes or 36 digits)
in the “Layer3(NSAP) Area Adress” field
(f.e. for SLD16E-2.5: 47 00 99 00 27 60 00 33 00 00 00 00 01),
– Enter the System ID (length: 1 to 6 bytes or 12 digits)
(f. e. for SLD16E-2.5: 08 00 06 08 E6 40), and
– Enter the NSAP selector (0 to 255 / default: 1).
9. Make further settings for the Transport Protocol Transmission (Stack Tuning on
Layer 4) and for the Network Protocol (Routing Principles/Layer 3 (CLNS) as Level
1 IS or Level 2 IS) in accordance with the net planning, and if not predefined, use
default parameters.
10. Finish by first clicking the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 175
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
The Network Element (NE) is now accessible using the Q-B3 interface with the new
NSAP address. This is explained in Chapter 7.2.12.1 which covers entering this new ad-
dress in the NE-UniGATE of the LCT.
8.12.1.1 Ethernet and TCP/IP Stack

The Ethernet is a layer 1 protocol, the IP is a (network) layer 3 protocol and the TCP is
a (transport) layer 4 protocol as well as the TCP/IP Stack is a feature of both the layer 3
and layer 4 protocol. A TCP-Port indicates the different slave ports. The value for a layer
4 T-selector lays between 1 and 32 bytes in Hex or ASCII without dashes and spaces
inbetween.
See Configuration of Ethernet in chapter 8.12.4 and subchapter.
8.12.1.2 ISO/OSI Stack

The ISO/OSI stack is a (network) layer 3 protocol feature.
See Configuration of IP addresses in the chapter 8.12.5 and the subchapters.
See for Configuration of IP addresses also in the chapter 7
and the subchapters 7.2.3 (OSI-Stack), 7.2.11.1 (LAN) and 7.2.11.2 (Serial).
8.12.2 Configuration of the Connection Less Network Service (CLNS)

This feature is relevant in ISO/OSI network layer (Layer 3) connection and used by gate-
way functions like ISO/OSI tunneling over IP.
There is no configuration possible.
Only information and performance is possible.
1. In the “Module View” window:
3. Select the <Configuration> <MCF>” menu items with a mouse click.
4. In the “Message Communication Functions” window appearing,
mark the symbol box: “CLNS”.
5. A 2-item menu is shown, from which the item:
<Information ...> and
<Performance ...> can be selected.
6. The “Information“ item selected,
displays the “MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Info” window,
showing the “Adjacenies” and “Destination Systems” link topology.
7. The “Performance” item selected, displays the “MCF - CLNS Perf” window .
8.12.3 Configuring the DCC Channels

15 DCC channels are provided for transmitting management information between the
network elements.
All the accessible addresses of the DCC interface are shown in a selection list.
3. Click to mark the “DCC” symbol box of the required channel and select from the
menu the <Configuration...> item.
176 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
4. In the “DCC - Configuration” window opened,

showing a “DCC list”area,“New DCC Cross-Connection”area with a “Port” field
as subwindow list screen beside “Action”, “Apply” and “Close” buttons.
Check the accessible and from the network management authorities given the pro-
posed DCC connection addresses.
5. Select the appropriate Channel #nn from the list highlighting the appropriate column.
6. A 2-item menu with <Configuration> and <Performance> items is shown.
7. Selecting <Configuration> item which displays the “MCF - DCC #n - Config” win-
dow in which the areas “Reachable Adresses” and “Configuration Area” are
available.
8. Choose now at the “New DCC Cross-Connection” window the DCCM or DCCR
and the subordinated Port of the appropriate card (OISnn or EIPS1nn).
9. Mark the “Action” field for “no” or “connect” and
press the <Add...> or <Modify> button and the <Apply> button.
10. Additional accessible addresses can be entered (see point 11.) using
the <Add...> button and the <Apply> button
or an address can be changed by using the <Modify> button.
11. All the other settings specified by the Planning Department must be defined as
Class 4 (for administrator rights see 7.3.1)
12. In the “MCF DCC-LINK #n-Configuration” window opened,
showing a “Reachable Addresses (Address Prefix) list”,
beside “Add”, “Modify” and “Delete” button and
a “Configuration” area subwindow.
Check the accessible and from the network management the proposed DCC con-
nection addresses.
13. Enter the “External Domain” in the Configuration field (default= no).
14. The ”Interface Type” sub field of the Configuration field is to be entered alternately
in the network line (from network element to network element) by inputting “Net-
work” and “User” values.
15. The “Line Code” in the Configuration field must be changed (from NRZ to NRZI line
code), for example, using mixed operation with network elements of the SDH1 and
SDH2 (using both NRZ/NRZI line code) family network elements.
16. Confirm with <Apply>, <Update> and <Close> button.
8.12.4 Configuring the Ethernet

The Network Service Access Point (NSAP) address must be specified beforehand on
the basis of a network plan so that an individual address is assigned to each NE. The
length of the address can be varied. Within certain limits, its address values can be se-
lected at will.
3. Mark the “Ethernet” symbol.
4. Click in the 2-item menu onto the <Configuration...> item with the right mouse but-
ton to select it.
5. In the window opened, click with the right mouse button to mark the “Transport”
field and select the item:
<Configuration...>.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 177
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
6. In the “MCF Ethernet Linkage - Config” window opened enter:

– The External Domain (yes/no),
– The proposed NSAP address (2 to 18 bytes),
– The length of the System ID (1 to 8 bytes) and
– The MAC Address (0 to 255).
7. Perform additional settings for the Transport Protocol Transmission (stack tuning)
and for the Network Protocol (routing principles) according to the Planning Depart-
ments pre given values.
8. Confirm with <Apply>, <Update> and <Close> button.
Using the Q-B3 interface, the network element is now only accessible via the new NSAP
address. To do this, the new address must be entered in the NE-UniGATE of the LCT,
as described in Chapter 7.2.12.1.
8.12.4.1 Configuration of the Ethernet Channels

All the accessible addresses of the Ethernet interface are displayed in a selection list.
Slave addresses (addresses of the NEs) should be entered first on a setup procedure.
See 8.12.1, point 1. and 2.
3. Click to mark the “Ethernet” symbol and select
<Configuration...>
4. In the “MCF ETH-LINK-Config” window opened,
check the proposed Ethernet connection address and the Sub Net point of attach-
ment address.
5. Additional accessible addresses can be entered using
the <Add...> button and the <Apply> button
or an address can be changed by marking it using the <Modify> button or
being removed using the <Delete> button.
6. Enter the “External Domain” in the Configuration field (default = false)
7. Define other settings specified by the Planning Department
8. Check the MAC Ethernet Address (see 8.7)
8.12.5 Configuration of the IP

Configuring is performed in accordance with the net planning proposals and with the aid
of the “Message Communications Functions” window.
After making the appropriate entries, described in the below sub chapters,
press the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
8.12.5.1 Configuration of the IP Addresses

Configuring is performed with the net planning forecasts related to the class of network
used in accordance to the RFC1597 standards, and settings of IP addresses (Layer 3)
are made with the aid of
the “Message Communications Functions” window,
using the “IP Configuration” area and selecting the “IP Address” field and click onto
178 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
<Configuration> of the 1-item menu,

which displays the “MCF IP Address Config” window.
The “MCF IP Address Config” window is sub divided into two areas:
“Ethernet Network Interface” and
“IP Tunneling Network”,
both having the fields:
“IP Address”, “IP Net Mask”, “If Admin State”, “If Descriptor”
and a <Statistic> button.
The “IP Address” is the external IP address of the Network Element.
The “IP Net Mask” determine the subnet of the IP Tunneling Network.
With the “If Admin State” field the directions of the interfacing connections are setable.
For the OSI Interface the interface direction can be choose to “Up” or “Down” and only
for Ethernet it is fixed to “Up” which enables the IP interface.
With the “If Descriptor” the external IP address of the interface is enabled with the “In-
terface Up” flag and it enables the IP Tunneling.
The IP Address of the Tunneling Network must be in the private IP address range. For
the different possible Network classes A, B, and C the address ranges are mentioned
under “Address Spaces Reserved for Private Networks” at the beginning of this
chapter, which is according to RFC 1597.
Depending on the LAN net level (mainnet or subnet) of the NE node the entries and set-
tings are to be performed. The IP address for the Ethernet Network Interface (et0) is the
external IP address of the Network Element.
After making the appropriate entries,
press the <Apply> and then the <Close> button.
8.12.5.2 Configuration of the IP Gateway

Configuring is performed in accordance with the net planning and with the aid of
using its “IP Configuration” area, selecting the “IP Gateway” field and click onto
which displays the “MCF IP Gateway Config” window with the two columns:
“IP Address” and “OSI NSAP”.
The entry of one remote gateway consists of the tunneling IP address (os0) and the OSI
NSAP of the remote gateway NE. All remote gateways must belong to one IP subnet
from the point of view of the IP network.
press the <Add>, or the <Modify>, or the <Delete>, and then the <Close> button.
The NSAP is the real NSAP of the remote NE but with the different Selector 33.
i (The Selector is the last byte of the NSAP configuration string.)
8.12.5.3 Configuration of the IP Routing

Configuring is performed in accordance with the net planning and with the aid of
using its “IP Configuration” area, selecting the “IP Routing” field and click onto
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 179
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
which displays the “MCF IP Routing Config” window with the two columns:
“IP Address”, “Net Mask”, “Gateway IP Address” and “IP Route Type”.
Entries to this window must be coordinated with the net planning department.
The Net Mask is corresponding to a destination IP address. The Gateway IP address is
the address (os0) of the remote Network Element. All Network Elements must be in the
same subnet (os0) being members of the subnet.
The “Gateway Flag” has the default setting for “indirect route”, meaning to be member
of the Local Network (LAN) or to be the End System (ES) of a point to point connection.
The “Host Flag” is not set by default, meaning to be member of the Local Network
(LAN) and the subnet is addressed.
press the <Apply>, or the <Modify>, or the <Delete>, and then the <Close> button.
8.12.6 Transport Connections 1 ... 6

There is no configuration possible.
Only information and performance for transport connection 1 to 6 is possible.
Clicking on the menu item: <Information> displays the “MCF Transport Connection
#n Info” window showing the “Remote NSAP Address”, “Remote T Selector”, “Local
T Selector” and “Connection Type (Incoming/Outgoing)” link topology.
180 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.13 Setting the Synchronization for

the Synchronous Equipment Clocks (SEC)
Up to six external timing sources can be used as input signals to the Synchronous
Equipment Clock (SEC) (see TED). Following an evaluation on the basis of the Priority
List, one of them is used for the internal synchronization clock T0 (synchronization of the
network element). If no suitable external timing source is available, T0 is automatically
synchronized with the internal oscillator. Clock output T4 is then switched off.
For commissioning, installation and testing the system, either the external reference
clock T3 (if available) should be selected as the timing source or T0 must be synchro-
nized with the optical input signal.
If measurements have to be carried out on the system, use the highest quality clock
i available as standard reference, or the one with the best quality which is relevant for the
measurements.
8.13.1 Selecting the Reference Clock for T0

Clock T0, which is used to supply the network element, can be permanently set so that
it is derived from one of the T3 clocks (from an external source) or the T1 clocks (from
a traffic signal).
The best timing source in terms of quality can be selected automatically by the CLL mod-
ule (Auto Reversible) or can be configured in “Free Running Mode” (without reference
clock).
1. Choose the “CLL” symbol, starting with the working module, and click with the right
mouse button to select the module menu.
2. Click on the T0 symbol with the right mouse button going ahead with
<Configuration...> <SEC ... >.
3. The “Requested Timing Source for T0” window displayed
specify the required timing source.
4. The “Minimum Quality Level For T0” selects the minimum required quality level
for T0 below which a T0 quality alarm is triggered.
5. Press the <Apply> button
to transfer the set values to the network element database.
6. If a CLL (be sure it is the same module type: CLL by CLL and CLL64-2 by CLL64-2)
protection module is there again do the same settings for it, repeating steps 1 until
5 and last proceed with the next step 7.
7. Close the setting with the <Close> button.
8.13.2 Define the Priorities of the Reference Clocks T0 and T4

The reference clock currently in use is displayed in the window (see 8.8.1, point 3.) by
the “Forced” arrow from T0 to one of the possible timing sources T1(1), T1(2),... T3(1),
T3(2) and by the “Free Running” or “Hold Over” field.
If T0 has been set to “Auto Revertive”, the CLL module selects the available timing
source starting with the highest priority timing source in the sequence 1-2-3-... and, in
the event of a fault, automatically changes over to the timing source with the next prior-
ity.
The priorities must be specified on the basis of the relevant clock quality:
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 181
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
In the ”Module View” window:

1. Choose the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select it
.
2. Click on the reference clock symbol T1(1) with the right mouse button going ahead
setting the priority level.
4. Finish the setting by pressing the <Close> button.
8.13.2.1 The Reference Clocks for T0

Clock T0, which is used for supplying the network element, can be set so that it will be
permanently derived from one of the clocks T3 (external), or T2 (external from a port),
or T1 (from a STM-n or Port traffic signal).
The best quality clock source can be selected automatically with “AutoRevertive” fea-
ture, or may be configured in the “Free Running Mode” (without reference clock).
The Reference Clocks for T0 are set able,
using the “SEC T0 Config” window by its “Configure T0 Reference” settings.
1. Choose the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select it.
2. Click on the reference clock symbol T0 with the right mouse button going ahead
setting the reference clock.
8.13.2.2 The Reference Clocks for T4

The Reference Clocks for T0 are set able,
using the “SEC T4 Config” window by its “Configure T4 Reference” settings.
1. Choose the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select it.
2. Click on the reference clock symbol T4 with the right mouse button going ahead
setting the priority level.
8.13.3 Define the Traffic Signal for T1 Reference Signals

The four possible T1 reference signals can be derived from the traffic or tributary sig-
nals at the ports of the OIS1/4/16 and EIPS1 modules.
In a linear MSP-Scheme see the information given in Chapter 8.15 to perform the ap-
propriate set-up.
Configuration is started from the ”Module View” window:
1. In the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select it.
2. On the T1 symbol and click the mouse button to select:
<Configuration...>.
182 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
3. In the “T1 Timing References” field,

in sequence from T1(1) to T1(4)
select the port of the module
whose SDH signal is to be selected as the clock reference.
4. Click on the <Apply> button to transfer the set values to the network element.
5. In the lower part of the window it is possible to read out the received
“Timing Marker SSM” (Synchronous Status Message)
for each of the selected reference clocks.
6. Close the setting with <Close> button.
8.13.4 Define a Timing Marker (SSM) for the T3 Clock Signal

For the reference timing sources T3(1) and T3(2),
the quality level must be specified by selecting a timing marker,
which is then used by the network element in the outgoing STM-1 signals.
This is necessary because the T3 clock
(e.g. from the NFR2001 normal frequency device),
as a normal 2.048 MHz clock, does not have its own SSM.
Configuration is started from the ”Module View” window:
1. In the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select.
2. On the T3 symbol and click with the right mouse button to select:
<Configuration...>.
3. In the window displayed, select one of the two “Timing Marker SSM”.
4. Click on the <Apply> button to transfer the set values to the network element.
5. Close the setting with <Close> button.
8.13.5 Selecting the Reference Timing Source for T4 Clock Signal

If necessary, with T4 as the reference signal the network element can supply other net-
work elements with a reference clock.
In this case, T4 must be re configured as described in Chapter 8.8.1 (T4 instead of T0):
1. Select a reference source: “T1(1)” to “T1(4)” or “T0” or “Auto Revertive”.
2. In the case of
“Auto Revertive”,
reset the priority levels for all possible reference sources again.
3. Specify the priorities (see 8.8.2).
8.13.6 Synchronizing T3 by 2 Mbit/s Signal Using CLA

Clock T3 can be synchronized using an external Clock Line Adapter (CLA) located in
the Rack Terminal Panel. For this purpose a CLL64-2 module must be inserted in the
slot(s) 414(415) for SLD/T16 and 416 (417) for SLD/T16E
Settings of Sa-Bits are recommended.
Use selector switches A2, A4 and A6 on the CLA box for the appropriate channel.
Settings are done with the aid of the procedure mentioned in 5.2.1.
If CLL is stated, it can be an equipped CLL or CLL64-2.
! Use of CLA must have the existence of a CLL64-2 module.
If questioned, use the Card Label for evaluation.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 183
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.13.7 Configure the Wait to Restore Time

for the Synchronization of the Equipment Clock
The SEC will only revert to the higher-priority reference source after the “Wait-to-Re-
store Time” has been set; this is designed to avoid excessively frequent switching in
the event of a clock failure.
1. In the “CLL” symbol and click with the right mouse button to select:
 .
2. In the lower part of the window displayed
select the “Wait-to-Restore Time”.
3. Click on the <Apply> button to transfer the set values to the network element data-
base.
4. Close the setting by using the <Close> button.
8.13.8 Conversion Tables for SONET / SDH Signals

For the receive and transmit directions, the following non-european standards of the
SONET SDH conversion tables are used:
SONET Concatenations:
• STS-12/3c,
• STS-12/12c,
• STS-48/3c,
• STS-48/12c,
• STS-48/48c.
For configuration of SONET Mode (see 8.15.12).
In the SONET Mode, for the SSM received, only the labels “00” (quality unknown) and
i “11” (DNU) are supported and all others should be displayed as empty.
184 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.14 The SLD/T16 Network Element Types
8.14.1 Create SLD/T16 Network Element Types

As described in the chapter 5.3 for the hardware configuration, in the chapter 9 viewed
as schematics, the user has at last to do the software configuration for the hardware.
Using the aid of the LCT, and according to the Net Topology, first start with the config-
uration of the line interfaces to get access and communication to the higher level ope-
rating centers to get from there a support too.
In a STM-16 line terminal the configuration is done (see 8.14.2).
In a simple STM-16 line ring (BSHR/2) the configuration is done (see 8.14.2).
In a double (secure) STM-16 line ring (BSHR/4) the configuration is done (see 8.14.2).
In a tributary STM-16 / STM-4 terminal the configuration is done (see 8.14.3).
In a simple tributary STM-16 ring (BSHR/2) the configuration is done (see 8.14.3).
8.14.1.1 Synchronous Line Device SLD16

As described in chapter 5.3 for the hardware configuration and in the chapters 9.1.1 and
9.2.1 viewed as schematics, the software configuration is ruled out here.
8.14.1.2 Synchronous Terminal SLT16

8.14.2 Main Network Line Interface

Select “OIS16/OIS16-2 Traffic Flow Window” for the OIS16/OIS16-2 Line Port.
The “OIS16/OIS16-2 <Slot> <Port> (2,5G) Traffic Flow” window appears on the
screen.
Choose “STM-16” Port Symbol Module Box. Perform the appropriate settings.
Repeat, if MSP and (2F / 4F) Ring Structure is used, for each OIS16/OIS16-2 Line Port.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 185
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Fig. 8.5 “Traffic-Flow, Topology and Parameter for 4F-Spring” GUI-Windows

- Optical Interfaces -
As described in chapter 5.3 for the hardware configuration and in chapters 9.1.2, 9.2.2
viewed as schematics, the software configuration is ruled out here.
Select “OIS4/OIS4-2 or OIS1 Traffic Flow Window” for OISnn Tributary Port.
The “OISnn <Slot> <Port> (Bit Rate) Traffic Flow” window appears on the screen.
Choose “STM-nn” Port Symbol Module Box. Perform the appropriate settings.
Repeat, if MSP and (2F) Ring Structure is used, for each OISnn Port.

- Electrical Interfaces -
9.2.2 as schematics, the software configuration is ruled out here.
Select “Traffic Flow Window” for the EIPS1 Tributary Port.
The “EIPS1 <Slot> <Port> (Bit Rate) Traffic Flow” window appears on the screen.
Choose “STM-1” Port Symbol Module Box. Perform the appropriate settings.
186 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.14.5 OH Interfaces
Alarm Setting is performed with the aid of the “OH Interfaces” window.
After making the appropriate entries, described in the below sub chapters,
press the <Apply> and then the <Close> -button.
Function Settings and Changes are disabled for user class 1 users.
i Only Fault and Alarm informations are accessible for those users.
8.14.5.1 TIF Based Interfaces

Alarm Enable / Disable Setting is done with the aid of the “OH Interfaces” window.
8.14.5.2 G703 Based Interfaces

Alarm Enable / Disable Setting is done with the aid of the “OH Interfaces” window.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 187
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15 Entering the Network Element Equipment Configuration
8.15.1 General of Configuring the Different Types of a Network Element

In this Manual, the configuration of a network element is described on the basis of work
with the LCT. It should be pointed out that it is more conveniently to perform this work
with an TNM-OS network management system. However, at the time of the initial com-
missioning, it is assumed that the link to the TNM-OS – if it exists – is not yet operable
(due to a lack of transmission paths for example) and that it is only possible to work with
the local LCT craft terminal.
As an example for initial commissioning (for execution of the subsequent function tests),
the following is to be configured:
– an SLD with MS-BSHR/4 (4F-Spring) protection switching
– an SLD with MS-BSHR/2 (2F-Spring) protection switching,
– an SLT with 1+1 MSP protection switching
– 1+1 MSP protection switching for the OIS16/OIS16-2 or OIS4/OIS4-2 module,
– 1:N Protection Switching for the EIPS1 module.
A NE equipped with four OIS16 modules, the east and west modules do not form a tim-
ing group. It is necessary to ensure that no clock loop is created
(see Chapter 8.8 and 9).
SONET Transport Mode may be done only using an OIS4-2 or OIS16-2 module, setting
its Trail Trace Identifier Options for SONET Mode.
For additional configuration operations (dependent on the equipment configuration), re-
i fer to the OMN:SL.
8.15.2 Begin of Set-Up Procedure by Slot Configuration

Requirement: equipment configuration as described in Chapter 5.4.1.
1. Mark the slot number with the right mouse button and in the menu bar select the
required module type. Optical Modules having submenues for configuration either
as working one, as protecting one or as ring member.
2. Repeat point 1 for all the modules.
3. To select either a 155 or a 140 Mbit/s signal, click with the right mouse button to mark
the corresponding EIPS1 module and select:
<Configuration> <Card...> .
4. In the window for the four tributary signals make the selection.
5. For logging purposes, the “Enable Transfer Of Error Log After Start-Up” can be
marked at each card start-up.
6. Close the window with <Apply> and <Close> button.
7. Individual items of information (128 bytes) about each module can be saved with the
<Configuration> <User Label...> menu.
8. Close window with <Apply> and <Close> button.
9. Repeat points 5 to 8 for all slots.
188 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.3 Configuring the MS-BSHR/4 Ring with Protection Switching and

Flexible Cross-Connection Options
1. Mark the OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol in one of the slots:
405 and 409 / 406 and 411 (SLD16; single row sub rack);
502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, (SLD 16E; double row sub rack) (Val. in brackets).
2. Click with the right mouse button and select on the working module:
<Configuration> <Protection...>.
3. In the window opened select from the “Protection Management” Port List using
“Type” = 4F-SPRING and make active the set configuration by the <Create> button,
(see Fig. 8.5) for setup windows.
4. The entry in the “Exists” field changes from “no” to “yes”.
5. In the Port List additional entries may appear relating to the working slot, the protec-
tion slot or the protection switching status.
6. Close the window by pressing <Close> button.
7. In the “Module View” window, mark one of the “OIS16/OIS16-2” module symbols.
8. In the lower Port List window, mark the “OIS16/OIS16-2” module symbol displayed.
9. Using the right mouse button and select: .
10. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the “4F-SPRING” sym-
bol and select:
<Configuration...>.
11. The protection switching architecture is displayed in the window opened.
12. In the “ ... 4F Spring Config” window’s head area:
“Ring Architecture” (Default: Four Fibre Shared Ring];
“East Working” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_411.1(508.01)],
“East Protecting” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_405.1(503.01)],
“West Working” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_406.1(504.01)],
“West Protecting” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_409.1(507.01)].
13. In the “4F Spring Config” window’s framed area “4F-SPRING CONTROL”:
“Active Ring Section East” [Default = East Working Selected];
“Active Ring Section Working” [Default = West Working Selected],
“Protection Mode” [Default = Revertive],
“Operator Command East” [Default = Clear],
“Operator Command West”[Default = Clear] ,
“Ring Segmentation (Multiple Failure)” [Default = Disabled],
“K1 / K2 protection switching protocol type”
[Default = SharedRing4Fibres ITU G481],
“Availability State” [Default = Locked],
“Wait-to-Restore time (1 to 12 min)” [Default = 5],
“MSP Activation” [Default = De-activated].
14. Node ID Settings East/West are settable with
<Configure Ring Topology> button and enter:
“Number of Nodes”,
“Own Node ID” and
“Node IDs of the ring member nodes”.
16. Finish the process by pressing the <Apply> button and then the <Close> button.
The default settings are also depending on the counterpart of the NE line or tributary.
i
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 189
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.4 Configuring the MS-BSHR/2 Ring with Protection Switching and

Flexible Cross-Connection Options
502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, (SLD 16E; double row sub rack) (Values in brack-
ets).
2. Using the right mouse button and select on the working module:
<Configuration> <Protection...>
3. In the window opened select from the “Protection Management” Port List the
“Type” = 2F-SPRING and make active the set configuration with the <Create> but-
ton, (see Fig. 8.5) for setup windows.
bol and select:
<Configuration...>.
“Ring Architecture” [Default: 2 Fibre Shared Ring];
“East” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_405.1(503.01)], ,
“West” [Default by Slot Setup: OIS16_411.1(508.01)].
“Active Ring Section” [Default = Ring normal];
“Operator Command” [Default = Clear].
[Default = ITU G.481 2F Shared Ring],
<Configure Ring Topology> button.
Enter:
For BSHR/2-extra: West (East) extra traffic is set to contiguous concatenated and East
i (West) interface having FEC switched on.
This would be no problem but is prevented by the new preconditions.
190 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

for Concatenation Connections
1. Mark the dedicated OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol in one of the slots:
2. 405 and 409 / 406 and 411 (SLD16; single row sub rack);
3. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the “OIS16-2”
module symbol and select by double-click: .
4. From the displayed menu select the item: <Configuration>.
5. The “OIS16-2_Slot - Config” window opens.
6. The concatenation settings can be made in the “Concatenation” area of that win-
dow. Settings are possible for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
and #13 ... 16 with first choosing the container bundling and than entering one of the
four concatenation possibilities: “Off”, “Simple Concatenation”, “Contiguous
Concatenation”, and “Virtual Concatenation” into the bundle concatention set-
ting field.
8.15.5.1 Simple Concatenation

6. The concatenation setting is to be made in the “Concatenation” area of that win-
dow. Setting the possiblity for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
and #13 ... 16 to “Simple Concatenation” in the bundle concatention setting field.
8.15.5.2 Contiguous Concatenation

dow. Setting the possiblity for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
and #13 ... 16 to “Contiguous Concatenation” in the bundle concatention setting
field.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 191
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Deeper and Detailed Configuration for VC4-16:

In the “Subview” window:
1. Click with the right mouse button to mark the left symbol box “32xAU4/VC4” and
from the shown menu select:
<Subview>,
which displays the “OIS16-2 Slotnum.nn (2.5G) AU4/VC4 - Selection” window.
2. Click on the “Config Concatened STM16 AU4/VC4 1 ... 16”symbol box.
3. The “OIS16-2_nnn - Reduced VC4-16 v/c Selection” window opens.
4. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 1 .. 16” or the “Concatenat-
ed VC4-4 # 1 .. 16” flag field to “on”.
Deeper and Detailed Configuration for VC4-16 and VC4-4:

1. Click with the right mouse button to mark the left symbol box “8xAU4/VC4” and from
the shown menu select:
<Subview>,
4. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 1 .. 4” or the “Concatenated
VC4-4 # 1 .. 4” flag field to “on”.
8.15.5.3 Virtual Concatenation

dow. Setting the possibility for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
and #13 ... 16 to “Virtual Concatenation” in the bundle concatention setting field.
Virtual Deeper and Detailed Configuration for VC4-16:

1. Click with the right mouse button to mark the left symbol box “32xAU4/VC4” and
from the shown menu select:<Subview>,
4. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 13 .. 16” or the “Concate-
nated VC4-4 # 13 .. 16” flag field to “on”.
192 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

for Concatenation Connections
502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, (SLD 16E; double row sub rack) (Values in brack-
ets).
module symbol and select: .
4. The “OIS16-2_Slot.nn - Config” window opens.
dow. Seetings are possible for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
ting field.
7. In the window opened, click with the right mouse button to mark the left symbol box
“32xAU4/VC4” and select:
“Config Concatened STM16 AU4/VC4 1 ... 16”symbol box.
8. The “OIS16-2_nnn - Config” window opens.
9. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 1 .. 16” or the “Concatenat-
ed VC4-4 # 1 .. 4” flag field to “on”.
12. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 1 .. 4” or the “Concatenated
VC4-4 # 1 .. 4” flag field to “on”.
15. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-16 # 13 .. 16” or the “Concate-
nated VC4-4 # 1 .. 4” flag field to “on”.
8.15.7 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for Concatenation Connections

402 ... 405, and 410 ... 413 (SLD16; single row sub rack);
401 ... 404, and 411 ... 415 (SLD 16E; double row sub rack) (Values in brackets).
Double-Click on it.
3. The “OIS4-2_Slot.nn - Config” window opens.
dow. Seetings are possible for VC4-16 #1 ... 16 or VC4-4 #1 ... 4, #5 ... 8, #9 ... 12,
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 193
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

ting field.
9. In the 4th area set either the “Concatenated VC4-8 # 1 .. 4”
or the “Concatenated VC4-4 # 1 .. 4” flag field to “on”.
8.15.8 Configuring OIS16-2 (4-Fibre) Modules for Squelching

502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, (SLD 16E; double row sub rack).
3. Using the right mouse button and select:
4. In the window opened select from the Port List the “Type” = 2F-SPRING and make
active the set configuration with the <Create> button,
bol and select:
<Configuration...>.
“Extra Traffic West Squelch State” [Default = Extra Traffic Unsquelched],
“Extra Traffic East Squelch State” [Default = Extra Traffic Unsquelched],
194 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

Enter:
8.15.9 Configuring OIS16-2 (2-Fibre) Modules for Squelching

502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, (SLD 16E; double row sub rack).
4. In the window opened select from the Port List the “Type” = 2F-SPRING and make
active the set configuration with the <Create> button,
bol and select:
<Configuration...>.
“Extra Traffic West Squelch State” [Default = Extra Traffic Unsquelched],
“Extra Traffic East Squelch State” [Default = Extra Traffic Unsquelched],
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 195
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Enter:
8.15.10 Configuring OIS16-2 Modules for Squelching

1. Mark the “OIS16-2” module relevant.
3. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the symbol
“16xAU4/VC4+” and select:
<Configuration><AU4/VC4 #n>.
4. The “OIS16-2_nnn.0m (2.4G) - AU4/VC4#n - Config” window opens showing 3
folders:
“AU4/VC4 Misc.”,
“VC4 Trail Trace”, and
“Squelch”.
5. Select the folder “Squelch” having the 3 areas:
“Squelch Supervision”,
“Receive Source Information“ and
“Transmit Destination Information”.
6. Do the appropriate settings.
8.15.11 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for Squelching

3. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the symbol
“4xAU4/VC4+” and select:
<Configuration><AU4/VC4 #n>.
4. The “OIS4-2_nnn.0m (655M) - AU4/VC4#n - Config” window opens showing 3 fold-
ers:
“AU4/VC4 Misc.”,
“VC4 Trail Trace”, and
“Squelch”.
5. Select the folder “Squelch” having the 3 areas:
“Squelch Supervision”,
“Receive Source Information“ and
“Transmit Destination Information”.
6. Do the appropriate settings.
196 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.12 Configuring OIS4-2 Modules for SONET Connections

3. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the symbol “STM4” and
select:
<Configuration><STM4 ...>.
4. In the “RS” field the “Trail Trace Identifier” must be switched on.
5. The “Trail Trace Identifier RS” window with some combo boxes opens.
6. In the first combo box “Transport Mode” the choice is either SDH or SONET.
7. Set Transport Mode for the appropriate Port(s) to SONET.
8. TTI Processing combo box must be set to “no trace expected”.
9. Next the J0C1 Insertion Mode combo box has to be set to the net approvals.
(Default range for J0-Byte, if selected, is 20h to 7Eh and C1-Byte has fixed value).
10. In the combo boxes: “Transmitted”, “Expected” and “Received” checksum-field
“HEX” is removed.
11. Set the SBit Insertion Mode combo box to “00” for SONET operation
[Default value is “10” for SDH operation].
12. FEC switch Tx and Rx is Siemens proprietary procedure and is not useful for oper-
ation with any other foreign partner NE. FEC switches are disabled or ignored by
software since equipment level R2.5.
For a short Information for
i possible Concatenations to SONET STS-Containers (see 8.13.8).

Configuring OHA, OB, OP and Other Interfaces
8.15.13.1 Configuring the Overhead Cross Connection OHCC

1. Select the “OHA” symbol box (the dedicated one of three possible ones in a double-
row subrack) and selct from the menu the item:
<Configuration> and the <OH Cross Connections...> with the right mouse but-
ton.
2. From the “Overhead Cross Connections” window appearing, select the directions
of the cross connect to all path using the “OHCC Type” field.
3. From the “TP Selection” field it is possible to select the special overhead types to
be connected, the slots and the VC4’s by choosing the byte index.
4. Click on the <Apply> button to display the valid cross connections in the lower Port
List field.
5. Cross connections can be formed or removed (“Action” field).
6. The “OHCC Direction” list can be displayed by selecting from a Filter menu.
7. Close with <Close> button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 197
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.13.2 Configuring the Telemetry Interface Channels and

Setting the Telephone Number of the 2-Wire DTMF
Handset and the PBX Interface
1. In the “OH IF+” symbol, select with the right mouse button
2. In the “Overhead Interfaces” window opened,
by clicking with the right mouse button on <Disable TIF> / <Enable TIF>,
both, the selected telemetry channels can be prepared for the external signals from
and to the TIF module and the telephone number of the sub rack telephone can be
set.
3. In the “Channel 1” or “Channel 2” fields,
mark the “TIF” symbol,
and select the item:
<Configuration...> with the right mouse button.
The “TIF#n Config” window opens.
4. Any of eight “Actors” inputs can be set to active or inactive and the polarity of the
eight “Actors” and eight “Sensors” can be selected.
5. With marked “Channel”,
and by clicking with the right mouse button on the item:
<FW EM Interface...>,
the 4-wire telephone interface (E&M interface) can be selected.
6. Close the “TIF#n Config” window opened with <Apply> and <Close> button.
7. When the “TIF” symbol is marked and <Disable TIF...> is selected, the symbol
changes to “G.703”; this means that the channel is accessible via the external G.703
interface (AUX interface) and cannot be used for “TIF”.
8. With either the “TIF” or “G.703” symbol selected,
alarm lists can be displayed by selecting:
<Fault> <Alarms...>.
9. Mark “Pbx Interface” in the field,
and select with the right mouse button the item:
<Configuration...>.
In the following window the PBX number,
the Conference type and the Dialing type is chosen.
10. Close the window with <Apply> and <Close> button.
8.15.13.3 Configuring the Cross Connection of the SNL

1. Mark the “SNL” module symbol box and click with the mouse button on it.
3. With the right mouse button select from it:
<Configuration> and from the submenu select the item:
<Cross Connections...>.
4. In the “Cross Connection” window opened in its large Port List field,
mark “New Cross Connection” as the “CC Type”.
This sets the “Action” field to “Connect”.
5. In the “CC Type” field, select the cross connection type (is graphically displayed in
the lower field)
198 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6. In the “TP Selection” field, under “Port”,

specify the connection points TP A and TP B:
(ModuleType_MountingPosition.Portnumber [140M / 155M]).
7. Under “Index” (active when OIS16/OIS16-2 is selected),
select the required STM1 channel (1 to 16).
8. If path protection switching is set in the “TP B’ ” field,
select:
“Connection Point for Protection Channel”.
9. Confirm each cross connect setting with <Apply> button.
10. The selected cross connects (ports) are listed in the large “Port List” field
11. If “CC Type” is selected in the large Port List field,
the cross connect (“action” field set to “Disconnect”) can be cleared with <Apply>.
12. Close the window with <Close> button.
8.15.13.4 Configuring the Optical Booster / Preamplifier

Configuring the Optical Booster / Preamplifier:
The east and west direction should be configured separately in the “Module View”,
according to whether OB or OP is used:
1. Select the relevant OB / OP module symbol.
2. With the right mouse button, select:
<Configuration> <Connection Reference...>
and open the “OB_n Config” / “OP_n Config” window.
3. In the “Connected To” field,
select the relevant module slot with which the OB / OP is to be connected.
4. Close with <Apply> and <Close> button.
Configuring the Companioned OISnn Module

If an OP module is used, the operating mode of an OIS16/OIS16-2 or an OIS4/OIS4-2
module must be configured accordingly in the “Module View” window:
1. Mark the OIS16/OIS16-2 or the OIS4/OIS4-2 module symbol.
2. In the lower Port List window,
mark the displayed OIS16/OIS16-2 or OIS4/OIS4-2 module symbol.
3. Select with the right mouse button.
4. In the window opened,
click with the right mouse button onto the “STM16” or “STM4” symbol,
and select:
<Configuration> <STM16...> or <Configuration> <STM4...>.
5. In the window opened, under the selection item:
“Optical Receiver Mode” and
select: “Preamplifier mode”.
6. Confirm the setting with <Apply> and <Close> button.
7. <Update> button can be used to acquire up-to-date data from the network element.
Configuring the Optical Booster

In the “Module View”, information about the output power and the laser pump current
of the OB can be obtained as follows:
1. Mark the OB module symbol.
2. In the lower Port List window, mark the displayed OB module symbol.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 199
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

4. In the window opened, in the “OPT-BOOST” field,
click the right mouse button to select:
<Information> <OPT-BOOST...>.
5. The relevant data can be obtained from the window opened.
7. <Update> button can be used to acquire up-to-date data from the network element.

Specifying Additional Features and Functions
8.15.14.1 Specifying the Connector Designations

1. Mark the EIPS1 or OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol.
2. In the lower Port List window, mark either the EIPS1 or OIS16/OIS16-2 module sym-
bol.
4. In the window opened,
click with the right mouse button in the “STM1” or “STM16” field to select:
<Configuration> <Connector Location...> .
5. In the window opened it is then possible to enter the description (40 bytes) of the
physical connection point.
8.15.14.2 Specifying the Trail Trace Identifier

1. Mark either the EIPS1 or OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol.
2. In the lower Port List window mark either the EIPS1 or OIS16/OIS16-2 module sym-
bol.
3. Using the right mouse button and select .
4. In the window opened, click the right mouse button in the “AU4 / VC4#n” field to se-
lect:
<Configuration> <Trail Trace...>.
5. The three TTI types are displayed in the window opened:
– Transmitted
– Expected
– Received
6. If the ASCII string is set, the HEX code is displayed automatically.
7. Mark “all binary zero trace” if no “Cyclic Redundancy Check 7” checksum is to be
calculated.
8. <Apply> button is used to transfer an entered TTI into the network element;
<Update> button is used to call up the actual received value.
200 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.14.3 Specifying the User Label

1. Mark the relevant module symbol.
2. With the right mouse button, select:
<Configuration> <User Label...> .
3. In the window opened, enter an individual description (128 bytes).
4. Confirm the setting with <Apply> and <Close> button.
8.15.15 SLD Synchronous Add / Drop Multiplexer

Monitoring
8.15.15.1 Monitoring the Functions

of the Electrical Signal Path of an EIPS1 Module
1. Mark the “EIPS1” module relevant.
2. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the “EIPS1
Port” symbol and select: .
3. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the “STM1” symbol and
select:
<Configuration> <STM1...>.
4. The “Port Monitoring” option can be selected in the “ES” field.
A synchronous status message (timing marker) is displayed in the “MS” field.
The minimum number of errored blocks (1 to 8000, default = 100) for a bad second
can be selected and then the minimum number of consecutive bad seconds (2 to 10,
default = 5) which should result in a “Signal Degrade Alarm” error message.
The same number of good seconds results in cancellation of the alarm.
6. <Update> button can be used to call up the actual received timing marker.
7. Click the right mouse button to mark the other “AU4 / VC4” window in the Traffic Flow
window and select:
<Configuration> <AU4 / VC4...>.
8. The hold-off time (default = 100 ms) for the path protection switching can be selected
in the “AU4” field.
9. In the “VC4” field:
”Trace Trail Identifier” processing can be switched on or off.
”Remote Defect Indication / Remote Error Indication” can be chosen.
The monitoring mode for the link between “Path Overhead Monitoring”, “Supervi-
sory Unequipped Monitoring” or “disabled” can be selected and
with “Insert Supervisory Unequipped Signal” the “Supervisory Unequipped
Generation” function is switched on.
In addition, the minimum number of errored blocks (1 to 8000, default = 100) for a
bad second can be selected and then the minimum number of consecutive bad sec-
onds (2 to 10, default = 5) which should result in a “Signal Degrade Alarm” error
message. The same number of good seconds results in cancellation of the alarm.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 201
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS16/OIS16-2 Module
1. Select the relevant OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol.
2. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the
OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol and select: .
select:
4. In the “OS” field:
forced and automatic laser “Shutdown” and “Restart” can be set.
The receive path can be selected with or without preamplifier.
The monitoring function can be activated and
the laser start period can be set.
The signal can be used as synchronization source.
Errored blocks (1 to 8000, default = 100) and bad / good seconds (2 to 10, default =
5) can be selected.
In the “RS” field the “Trace Trail Identifier” handling can be switched on / off.
7. Click the right mouse button to mark the other “16xAU4 / VC4” symbol in the Traffic
Flow window and select the item: .
The n-AU4 / VC4-symbols of the working OIS16/OIS16-2 modules are displayed.
8. Mark the individual symbols “AU4 / VC4#n” with the right mouse button and select:
9. For configuration, see c) points 8 and 9.

of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS4/OIS4-2 Module
Monitoring Settings:
2. Select the relevant OIS4/OIS4-2 module symbol.
3. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the OIS4/OIS4-
2 module symbol and select: .
select:
A synchronous status message (timing marker) is displayed in the “MS” field;
signal can be used as synchronization source.
5) can be selected.
202 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

8. Click the right mouse button to mark the other “nxAU4 / VC4” symbol in the Traffic
Flow window and select the item: ,
the n-AU4 / VC4-symbols of the working OIS4/OIS4-2 modules are displayed.

of the Optical Signal Path of an OIS1 Module
2. Select the relevant OIS1 module symbol.
3. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the “OIS1”
module symbol and select:
.
select:
A synchronous status message (timing marker) is displayed in the “MS” field;
signal can be used as synchronization source.
5) can be selected.
8. Click the right mouse button to mark the other “AU4 / VC4” symbol in the Traffic Flow
window and select the item: ,
the n-AU4 / VC4-symbols of the working OIS1 modules are displayed.
9. Mark the individual symbols “AU4 / VC4#n” with the right mouse button and select
<Configuration> <AU4 / VC4...>

2. Select the relevant EIPS1 module symbol.
3. In the lower “Port List” window, click the right mouse button to mark the EIPS1 mod-
ule symbol and select:
.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 203
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
select:
5. In the “OS” field,
The monitoring function can be activated and the laser start period can be set.
The signal can be used as synchronization source.
5) can be selected.
In the “RS” field the “Trace Trail Identifier” handling can be switched “on / off”.
8. Click the right mouse button to mark the other “AU4 / VC4” symbol in the Traffic Flow
window and select the item: .
The n-AU4 / VC4-symbols of the working EIPS1 modules are displayed.
8.15.15.6 Displaying the Sub Rack Equipment Configuration

1. Mark the “NE/Subrack” symbol.
<Information>.
3. All the available slots are described in the open “Actual Equipping” or “Possible
Equipping” window.
4. When <Actual...> is selected, the occupied slot numbers, inserted modules and
module status are displayed.
8.15.15.7 Monitoring the Redundant Power Supply

1. In the “Sub Rack” symbol,
click with the right mouse button to select <2nd Power Supply...>.
2. In the window opened, mark the options and confirm with <Apply> and <Close>
button.
8.15.16 SLT Synchronous Line Terminal with 1+1 MSP

Requirement: Equipment configuration as described in Chapter 5.4.2.
The OIS16/OIS16-2 equipping is duplicated (working / protection). The same payload is
transmitted to both OIS16/OIS16-2 modules. This is a 1+1 line protection switching con-
figuration.
8.15.16.1 Begin of Set-Up Procedure

See Chapter 8.15.1.
204 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.15.16.2 Configuring the 1:1 MSP Protection Switching

1. Mark the “OIS16/OIS16-2” module symbol in slot 406 or 407 (single row-subrack) or
mark the “OIS16/OIS16-2” module symbol in slot 503 or 508 (double row-subrack).
2. Select <Configuration> <Protection...> using the right mouse button.
3. In the window opened, from the Port List using “Type”, select “1+1 MSP”,
and configure it pressing the <Create> button.
4. The entry under “Exists” changes from “no” to “yes”.
5. In the Port List, additional entries appear relating to the working slot, the protection
slot and the protection switching status.
6. Close the window using the <Close> button.
7. In the “Module View” window, mark one of the OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbols.
8. In the lower Port List, mark the companian displayed OIS16/OIS16-2 symbol and
select with the right mouse button.
9. In the window opened, click with the right mouse button to mark the “1+1 MSP” sym-
bol and select:
<Configuration...> .
11. In the “MSP Control” field,
the protection switching status is displayed and
a selection is made between “revertive / nonrevertive”.
The module switching function
(Default = Clear; automatic initialization of the MSP) is specified.
The K1 / K2 protection switching protocol type is displayed.
The MSP status is displayed.
The Wait-to-Restore time (1 to 12) is selected.
The MSP status is activated.
12. Confirm using <Apply> and <Close> button.
For 1:1 MSP: Extra traffic is set to contiguous concatenated, FEC is switched off and
i Main Traffic having FEC on (no concatenated).
This case is probably irrelevant because FEC at only one span would not make much
sense.
8.15.16.3 Other Functions Settings

a) Monitoring Functions of the Optical / Electrical
Signal Path of the EIPS1 Module:
See Chapter 8.15.1.
The “Hold-off Time” must be set to <...>.
b) Monitoring Functions of the Optical / Electrical

Signal Path of the OIS16/OIS16-2 Module:
See Chapter 8.15.15.2.
c) Configuring the Overhead Cross Connection:

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 205
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
d) Setting the Telemetry Interface Channels and

the Telephone Number of the 2-Wire DTMF Handset:
e) Configuring the Optical Booster / Preamplifier:

f) Specifying the Connector Designations:

g) Specifying the Trail Trace Identifier:

h) Displaying the Sub Rack Equipment Configuration:

i) Specifying the User Label:

j) Monitoring the Redundant Power Supply:

8.15.17 SLD Synchronous Add / Drop Multiplexer with

MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching, 1+1 MSP for an OIS1/4
and an EIPS1 Module Protection Switching
Requirement: Equipment configuration as described in Chapter 5.4.3.
Any type of working traffic can be configured for the AU4# channels (1 to 8); however,
any traffic via the AU4# channels (9 to 16) leads to the common protection channels of
each ring.
8.15.17.1 Begin of Set-Up Procedure

See Chapter 8.15.1.
When using an EIPS1 module in slot 414 additionally
there is to select the operation mode:
“Card Protection”.
8.15.17.2 Configuring the MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching

1. Mark any OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbol.
2. Select <Configuration> <Protection...> with the right mouse button.
3. In the window opened, select “Type” (2F-SPRING, 1+1 MSP) from the list and set
up pressing the <Create> button.
4. The entry under “Exists” changes from “no” to “yes”.
5. In the window, additional entries appear relating to the working slot, the protection
slot and the protection switching status.
206 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
6. Close the window using the <Close> button.
8.15.17.3 Configuring the MS BSHR/2 Protection Switching

1. Mark one of the OIS16/OIS16-2 module symbols.
2. In the lower Port List window, mark the displayed OIS16/OIS16-2 window.
3. With the right mouse button, select: .
4. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the “2F-SPRING” field,
and select the menu item:
<Configuration...> .
6. In the “2F-RING Control” field,
the active ring is displayed.
The protection switching mode is displayed.
The module switching status
The K1 / K2 protection switching protocol type is displayed,
node ID settings are specified (0 to 15).
8.15.17.4 Configuring the 1 + 1 MSP for the OIS4/OIS4-2 Module

1. Mark one of the OIS4/OIS4-2 module symbols.
2. In the lower Port List window, mark the displayed OIS4/OIS4-2 window.
3. With the right mouse button, select: .
4. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the “1+1 MSP” field
<Configuration...>.
5. The protection switching architecture is displayed in the window opened
the protection switching status is displayed.
A selection is made between “revertive / nonrevertive”.
The module switching status,
8.15.17.5 Configuring the 1 + 1 MSP for the OIS1 Module

1. Mark one of the OIS1 module symbols.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 207
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
2. In the lower Port List window, mark the displayed OIS1 window.
3. With the right mouse button, select: .
4. In the window opened, click the right mouse button to mark the “1+1 MSP” field
<Configuration...>.
5. The protection switching architecture is displayed in the window opened
the protection switching status is displayed.
A selection is made between “revertive / nonrevertive”.
The module switching status,
8.15.17.6 Monitoring the Functions of the Optical / Electrical

Signal Path of an OIS1 Module
See analogous Chapter 8.15.1.
8.15.17.7 Configuring the EIPS1 Module

Configuring the EIPS1 module Protection Switching / Monitoring Functions of the
Optical / Electrical Signal Path of the EIPS1 Module:
1. At first mark the module in slot 411 to 413 and 415 and with the right mouse button
select in sequence:
<Configuration> <Card Protection> <Add to protection group>.
2. Further more see Chapter 8.15.1.
The “Hold-off Time” must be set to ≤ 50 ms.

1. At first mark the module in slot 411 to 413 and 415 and with the right mouse button
select in sequence:
<Configuration> <Card Protection> <Add to protection group>.
2. Further more see Chapter 8.15.1.
The “Hold-off Time” must be set to ≤ 50 ms.
8.15.17.9 Other Functions Settings

a) Configuring the Overhead Cross Connection:
208 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
b) Setting the Telemetry Interface Channels and

the Telephone Number of the 2-Wire DTMF Handset:
c) Configuring the cross connections of the SNL module:

d) Configuring the Optical Booster / Preamplifier:

e) Specifying the Connector Designations:

f) Specifying the Trail Trace Identifier:

g) Displaying the Sub Rack Equipment Configuration:

h) Specifying the User Label:

i) Monitoring the Redundant Power Supply:

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 209
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16 NE Application Software (APS) and

NE Configuration Data Base (DB)
Each network element must be configured and operated separately. Since each one has
its own communications interfaces, they must be connected in turn (one after each oth-
er) to the craft terminal for a configuration.
It is assumed, that when the network elements are configured (the parameters are set
with the aid of a craft terminal), they are equipped as specified in the network planning.
When commissioning a SLD/T16 Synchronous Line Multiplexer, a Local Craft Terminal
(LCT) is needed so that the default values can be set.
Commissioning one of the line equipment covers all the activities involved in creating a
functional network element (NE) and comprises the following steps:
• Reading the “read-me” files stored on diskette or CD-ROM before installation.
• Installing the NE (see 8.16.1.2).
• Custom configuration of the NE (see 8.16.2.1).
The Software Download is only necessary for incorporation of new software versions.
i
8.16.1 NE Application Software (NE APS)

The NE Software consists of Application Software Package and NE specific Configura-
tion Software Data.
Application Software (APS) can only be downloaded and installed either from the LCT
or the NCT. For details (see 8.16.1.1) and Download APS (see 8.16.1.2).
NE specific Configuration Software Data can be uploaded and downloaded either
to/from the LCT or the NCT. For details (see 8.16.2.1) and Download DB (see 8.16.2.2).
as well as Upload DB (see 8.16.2.3).
8.16.1.1 Application Software Management (NE SW APS)

In the “Module View” window do:
Procedure:
⇒ 1. Click on the “NE / Subrack” symbol box.
⇒ 2. On the menu appearing,
click on the <Software Management ... > menu item
⇒ 3. A “Software Management” window is displayed.
⇒ 4. In the window,
information about the active software
is available by a click on the <Compatibility> button
or “Download” procedure (see 8.16.1) window
is available by the <Download> button.
⇒ 5. Now click on the

“Close” button to finish.
210 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16.1.2 Application Software Download (Application Software Installing)

Procedure:
click on the <Software Management ... > menu item
⇒ 3. A “Software Management” window is displayed.
⇒ 4. In the window click in the “Inactive APS” area
on the <Download> button,
which displays the “Open” download window (see 8.16.1).
⇒ 5. Under the “File Type” area mark the flag field:
“Application Software”.
In the upper “Filename” field enter:
the desired path with back-up device, directory,
and the file name, or
after clicking on the “Browse...” button,
search for the desired path and directory in the “Save” window,
which opens on the button click.
Enter the file name and confirm with the item:
<Load>.
Directory and name will be transferred to the “Filename” field.
Apply the change with <Apply> button.
6. Depending on the Software Release either an hourglass symbol or a
progress bar in the Progress field is displayed to indicate that the save pro-
cedure is in progress, and after successful conclusion,
the message:
“Download succeeded” appears.
7. Now click on the
“Swap to ASW” button and on the “Close” button.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 211
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16.2 NE Database SW Configuration

The NE configuration data base is held in the MIB of the net element. The data base can
be saved onto a storage device with the aid of the LCT / NCT or a Network Management
System either to a file on a local backup or on a remote backup device (hard disk, floppy
disk or server storage) in the net (see 8.16.2.3). Restoring the data will be done with
Downloading the file and restore it back in the MIB (see 8.16.2.2).
It involves configuring the MIB of the network element, using a download process in a
sequence, shown in details below, in accordance with the back-up files. This is done by
starting the SLD/T operator interface of the LCT / NCT. The connection to the network
element can be established only via the DCCM channels.
212 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16.2.1 Config DB Management

Procedure:
click on the <Config DB Management ... > menu item
⇒ 3. A “Config DB Management” window is displayed.
information about the NE state (active, idle, 0) and the Configuration ID
is available by a click on the appropriate fields or buttons.
Selection of
<Upload> procedure (see 8.16.2.3) or
<Download> procedure (see 8.16.2.2)
is available by the <Up/Download> button.
⇒ 5. Now click on the

“Apply” and “Close” button to finish.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 213
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16.2.2 Config DB Download (Load and Restore)

Procedure:
Selection of
<Download> procedure window
is available by the <Download> button.
“<NE VCDB>.
search for the desired path and directory in the “Save” window,
<Load>.
the message:
“Download succeeded” appears.
7. Now make:
“Swap to VCDB” process.
Downloaded file NE-VCDB must now be activated.
214 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
8.16.2.3 Config DB Upload (Back-Up and Save)

Procedure:
Selection of
<Upload> procedure window
is available by the <Upload> button.
“<NE VCDB>.
search for the desired path and directory in the “Save as” window,
<Save>.
the message:
“Upload succeeded” appears.
8.17 VCDB Data Base

In the VCDB data base all configuration data is stored.
After a configuration or a configuration change, after 60 seconds of time, the configura-
tion data is written into the VCDB data base.
To change the VCDB data, the authorized user has the following mentioned possibili-
ties:
• Set to Default. Every made configurations are set to the Default values.
• Download (8.16.2.2) and Activating that followed it, from an existing VCDB data
base.
• Upload from an actual VCDB data base (8.16.2.3).
8.18 Use of an Optional CLA Box

If an optional CLA Box is used the use of CLL64-2 module or modules must be stated.
As described in 5.2.1 the Sa-Bit is to be set, if recommended, in accordance to the net
planning. Refer to Tab. 5.1 and see switch view (see Fig. 5.2).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 215
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
8.19 Alarm Displays

The alarm settings are listed in the “OMN:SL“ Operating Manual.
For alarms triggered during installation, refer to the “MMN” Maintenance Manual.
216 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
9 Extending the System

This chapter describes the principal modifications to the relevant sub racks. The recon-
figuration should be seen in respect the STM-16 data traffic, when a Multiplex Section
Protection (MSP) protection switching or a Multiplex Section Bidirectional Self-healing
Ring (MS-BSHR) is to be created, set-up or removed, or if the configuration type is to be
changed from SLT to SLD or vice-versa.
Configuration operations which require an interruption of service! are specially marked.
!
All the possible re configuration operations are performed by following the prompts from
i the T-LCT / T-NCT (see Chapter 8 and OMN:SL).

of the SLD16 Sub Rack
Slots 406 and 409 (see Tab. 9.1) are assigned to the OIS16 and OIS16-2 modules;
slots 405 and 411 can also be used for EIPS1 tributary modules.
Slot Remarks
405 Usable for MSP as protection line interface,

for MS-BSHR/2 (east) in combination with slot 411 and
MS-BSHR/4 (east) in combination with slots 406, 409 and 411
406 Usable for MS-BSHR/2 (west) in combination with slot 409 and
MS-BSHR/4 (west) in combination with slots 405, 409 and 411
409 Usable for MSP as protection line interface,
411 Usable for MS-BSHR/2 (west) in combination with slot 405 and
Tab. 9.1 Possible Slots for OIS16 and OIS16-2 Modules (SLD16)
For the location of the slots in the sub racks, see Fig. 4.6.
9.1.1 SLD Configurations
9.1.1.1 Up- / Downgrade of a MSP on the Line Side

a) For a SLD operating without MSP with slots 406 and 411, it is possible to upgrade
the 1+1 MSP, whereby slots 406 and 409 function as a working / protection pair on
the one line side and slots 411 and 405 function as a working / protection pair) on
the other line side.
b) For a SLD without MSP using a slot combination other than 406 and 411, any up-
grade of the MSP on both line sides requires an interruption of service, either in
the form of a new glass fiber connection or isolation of the working traffic. Upgrading
of MS-BSHR/4 in this case leads to interruptions of the working traffic.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 217
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
c) For a SLD operating in a line network (chain) with linear MSP and using slots 406
and 411 as line interfaces for the working sections, downgrading of the MSP is
possible, without restriction, for each line side (east / west).
d) For a SLD with MS-BSHR/4, downgrading is possible without interruption of the
existing line traffic, if no failures along the working sections on the east and west side
are assumed and the ports at the working sections are used for the remaining traffic.
Prior to downgrading of the MSP, the MSP function should be deactivated using the
i LCT / NCT (see OMN:SL):
- In the “Module View” window, first mark the “Protection” symbol,
- Select <Management...>,
- Mark the MSP connection,
- Select <Delete>.
It should be noted that by simply downgrading the protection interfaces of a SLD

i with MSP on both line sides, the remaining SLD (which uses slots 406 and 411) only
has reduced tributary module capacity, since slot 411 is used as the line interface.
At the discretion of the operator this configuration may be changed to a SLD which uses
slots 406 and 409 (normal configuration of the SLD without MSP); however, this would
necessitate an interruption of service! on one line side due to the need for glass fiber
isolation from slot 411 and reconnects to slot 409.
Without MSP With MSP
West East West East
W
406 411 406 411
SLD P
SLD
409
W
406 411
SLD
P
405
W W
406 411
P SLD P
409 405
MS-BSHR/4
W W
406 411
4nn Slot SLD
P P
P Protecting 411 405
W Working

in Corresponding Slots, MSP
218 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
9.1.1.2 Up- / Downgrade of a MS-BSHR/2 on the Line Side

a) For a SLD operating in a ring network without MSP and using slots 406 and 409 or
411 and 405 as line interfaces, configuration for the MS-BSHR/2 mode is possible.
MS-BSHR/2 mode without additional traffic:
During the reconfiguration procedure, any working traffic for AU4#(1 to 8) is main-
tained; however, any outgoing working traffic for AU4#(9 to 16), which is routed to
the common protection channels of the ring, must be removed.
MS-BSHR/2 mode with additional traffic:
tained; however, any outgoing working traffic for AU4#(9 to 16) which is routed to the
common protection channels with low priority traffic of the ring, will be squelched if
the MSP is disabled.
b) If both slot combinations 406 / 409 and 411 / 405 are used with MS-BSHR/2
mode, a SLD can be composed of two (interconnecting) self healing 2-fiber rings.
Without MS-BSHR/2 With MS-BSHR/2
West East West East

MS-BSHR/2
406 409 406 409

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
411 405 411 405

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
406 409
SLD
411 405
MS-BSHR/2

in Corresponding Slots, MS-BSHR/2

a) For a SLD operating in a (double) ring network without MSP and using slots 404,
405, 406 and 409, 410, 411 as line interfaces, configuration for MS-BSHR/4 mode
is possible.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 219
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
common protection channels with low priority traffic of the ring, will be squelched if
b) If both slot combinations 404 ... 406 with 409 ... 411 are used with MS-BSHR/4
mode, a SLD can be composed of four (interconnecting) self healing 2-fiber rings.

West East West East
MS-BSHR/2
504 507 504 507

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
503 508 503 508

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/4
504 507
SLD
503 508
MS-BSHR/4
West East West East
MS-BSHR/2
503 508 503 508

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
504 507 504 507

SLD SLD

9.1.2 SLT Configurations
9.1.2.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side

a) For a SLT without MSP, any OIS16 slot in Tab. 9.1 can be used for STM-16 traffic.
b) For a SLT operating without MSP on slot 406 / 411, it is possible to upgrade the
1+1 MSP by connecting slot 406 / 411 with the working section to slot 409 / 405 with
the protection section.
c) For a SLT operating without MSP and on slot 409 / 405, it is possible to upgrade
the 1:1 MSP by connecting slot 406 / 411 with the working section to slot 409 / 405
with the protection section.
220 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
This slot configuration is not recommended, because it has the effect of reducing
the number of available tributary modules.
d) For a SLT operating with MSP, it is possible to downgrade the MSP, provided that
no failures are anticipated in the working section and that the slot on the working
section is used for the remaining traffic.
Prior to downgrading of the MSP, the MSP function should be deactivated using the
i LCT / NCT (see 9.1.1.1 and OMN:SL).
W
406 406
SLT P SLT
409
1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

1+1 MSP = with interruption of service!
409
SLT
W
411 411
SLT P SLT
405
1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

405
SLT
4nn Slot
P Protection
W Working
Fig. 9.4 SLT16 Configurations with OIS16 Modules

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 221
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
9.1.3 Up- / Downgrade between SLT and SLD without Line Side MSP
a) For a SLT which uses any 4nn slot as a line interface, it is possible to upgrade to a
SLD by providing a second line interface at the relevant second slot of this set.
b) For a SLD which uses the 2 slots from 4nn, it is possible to downgrade to a SLT.
Although, in principle, the line side (west or east) on which downgrading is to be per-
formed is not specified, the operator should nonetheless redirect the traffic in such
a way that slot 406 or 411 is used for the remaining SLT. The reason for this is a sub-
sequent upgrade of this SLT with an MSP, as described in Chapter 9.1.2, since only
slot 406 or 411 can be selected as the traffic interface for the working section, thus
facilitating an upgrade without interruption to service).
For a SLD without MSP, only the slot combination 406 with 409 allows the maximum
i number of slots for tributary modules.
SLT SLD
West East
4xx 4xx 4yy

SLT SLD
4yy
SLT
4nn Slot
Fig. 9.5 SLT16 / SLD16 Configurations without MSP

with OIS16 Modules in Corresponding Slots
222 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
9.1.4 Up- / Downgrade between SLT Configuration Type with MSP

and SLD with / without Linear MSP on the Line Side(s)
a) For a SLT with linear MSP, it is possible to upgrade to a SLD with / without linear
MSP on the new line side.
b) For a SLD operating in a line network (chain) with linear MSP, it is possible to
downgrade a complete line side.
Although the line side (west or east) on which downgrading to a SLT is to be per-
formed, the operator should nonetheless restrict operation using the slots 411 and
405 in such a way that he retains the maximum number of tributary modules for the
remaining SLT.
SLT SLD
West East
W W
406 406 411
P SLT P
SLD
409 409
W W
406 411
P SLD
405 P
409
W W
411 406 411
P SLT SLD P
405 405
4nn Slot
P Protection
W Working
Fig. 9.6 SLT16 / SLD16 Configurations with MSP

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 223
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
9.2 Re Configuration of the STM-16 Interfaces of the SLD16E

Sub Rack
Slot Remarks
502 For a 1+1 MSP as working line interface in combination with slot 509
503 For a MSP as protection line interface,
504 For a MS-BSHR/2 (west) in combination with slot 507 and
507 For a MSP as protection line interface,
MS-BSHR/4 (west) with slots 503, 504 and 508
508 For a MS-BSHR/2 (west) in combination with slot 503 and
509 For a 1+1 MSP as protection line interface in combination with
slot 502
Tab. 9.2 Possible Slots for OIS16 Modules (SLD16E)
For the location of the slot in the sub racks, see Fig. 4.7.
9.2.1 SLD Configurations
9.2.1.1 Up- / Downgrade of a MSP on the Line Side

a) For a SLD operating without MSP with slots 504 and 508, it is possible to upgrade
the 1+1 MSP, whereby slots 504 and 507 function as a working / protection pair on
the one line side and slots 508 and 503 function as a working / protection pair on the
other line side.
Upgrading of MS-BSHR/4 is possible where slots 504 / 507 become the working /
protection pair at the west side and slots 508 / 503 become the working / protection
pair at the east side.
b) For a SLD without MSP using a slot combination other than 504 / 508, any upgrade
of the MSP on both line sides requires an interruption of service, either in the form
of a new glass fiber connection or isolation during working traffic. Upgrading of MS-
BSHR/4 in this case leads to interruptions of the working traffic.
c) For a SLD operating in a line network (chain) with MSP and using slots 504 and
508 as line interfaces for the working sections, downgrading of the MSP is possi-
ble, without restriction, for each line side (east / west).
d) For a SLD with MS-BSHR/4, downgrading is possible, if no failures along the work-
ing sections on the east and west side are assumed and the ports at the working
sections are used for remaining traffic.
Prior to downgrading of the MSP, the MSP function should be deactivated via the LCT
i / NCT (see 9.1.1.1 and OMN:SL).
224 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
West East West East
W
504 508 504 508
SLD P
SLD
507
W
504 508
SLD
P
503
W W
504 508
P SLD P
507 503
MS-BSHR/4
W W
504 508
50n Slot SLD
P P
P Protecting 507 503
W Working
Fig. 9.7 SLD16E Configuration with OIS16 Modules


a) For a SLD operating in a ring network without MSP and using slots 504 and 507
or 508 and 503 as line interfaces, configuration for MS-BSHR/2 mode is possible.
During the re configuration procedure, any working traffic for AU4#(1 to 8) is main-
common protection channels of the ring must be removed.
tained; however, any outgoing working traffic for AU4#(9 to 16) which will become
shared protection channels with low priority traffic of the ring, will be squelched if
b) If both slot combinations 504 / 507 and 508 / 503 are used with MS-BSHR/2
mode, a SLD can be provided in the form of two (interconnecting) self-healing 2-
fiber rings.
Only two MS-BSHR/2 without extra traffic can be configured at the same time.
i If one MS-BSHR/2 with extra traffic is configured, the SNL capacity limitation at the
line side is reached.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 225
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
West East West East

MS-BSHR/2
504 507 504 507

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
508 503 508 503

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
504 507
SLD
508 503
MS-BSHR/2

9.2.1.3 Up- / Downgrade the STM-16 Tributary Interfaces without MSP

a) For a SLD with / without MSP using all or a part of the slots from (503, 504, 507 or
508) as line interfaces, upgrading of one or two STM-16 interfaces at the tributary
side (e.g. for a fiber hub multiplexer) is possible.
b) Up- / Downgrading of MSP at the tributary side is possible in the same way as at
the line side, i.e. the existing / remaining traffic is not interrupted if no failures along
the corresponding section are assumed.
No MS-BSHR/2 arrangement will be possible at the tributary side.
i
West East West East
SLD SLD
502 509
P Protecting
W Working W W or P
Fig. 9.9 SLD16E Tributary Configuration without MSP with OIS16 Modules
226 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

a) For a SLD operating in a ring network without MSP and using slots 502, 503, 504
and 507, 508, 509 as line interfaces, configuration for MS-BSHR/2 mode is possible.
b) If both slot combinations 502 ... 504 with 507 ... 509 are used with MS-BSHR/4
mode, a SLD can be provided in the form of four (interconnecting) self-healing 2-
fiber rings.
Only two MS-BSHR/4 without extra traffic can be configured at the same time.
i If one MS-BSHR/4 is configured, the SNL capacity limitation at the line side is
reached.
West East West East

MS-BSHR/2
504 507 504 507

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/2
508 503 508 503

SLD SLD
MS-BSHR/4
504 507
SLD
508 503
MS-BSHR/4

9.2.1.5 Up- / Downgrade the STM-16 to STM-4 Tributary Interfaces

without MSP and Back Again
a) For a SLD with / without MSP using all or a part of the slots from (503, 504, 507 or
508) as line interfaces, upgrading of one or two STM-16 to STM-4 and back again
from STM-4 to STM-16 interfaces at the tributary side (e.g. for a fiber hub multiplex-
er) is possible.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 227
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
b) Up- / Downgrading of MSP at the tributary side is possible in the same way as at
the line side, i.e. the existing / remaining traffic is not interrupted if no failures along
the corresponding section are assumed.
No MS-BSHR/2 arrangement will be possible at the tributary side.
i
West East West East
SLD SLD
502 509 502 509
W W or P W W or P
STM-4/16 STM-4/16
P Protecting
W Working
Fig. 9.11 SLD16E Tributary Up- / Down- Grade Configuration

(STM-4 <-> STM-16) without MSP with OIS4/16 Modules
9.2.2 SLT Configurations
9.2.2.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side

a) For a SLT without MSP, any of the OIS16 slots 503, 504, 507 and 508 can be used
for STM-16 traffic.
b) For a SLT operating without MSP and using slot 504 / 508, it is possible to upgrade
the MSP by connecting slot 504 / 508 with the working section to slot 507 / 503 with
the protection section.
c) For a SLT operating without MSP and on slot 507 / 503, it is possible to upgrade
the 1:1 MSP by connecting slot 504 / 508 with the working section to slot 507 / 503
with the protection section.
d) For a SLT operating with MSP, it is possible to downgrade the MSP, provided that
no failures are anticipated in the working / protection section and that the slot on the
working / protection section is used for the remaining traffic.
Prior to downgrading of the MSP, the MSP status should be deactivated via the LCT
228 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
W
504 504
SLT P SLT
507
507 1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

SLT
W
508 508
SLT P SLT
503
503 1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

SLT 1+1 MSP = with interruption of service!
50n Slot
P Protection
W Working

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 229
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
9.2.3 Up- / Downgrade between SLT and SLD without Line Side MSP
a) For a SLT without MSP which uses any of the slots 503, 504, 507 or 508 as a line
interface, it is possible to upgrade to a SLD by providing a second line interface at
the relevant second slot of this set.
b) For a SLD using the two (for combination) slots 503, 504 or 507 and 508 without
MSP, it is possible to downgrade to a SLT.
Although, in principle, the line side (west or east) on which downgrading is to be per-
formed is not specified, the operator should nonetheless redirect the traffic in such
a way that slot 504 or 508 is used for the remaining SLT. The reason for this is a sub-
sequent upgrade of this SLT with an MSP, as described in Chapter 9.2.2, since only
slot 504 or 508 can be selected as the traffic interface for the working section.
SLT SLD
West East
50x 50x 50y

SLT SLD
50y
SLT
x, y Slot 503, 504, 507, 508
Fig. 9.13 SLT16E / SLD16E Configurations without MSP

230 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
9.2.4 Upgrade / Downgrade between SLT Configuration Type with MSP

and SLD with / without Linear MSP on the Line Side(s)
a) For a SLT with linear MSP, it is possible to upgrade to a SLD with / without linear
MSP on the new line side.
b) For a SLD operating in a line network (chain) with linear MSP, it is possible to
downgrade a complete line side.
The line side (west or east) on which a downgrading to a SLT with MSP is to be
performed is not specified.
SLT SLD
West East
W W W
504 504 508
P SLT SLD
507
W W W
503 503 508
P SLT SLD
508
W W W
502 502 509
P SLT SLD
509
50n Slot
P Protection
W Working
Fig. 9.14 SLT16E / SLD16E Configurations with Linear MSP

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 231
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
9.3 Re Configuration of the STM-16 Interfaces of the SLT16

Sub Rack
Slot Remarks
406 For a MSP as working line interface in combination with slot 407
407 For a MSP as protection line interface in combination with slot 406
Tab. 9.3 Possible Slots for OIS16 Modules (SLT16)
For the location of the slots in the sub racks, see Fig. 4.8.
9.3.1 Up- / Downgrade of the MSP on the Line Side

a) For a SLT without MSP, only slot 406 can be used for the existing STM-16 traffic.
b) For a SLT without MSP, it is possible to upgrade the MSP by connecting slot 406
to the working section and slot 407 to the protection section.
c) For a SLT with MSP, it is possible to downgrade the MSP, provided that no failures
are anticipated in the working section (W) and that the slot on the working section is
used for the remaining traffic.
Prior to downgrading of the MSP, the MSP function should be deactivated via the LCT
Without MSP With 1+1 MSP
W
406 406
SLT P SLT
407
40n Slot
P Protection
W Working
Fig. 9.15 SLT16 Configurations with OIS16 Modules in Corresponding Slots
232 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5

For all network elements, the up- and downgrading of each STM-4 interface by OIS1
modules can be effected without interruption of service.
For sub racks SLD16 or SLD16E using a STM-4 interface (working, without 1+1 MSP),
an upgrade (with an additional STM-4 interface) to an 1+1 MSP can be effected without
interruption of service. Similarly, a downgrade is also possible.
and Back Again
W
404 (408) 404 (408)
SLD/T P SLD/T
405 (409)
40n Slot
P Protection
W Working

in Corresponding Slots n, n+1
401 (402) 401 (402)

W
411 (412) 411 (412)
SLD/T P SLD/T
405 (404)
413 (414)
40n Slot
(41n) (alternate Slot)
P Protection
W Working

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 233
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5

For all network elements, the up- and downgrading of each STM-1 interface by OIS1
modules can be effected without interruption of service.
For sub racks SLD16 or SLD16E using a STM-1 interface (working, without 1+1 MSP),
an upgrade (with an additional STM-1 interface) to an 1+1 MSP can be effected without
interruption of service. Similarly, a downgrade is also possible.
Because an OIS module consists of 4x STM-1 interfaces, a mixture of working and pro-
i tection interfaces within the same module is not possible.
and Back Again
W
404 (408) 404 (408)
SLD/T P SLD/T
405 (409)
40n Slot
P Protection
W Working

401 (402) 401 (402)

W
411 (412) 411 (412)
SLD/T P SLD/T
405 (404)
413 (414)
40n Slot
(41n) (alternate Slot)
P Protection
W Working

234 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
9.5.2 Re Configuration of Card Protection (1+1)

for the Optical STM-1 Interface
W
401 (411) 401 (411)
SLT P SLT
402 (412)
402 (412) 1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

SLT
W
403 (413) 403 (413)
SLT P SLT
404 (414)
404 (414) 1:1 MSP = without interruption of service

SLT 1+1 MSP = with interruption of service!
50n Slot
P Protection
W Working

A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 235
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
10 Measurements, Test Reports

During commissioning of the system, measurements and function tests are required in
order to ensure that the equipment has been correctly installed and that no damage has
occurred during transport and assembly.
All the measurements and tests must be performed in accordance with the general
notes in Chapter 2 of this Manual. Electrical and optical parameters for the individual
modules and the complete system are included in the Technical Description TED.
Before commissioning the modules a visual inspection to detect any damage and to en-
sure correct physical layout is to be performed (see Chapter 3.2).
10.1 Required Test Equipment and Facilities

The following test equipment and facilities are required for the tests during commission-
ing:
• Bit error test instrument
– SDH test instrument, e.g. Siemens K4302
– PDH test instrument for 140 Mbit/s, e.g. Siemens P2032
• Optical measuring instruments
– Optical power level meter, e.g. Wandel & Goltermann OLP1
– Optical attenuator, Wandel & Goltermann OLA25
• Voltmeter, up to 100 V
• PC with LCT NE-UniGATE software, application software and Ethernet for the Ether-
net interface, see Chapter 7.1.2.
– Serial interface cable (null modem cable, socket-to-socket, 9-pin sub-D, 4 m long);
supplied ex-works as accessory to the LCT
– Coaxial cable with BNC terminals (connector), 4 m long; supplied ex-works as ac-
cessory to the LCT
– 2 BNC tee-pieces, 2 BNC 50 Ω terminations; supplied ex-works as accessory to
the sub rack
• Test cables
– F2 test cable, 75 Ω / 1.8 m, e.g. Siemens V42251-C113-A112
– Mono-mode optical fiber cable with E2000, SC, FC / PC or DIN connection, de-
pending on the optical coupling on the OIS1/4/16 module and the test instrument
– 2-pole cable with connector for operating voltage socket
• ESD armband with connecting cable
• Cleaning compound, isopropanol 99 %, and lint-free cloth
10.2 Local Measurements
10.2.1 Power Supplies

Before commissioning the power supplies must be checked (see Chapter 6.3). The cir-
cuit breakers must be able to withstand a load of 16 A. The voltage of the power supplies
must be measured directly at the connector of each power supply cable on the equip-
ment side (for the contact assignments, see Chapter Fig. 11.5). The operating voltages
must be in the range of 40 V to 72 V (nominal 48 V / 60 V).
236 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
10.2.2 Optical Output Level

The optical output power can be measured directly at the optical fiber couplings of the
OIS1/4/16 or OB(D) module (if fitted) at the output (see Fig. 10.1).
The laser restart for test (see 8.15.1) must be set via the LCT.
For measurements with the OB(D) module, it is essential to refer to the information in
! Chapters 2 and 10.1 (HRL10 connector, permissible optical input level).
The specified values for the output power of the OIS1/4/16 modules with / without OB
module are listed in the “Field Test Protocol”; see Chapter 10.5.
OIS16 Op-
Optical power
tional: meter
OIS4 OB (e.g. OLP1)
OIS16
For measurements with the OB module:

Permissible input level >+15 dBm;
HRL10 connector
Fig. 10.1 Measuring the Optical Output Power

of the OIS1/4/16 or OB(D) Module
10.2.3 Optional Bit Error Measurements

To measure the bit error rate on the equipment, a bit error test instrument must be con-
nected to the electrical tributary interface (140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s) and a loop back
must be set up on the optical line side (Fig. 10.2). All channels on the tributary side must
be checked in sequence.
Before proceeding, to get clear measurements, make sure the error rate of the loop
i back line side lies within the specifications. Otherwise, if unknown, first carry out the er-
ror rate measurements at which the line will be used for the loop back, and keep them
in mind or note them down for reference.
The clock synchronization must be set to the internal oscillator. If a T3 external clock is
available, this can be used. For clear measurements use the highest quality clock avail-
able as master for synchronization.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 237
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Tributary side Line side

LTU1) OIS1/4/1
(1 of 4) 6
Bit error test A1 Op- Optical

instrument #1 attenuator
A2 tional:
(e.g. K4302)
OB2)
A3
#2
A4
1) 4 LTU modules are required for
A5 the transmission of all 16 chan-
#3
A6 nels
2) For measurements with the OB
A7 module:
#4
A8 permissible input level >+15 dBm;
HRL10 connector
Fig. 10.2 Measuring the Bit Error Rate on 140/155 Mbit/s Channels
With the aid of the optical attenuator, the optical receive level must be set in such a way
as to maintain the specified range of values for the OIS1/4/16 or OP module.
Tributary Input:
Digital signal 140 Mbit/s or STM-1 at inputs A1 to A7 of the
test signal two LTU modules;
with corresponding equipping and configuration of the sub
rack (see e.g. Chapter 5 and 8)
Code: CMI
Bit rate: 139264 Kbit/s or 155520 Kbit/s (STM-1)
Bit pattern: 223–1
Tributary Output: Digital signal 140 Mbit/s or STM-1 at inputs A2 to A8 of the
measurement two LTU modules;
with corresponding equipping and configuration of the sub
rack (see e.g. Chapter 5 and 8)
During a brief-period measurement (<1 minute), the bit error rate must be zero.
For measurements with the OB module, it is essential to refer to the information in Chap-
! ters 2 and 10.1 (HRL10 connector, permissible optical input level).
The specified values for bit errors of the OIS1/4/16 modules with / without OB module
are listed in the “Field Test Protocol”; see Chapter 10.5.
10.3 Line Measurements
10.3.1 Optical Receive Level

In order to determine the line attenuation, the optical power level meter must be used to
measure the value at the optical fiber cable leading to the OIS1/4/16 or OB module.
The laser must be subjected to a forced start with the aid of the LCT (see Chapter
10.2.2).
The value for the optical output level of the far end is to be obtained from the “Field Test
Protocol” (local measurements) for the far end.
The specified values for the levels are listed in the “Field Test Protocol”.
238 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Optical power meter (e.g. OLP1)
#1 #1
Op- Op-
tional: tional:
OP OB
#16
#16
SLD/T16
SLD/T16 SLR16
#1 #1
Op- Op-
tional: tional:
#16 OB OP #16
Optical power meter (e.g. OLP1)
Fig. 10.3 Test Ring for Measuring the Optical Receive Level
10.3.2 Bit Error Rate (Line Measurement)

In order to take measurements along the transmission path, a bit error test instrument
must be connected to the tributary interface (140 Mbit/s or STM-1). At the far end, a loop
back must be set up on the relevant channel (see Fig. 10.4).
Tributary Input: Digital signal 140 Mbit/s or STM-1 at inputs A1 to A7 of

test signal the two LTU modules;
with corresponding equipping and configuration of the
sub rack (see e.g. Chapter 5 and 8)
Code: CMI
Bit rate: 139264 Kbit/s or 155520 Kbit/s (STM-1)
Bit pattern: 223–1
Tributary Output: Digital signal 140 Mbit/s or STM-1 at inputs A2 to A8 of
measurement the two LTU modules;
with corresponding equipping and configuration of the
sub rack (see e.g. Chapter 5 and 8)
Over a period of 12 hours, the bit error rate should not exceed a value of 10–10.
The specified value for bit errors of the OIS modules with / without OB module are listed
in the “Field-Test Protocol”; see Chapter 10.5.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 239
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
Tributary side Line side Line side Tributary side

Bit error test
instrument #1
(e.g. K4302) #1
#2
#2
#3 SLT SLR SLT
#3
#16
#16
Fig. 10.4 Test Ring for Determining the Bit Error Rate
(Long-Term Measurement)
10.3.3 Testing the EOW Service Channels, Bytes E1 and E2

In the NEs to be connected, with the application software in the “Module View” window,
proceed as follows:
1. In the “OHCC” field, click the right mouse button to select:
<OH-Cross Connections...>
2. In the resulting “Overhead Cross Connections” window, in the “OHCC Type”
field, select the “Cross-Connect” EOW Ring / E1 or E2
3. In the “TP Selection” field under
“TP A”: select OHA_Slot Number_EOW_RGMGR and under
“TP B”: select EIPS1_Slot Number.n(155M)_E1 / E2
4. Configure with the <Apply> button
5. Close with the <Close> button.
In the NEs configured in this way (SLD16, SLT16), it is necessary to check the connec-
tion with the telephone [after specifying the telephone numbers (see 8.15.1 f)] to ensure
satisfactory speech intelligibility.
10.3.4 Testing the DCC Channels

The DCC settings (DCCR or DCCM) must be completed beforehand on each network
element in the network area (see 8.12.3).
In the NEs to be connected, with the application software in the “Module View” window,
proceed as follows:
1. In the “OHCC” field, click the right mouse button to select:
<OH-Cross Connections...>
2. In the resulting “Overhead Cross Connections” window, in the “OHCC Type”
field, select “Cross-Connect” MCF / DCCM or DCCR
3. In the “TP Selection” field under
“TP A”: select EIPS1_Slot Number.n(155M)_DCCM / DCCR and under
“TP B”: select SCU_Slot Number_DCC-LINK#n
4. Configure with the <Apply> button
5. Close with the <Close> button.
240 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
Check whether (with the operating terminal connected to the Q-B3 interface) the remote
network element is addressed in the UniGATE window.
Check of the ..... states “enabled” / “disabled”.
10.3.5 Testing the Protection Switching

For protection switching mode, the module supplies two redundant signals via a fixed
branch. On the receive side, a switch is used to select either the signals from line 1 or
the signals from line 2.
The protection switching function is checked during:
1. Automatic switch over in the event of loss of signal, LOS
2. Forced switch over by LCT
The automatic protection switching function must be tested by interrupting the optical
signal path.
The test is to be conducted in the “non-revertive” operating mode and checked at the
LCT by means of a message in the open “Message Window”.
The LCT must also be used to test the manually-forced switch over.
For activation from the protection switching, see 8.15.1 b), 8.15.15 b) and 8.15.16 b).
10.4 External Alarm Messages

This check on the sub racks should only be performed if the alarm signalling function is
i configured to Bw7R i.e. the ZA contacts are used and / or the external signalling voltage
is applied.
To check the A, B, ZA(A) and ZA(B) alarms, alarms are simulated on the relevant sub-
rack.
Simulation of A alarm:
Interrupt the optical receive side. In a system with protection switching, both input sides
must be interrupted.
1. Check whether an A alarm appears on the SRAP-PI (only if external signal voltage
is applied).
2. Check whether an alarm is present at the corresponding ZA contact (Bw7R connec-
tor in terminal panel 301, see Chapter 11).
Simulation of B Alarm:
An optical attenuator is looped into the optical input side.
The attenuation is only increased until bit errors appear (>10-5). This triggers a B alarm.
In a system with line protection switching, it is sufficient to isolate a line on the optical
side in order to trigger a B alarm.
1. Check whether a B alarm appears on the SRAP-PI (only if external signal voltage is
applied).
2. Check whether an alarm is present at the corresponding ZA contact (Bw7R connec-
tor in terminal panel 301, see Chapter 11).
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 241
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
10.5 Test Reports

The results of the commissioning measurements must be recorded in test reports.
The appropriate Field Test Protocol forms can be obtained from the relevant sales of-
fices.
242 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11 Terminal Assignments, Signal Names

For the location of the connectors of the rack,
see Fig. 4.2 (Power Connection Working and Protection in Schematic View);
see Fig. 4.8 (Power Connection at the Fuse Panel);
see Fig. 4.3 (Connections Schematic);
see Fig. 4.5 (Rack Terminal Panel).
For the location of the connectors of the sub rack,
see Fig. 4.9 (SLD16);
see Fig. 4.10 (SLD16E).
11.1 Terminal Assignments of the Rack

(Rack Terminal Panel Additions)
11.1.1 Terminal Assignments of the Signal Distributor (SigVt)

The connectors of the signal distributor for Bw7R signalling must be numbered in se-
quence from 1 to 8.
1 to 6 Connectors for the connections to the sub racks (see Fig. 4.4).
7 Connector to the signal assignment distributor in the telecommunications
center
8 Connector for the signal loop
For the assignment of the Bw7R connectors of the relevant sub racks to the connectors
of the signal distributor, see Chapter 4.2.11.
Fig. 11.1 shows the contacts of the connectors of the signal distributor.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 243
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
1 to 6
SLZKTEL (EL)
ZA(B) signals ZA(A) signals
SBBKTZGND
SLZKTA (a)
SBBKTZAA
from: from:
USP (+S)
USP (+S)
USP (+S)
7
[ZA(A)]
GND
Sub Rack 1 1
1 14 Sub Rack 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Sub Rack 2 15
11
12
13
14
15
10 3
9
Sub Rack 2
16
SLZKTB (b) 4
SBBKTZAB
17
USN (–S)
USN (–S)
USN (–S)
Sub Rack 3 5
[ZA(B)] 18 Sub Rack 3
6
Sub Rack 41) 19
8 7 Sub Rack 41)
20
+S 8
–S 21
1 +S Sub Rack 51)
9 9
–S 22 Sub Rack 51)
2 +S
10 10
–S 23
3 a Sub Rack 61)
b 11 11 Sub Rack 61)
4 24
EL 12
12
5 25
13 13
6
14
7 GND
15
8 1) Not used
Fig. 11.1 SigVt Signal Distributor (Rack Terminal Panel)
11.1.2 Terminal Assignments of the Distributor Module (VtM1)

See Fig. 4.3.
11.1.3 Terminal Assignments of the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU)

See Fig. 4.6 and 4.x.
11.1.3.1 Medium Attachment Unit with a Coaxial Cable Interface (MAU-Coax)

This is the common used LAN interface.
See Fig. 4.6.
11.1.3.2 Medium Attachment Unit with

a Twisted Pair Cable Interface (MAU-Twist)
This interface is optional and is only on special customer demand available.
244 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.1.4 Terminal Assignments of the Clock Line Adapter (CLA)
11.1.4.1 Line Side Connectors A1 (X1), A3 X2), and A5 (X3)
Fig. 11.2 Line Side Connectors

(Front Panel, Left Hand Side of the box - A1, A3, A5)
11.1.4.2 NE Side Connectors B1 (X12), B3 (X13), and B5 (X14)
Fig. 11.3 NE Side Connectors

(Front Panel, Right Hand Side of the Box - B1, B3, B5)
11.1.4.3 CLA box internal Connector X8 (Test Interface RS-232)

In special cases of the installation and the maintenance it may be useful to have an ac-
cess to this connector after removing the housing of the CLA box. Use a special adapter
cable for connecting to a COMn-Port of a service device or a PC or the LCT-Computer
for test purposes.
Fig. 11.4 CLA Box Internal Test Interface RS-232 (Connector X8)
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 245
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
11.2 Power Terminal Assignments of the Sub Rack

at the Terminal Panel 101
Fig. 11.5 shows the terminal assignment for power supply connectors A1 and B1.
UB(+)
3 2 1
UB(–)
Fig. 11.5 Operating Voltage A1, B1
246 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.3 Communication Traffic Terminal Assignments

of the Sub Rack at the Panels 201 to 212
11.3.1 Line Termination Unit (Tributary), LTU Module

Fig. 11.6 shows the terminal assignment for the coaxial connections of an LTU module
in slots 201 to 209.
A1 Input Signal Output Signal Tributary Channel
A2 A1 A2 1
A3 A4 2
A3 A5 A6 3
A7 A8 4
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Fig. 11.6 Coaxial Connections on the LTU Module
11.3.2 EBSL Module

This module has no front side interfaces (Front Panel is blank).
Every connection is made using the backplane wiring of the sub rack.
11.3.3 PSUTP Module

This module has no front side interfaces (Front Panel is blank).
Every connection is made using the backplane wiring of the sub rack.
11.4 Special Communication Interface Terminals

of the Sub Rack and the Assignments
11.4.1 Terminal Assignments at the Terminal Panel 301
11.4.1.1 AUX1 (A1), AUX 3 (C1), and AUX 5 (E1) Interfaces (V.11 and G.703)
The AUX 3 and AUX 5 interfaces are only available with SLD16E.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 247
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
13 DG1T-a (in)
DG1T-b (in) 25 Pin Signal
12 DG1R-a (out)
24 1 Ground
DG1R-b (out)
11 2 Data output (+) Channel 1
23 3 Data input (+) V.11
10
22 4 Clock output (+)
9 TV2T-a (out) 5 Clock output (+)
TV2T-b (out) 21
TV2R-a (out)
TV2R-b (out) 20 7 Data input (+) V.11
7 DV2T-a (in) 8 Clock output (+)
DV2T-b (in) 19
DV2R-a (out)
DV2R-b (out) 18 10 –
5 TV1T-a (out)
17 11
TV1T-b (out)
4 TV1R-a (out) 12 Data output (+) Channel 1
TV1R-b (out) 16 13 Data input (+) G.703
3 DV1T-a (in)
DV1T-b (in) 15 14 Data output (–) Channel 1
2 DV1R-a (out) 15 Data input (–) V.11
DV1R-b (out) 14 16 Clock output (–)
1 GND
17 Clock output (–)
18 Data output (–) Channel 2
19 Data input (–) V.11
22 –
23
25 Data input (–) G.703
Fig. 11.7 AUX1 (A1), AUX3 (C1), and AUX5 (E1) Interfaces
248 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.4.1.2 AUX2 (B1), AUX 4 (D1), and AUX 6 (F1) Interfaces (V.11 and G.703)
The AUX 4 and AUX 6 interfaces are only available with the SLD16E.
13 DG2T-a (in)
DG2T-b (in) 25 Pin Signal
12 DG2R-a (out)
24 1 Ground
DG2R-b (out)
23 3 Data input (+) V.11
10
9 TV4T-a (out) 5 Clock output (+)
TV4T-b (out) 21
TV4R-a (out)
TV4R-b (out) 20 7 Data input (+) V.11
7 DV4T-a (in) 8 Clock output (+)
DV4T-b (in) 19
DV4R-a (out)
DV4R-b (out) 18 10 –
5 TV3T-a (out)
17 11
TV3T-b (out)
4 TV3R-a (out) 12 Data output (+) Channel 2
TV3R-b (out) 16 13 Data input (+) G.703
3 DV3T-a (in)
DV3T-b (in) 15 14 Data output (–) Channel 3
2 DV3R-a (out) 15 Data input (–) V.11
DV3R-b (out) 14 16 Clock output (–)
1 GND
19 Data input (–) V.11
22 –
23
25 Data input (–) G.703
Fig. 11.8 AUX2 (B1), AUX4 (D1), and AUX6 (F1) Interfaces
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 249
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
11.4.1.3 E&M and PABX Interface

Contact assignment for two 4-wire E&M lines and one PABX interface for connection to
a Private Branch Exchange (see Fig. 11.9).
13
PABX-c 25
12 PABX-a
PABX-b 24
11
23
10 R(SREO) from
R(SREO) from 22 OHA module
OHA1) module 9
21
8
20
E2 (out) 7 M2 (in)
19
6 VF2-a (in)
VF2-b (in) 18
5 VF2-a (out)
VF2-b (out) 17
4 M1 (in)
E1 (out) 16
3 VF1-a (in)
VF1-b (in) 15
2 VF1-a (out)
VF1-b (out) 14
1 GND
Pin Signal
1 Ground
2 4-wire output channel 1 -a
3 4-wire input channel 1 -a
4 4-wire channel 1 input
5 4-wire output channel 2 -a
6 4-wire input channel 2 -a
7 4-wire channel 2 input
8 –
9 –
10 For external ringer from slots 401(single-row sub rack) and 405 (double-row sub rack)
11 –
12 2-wire PABX interface -a
13 –
14 4-wire output channel 1 -b
15 4-wire input channel 1 -b
16 4-wire channel 1 output
17 4-wire output channel 2 -b
18 4-wire input channel 2 -b
19 4-wire channel 2 output
20 –
21 –
22 For external ringer from slot 4071) (double-row sub rack)
23 –
24 2-wire PABX interface -b
25 2-wire PABX interface -c
1) Not used in this version
Fig. 11.9 E&M Interface
250 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.4.2 Clock Interfaces (T3 / T4)

Two mutually-independent T3 clocks (2.048 MHz) can be fed in or the T4 clocks can be
sampled (if two SNL modules are used, 2x T4 are available) (see Fig. 11.10).
Sub Rack SLD/T16 (Fig. 4.9)
Connector G Connector H
Pin Signal
1 Ground
2 T4 output -a, connected T4 output -a, connected
with CLL slot 414 with CLL slot 415
3 Ground
4 T3 input -a, connected with CLL slots 414, 415
5 –
6 T4 output -b, connected T4 output -b, connected
7 Ground
8 T3 input -b, connected with CLL slots 414, 415
9 –
1 GND
T4-b (out) 6
2 T4-a (out)
GND 7
3 GND
T3-b (in) 8
4 T3-a (in)
9
5
Tn-a to GND = 75 ohm

Tn-a to Tn-b = 120 ohm
Sub Rack SLD/T16E (Fig. 4.10)
Connector G Connector H
Pin Signal
1 Ground
2 T4 output -a, connected T4 output -a, connected
3 Ground
4 T3 input -a, connected with CLL slots 416, 417
5 –
6 T4 output -b, connected T4 output -b, connected
7 Ground
8 T3 input -b, connected with CLL slots 416, 417
9 –
Fig. 11.10 T3 / T4 Interfaces
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 251
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
11.5 Control Terminal Assignments of the Sub Rack
11.5.1 Local Area Network Interface, LAN Interface, Q-B3 Interface
11.5.1.1 Q-B3 Interfaces (AUI for Ethernet-LAN)

The Q-B3 interface is used for communication with network elements via the Network
Management System. The signals from the Q-B3 interface conform to ISO / IEC Stan-
dard 8802-3 (ANSI / IEEE Std.802.3) (see Fig. 11.11).
8 CO-S / 0V
CO-B 15 Pin Signal
7 CO-A
14 1 0V
VS / 0V
6 VC / 0V 2 Control Input A
VP 13 3 Data Output A
5 DI-A
12 4 0V
DI-B
4 DI-S / 0V 5 Data Input A
DO-S / 0V 11
3 6 0V
DO-A
DO-B 10 7 Control Output A
2 CI-A
9 8 0V
CI-B
1 CI-S / 0V 9 Control Input B
10 Data Output B
11 0V
12 Data Input B
13 +12 V
14 0V
15 Control Output B
Fig. 11.11 Q-B3 Interfaces (AUI for Ethernet-LAN)
11.5.2 Local Craft Terminal Interface (LCT),

Local Serial Interface, Q-F Interface
11.5.2.1 Q-F Interface (LCT using V.24 / RS232 Interface)
1 DCD
DSR 6 Pin Signal
2 RxD 1 Data Carrier Detect
RTS 7
3 TxD 2 Receive Data
CTS 8 3 Transmit Data
4 DTR
9 4 Data Terminal Ready
5 GND 5 Ground
6 Data Set Ready
7 Request to Send
8 Clear to Send
9 –
Fig. 11.12 Q-F Interfaces
252 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.6 Terminal Assignments

for Optional Equipment
11.6.1 Telephone Devices Interface(s)
1 GND
VFSTB (b) 6 Pin Signal
2 VFSTA (a) 1 Ground
7
3 2 a conductor
8 3 –
4
9 4 –
5 5 –
6 b conductor
7 –
8 –
9 –
Fig. 11.13 Telephone Interface
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 253
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
11.6.2 Light Signal Equipment

and Central Alarm In- / Outputs (Bw7R)
11.6.2.1 Bw7R Interface (LZE / ZBBeO)

8 GND
15
7 LE
14
6 ZA(A)
ZA(B) 13
5 el
b 12
4 a
–S 11
3 +S
–S 10
2 +S
–S 9
1 +S
Pin Signal
1 Positive signalling voltage (external)
4 Alarm contact a for messages to the LZE light signal equipment
5 Terminal for reminder lamp el in the LZE light signal equipment
6 Central alarm for priority level A, ZA(A)
7 Line configuration alarm LE (not used)
8 Ground
9 Negative signalling voltage (external)
12 Alarm contact b for messages to the LZE light signal equipment
13 Central alarm for priority level B, ZA(B)
14 –
15 –
Alarm contacts a, b1)

Central alarm contacts ZA(A), ZA(B) 2)
Voltage load: 72 V
Current load: ≤ 100 µΑ
Contact rating: ≤ 60 Ω
1) Not grounded in the rack
2) Grounded in the rack
Fig. 11.14 Bw7R Interface
Local alarm interface for the connection of LZE light signal equipment and ZBBeo cen-
tral service observation equipment. The signalling voltage S is a separate, externally-
supplied voltage in the range 10 V to 72 V (see Fig. 11.14).
254 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
11.6.3 Terminal Assignments of the Telemetry Interface Module

(TIF-Module)
See Fig. 4.7.
19 GND
GND 37 Pin Signal Level
18 GND
36 1 Ground
GND
17 CC16O 2 Custom Control No. 01 Output 0V
CA16I 35
16 CC15O 3 Custom Control No. 02 to
CA15I 34 4 Custom Control No. 03 –72 V
15 CC14O 5 Custom Control No. 04
CA14I 33
CA13I 32 7 Custom Control No. 06
13 CC12O
1
31 8 Custom Control No. 07
CA12I
11 CC10O
9 CC08O
CA07I 26
7 16 Custom Control No. 15
CC06O
6 CC05O
24 18 Ground
CA05I
5 CC04O 19 Ground
CA04I 23 20 Custom Alarm No. 01 Input 0V
4 CC03O
22 21 Custom Alarm No. 02 to
CA03I
3 CC02O 22 Custom Alarm No. 03 –72 V
CA02I 21 23 Custom Alarm No. 04
2 CC01O
CA01I 20 24 Custom Alarm No. 05
1 GND 25 Custom Alarm No. 06
26 Custom Alarm No. 07
36 Ground
37 Ground
Fig. 11.15 CUST-IN / OUT Interface
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 255
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
256 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
12 Abbreviations
This chapter contains all the abbreviations of the operating documentation for
SLD/T16-2.4 and SLR16-2.2.
2F-SPRING 2-Fiber Shared Protection Ring

4F-SPRING 4-Fiber Shared Protection Ring
2WHS 2-Wire Handset Diensttelefon für
Zweidrahtschnittstelle
... R1 Release 1
... R2 Release 2
... R3 Release 3
... R4 Release 4
ABR Alarm on Request Alarm auf Abruf
ACSE Association Control Service Element Assoziertes Verbindungsaufbau
(Entity) und Zugangskontrollelement (In-
stanz)
ADC Analog Digital Converter Analog-/Digital-Umsetzer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal (G.783) Alarmmeldesignal (G.783)
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown (G.783)
ANT Alarm Response Antwort-Alarminformation
APD Avalanche Photo Diode
APS Automatic Protection Switching Automatische Ersatzschaltung
AS Alarm Suppression Alarmunterdrückung
ASCII American Standard Code for
Information Interchange
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Anwendungsspezifischer IC
Circuit
ASW Application Software Anwendungssoftware
AU Administrative Unit Verwaltungseinheit
AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4
AU4CTP AU-4 Connection Termination Point
AUAIS Administrative Unit Alarm Indication
Signal
AUI Attachment Unit Interface to the DTE Anschaltungseinheit Richtung
DTE
AULOP Administrative Unit Loss of Pointer
(G.783)
AUX Auxiliary Channels
BASW Basic Software Basis-Software
BBE Background Block Error
BDM Background Debug Mode Interface
BER Bit Error Ratio Bitfehlerhäufigkeit
BG Module/Card Baugruppe
BGT Subrack Baugruppenträger
BSHR Bidirectional Self-Healing Ring
Bw7R Narrow-Rack Style 7R Schmalgestellbauweise Typ 7R
C-AL Customer Alarm Kundenalarm
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 257
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
CC Cross-Connection
CE Communautè Europèenne
CEPT Confèrence Europèene des Konferenz europäischer Post-
Administrations des Postes et des und Telekommunikationsver-
Tèlècommunications waltungen
CF Card Failure Baugruppenfehler
CFG Configuration Konfiguration
CL Configuration Log Konfigurationsdaten-Aufzeich-
nung
CLA Clock Line Adapter Takt-Leitungsadapter
CLL Clock Unit Line Module Takteinheit Leitungsbaugruppe
CLL64-2 Clock Unit Line Module 64-2 (espe- Takteinheit Leitungsbaugruppe
cially use for external CLA box) 64-2 (besonders in Verbindung
mit einer externen CLA box)
CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Verbindungslose Netzwerkss-
Service chichtdienst
CONF Configuration Alarm Konfigurationsalarm
CPL Current Problem List Aktuelle Fehlerliste
CPU Central Processing Unit Zentraler Steuerungsrechner
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS Card Release State Baugruppen Ausgabestand
CS4 Connecting Switch 4xSTM-1
(Module)
CSO Card out of service Baugruppe außer Betrieb
CT Card Type Baugruppentyp
CTP Connection Termination Point Verbindungsanschlußpunkt
CUST-AL Customer Alarms Kundenalarme
CUST-CT Customer Control Kundenbedienungssteuerung
D4CTP Functional Unit “VC-4 Connection Funktionseinheit “VC-4 Endan-
Termination Point” schlußpunkt”
DB Data Base Datenbasis
DC Direct Current Gleichstrom
DCC Data Communication Channel Datenkommunikationskanal
DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus
DCCM Data Communication Channel for
Multiplex Section
DCCR Data Communication Channel for
Regeneration Section
DCN Data Communication Network
DEMUX Demultiplexer
DIN German Standards Institute Deutsches Institut für Normung
DNU Do Not Use
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DSP Domain Specific Part
DTMF Dual-Tone Multifrequency Mehrfrequenzwahlverfahren
E&M Exchange and Multiplex
E4 Eletrical Interface Signal 139264-kbit/s-Signal, das in
139264 kbit/s einen C3-Container eingefügt
wird
258 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
EBC Error Block Count

EBSL EIPS1 Backup Switch Line (Module)
ECC Embedded Communication Channel
ECCM ECC for Multiplex Section
ECCR ECC for Regeneration Section
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier Erbium-dotierter Faserverstärker
EDI Electronic Data Interchange Kommunikation zum Rückwand-
Flash-PROM
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Elektrisch löschbarer
Read-Only Memory programmierbarer
Festwertspeicher
EGB Electrostatic Discharge Elektrostatisch gefährdete
Bauteile
EIPS1 Electrical Interface
Plesiochronous/Synchronous
140 Mbit/s / STM-1 (Module)
EL Reminder of Alarm Erinnerungslampe
EM-OS Equipment Management Operations
System
EMC, EMV Electromagnetic Compatibility Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit
EOW Engineering Order Wire Dienstgesprächskanal
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only
Memory
ES Electrical Section or
Errored Second(s)
ES End System
ESD Electrostatic Discharge Elektrostatische Entladung
ESRT Equipment and Software Release Tabelle der HW- und
Table SW-Ausgabestände
ETS European Telecommunications
Standard
ETSI European Telecommunications Europäisches Institut für
Standards Institute Telekommunikationsstandards
EXC Excessive Bit Error Ratio
F Standardized Interface for Standardisierte Schnittstelle zum
Connection of the Operating Anschluß eines Bedienrechners
Terminal
FC/PC Connector Type Steckertyp
FE Functional Unit Funktionseinheit
FEBE Far-End Block Error
FEPROM Flash Eraseable Programmable
Read-Only Memory
FERF Far-End Receive Failure
FET Field Effect Transistor Feldeffekt-Transistor
FG Functional Group Funktionsgruppe
FIFO First-In First-Out
FO Fiber Optic Lichtwellenleiter
FOD Fiber Optic Distributor
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 259
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol

FTA File Transfer Area
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FU Functional Unit Funktionseinheit
GAN Global Area Network Globales Netz(werk)
GMT Greenwich Mean Time Westeuropäische Zeit
GND Ground Masse
GUI Graphical User Interface Grafische Benutzeroberfläche
HCS Functional Unit “Higher Order
Connection Supervision”
HDI Hard Disk Interface Schnittstelle für Festplatte
HEL Historical Event Log Ereignisliste
HEX Hexadecimal Hexadezimal
HO Higher Order
HO-FERF Higher Order Far-End Receive
Failure
HOI140M Higher Order Interface 140 Mbit/s
HPC Functional Unit “Higher Order Path Funktionseinheit “Higher Order
Cross-Connect” Path Cross-Connect”
HPOM Functional Unit “Higher Order Path Funktionseinheit “Higher Order
Overhead Monitoring” Path Overhead Monitoring”
HPT Functional Unit “Higher Order Path Funktionseinheit “Higher Order
Termination” Path Termination”
HPT-4 Functional Unit “Higher Order Path Funktionseinheit “Higher Order
Termination (VC-4)” Path Termination (VC-4)”
HPX Functional Group “Higher Order Funktionsgruppe “Higher Order
Path Cross-Connection” Path Cross-Connection”
HPXVC4 Functional Unit “Higher Order Path Funktionseinheit “Higher Order
Cross-Connection VC-4” Path Cross-Connection VC-4”
HRL High Return Loss (Connector Type) Steckertyp
HSUG Functional Unit “Higher Order
Supervisory Unequipped Generator”
HSUM Functional Unit “Higher Order Funktionseinheit “Überwachung
Supervisory Unequipped Monitor” auf nicht belegten VC-4-Pfad”
HW Hardware
ICB Internal Control Bus Interner Steuerungsbus
ICI Interface Control Information Anschaltungskontrollinformation
ICS Internal Communication System Internes Kommunikationssystem
ICU Internal Control Unit Interne Steuereinheit
ID Identification (Service Status) Betriebsanzeige
ID Interface Data Anschaltungsdaten
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IDP Initial Domain Part
IDU Interface Data Unit Anschaltungsdateneinheit
IEC International Electrotechnical Internationaler Elektrotechnischer
Commission Ausschuß
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Internationaler Verband der
Engineers Inc. Elektro- und Elektronik-
Ingenieure
260 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
IMN Installation Manual Montagehandbuch

IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source Interne Zeitreferenz zur
Multiplexverarbeitung
INT Internal Supervision (Summary Fault Interne Überwachungsanzeige
Indication)
IP Internet Protocol Internet Protokoll
IS Intermediate System Zwischensystem
ISDH Internal SDH Signal Internes SDH Signal
ISF ISDH Signal Fail Fehlerhaftes ISDH-Signal
ISO International Standards Internationale Organisation für
Organization Normung
ISU ISDH-Switch Unit Layer
ITMN Installation and Test Manual Inbetriebnahmehandbuch
ITU International Telecommunication Internationale Fernmeldeunion
Union
ITU-T Telecommunication Standardization
Sector of ITU
K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching
Channel defined in the SOH of a
STM-1
LAN Local Area Network Lokales Netzwerk
LAPD Link Access Procedure on
D Channel
LCT Local Craft Terminal Bedienrechner
LE Reminder Function for ZBBeo Erinnerungsfunktion für ZBBeo
LED Light Emitting Diode Lumineszenzdiode
LLC Logical Link Control as an OSI Pro- Logische Verbindungskontrolle
tocol (Sublayer of the ISO Data Link als OSI Protocol (Unterschicht der
Layer superimposed of the MAC ISO Datenverbindungsschicht
Sublayer) oberhalb der MAC-Unterschicht)
LOA Loss of Alignment Angleich-/Einstellverlust
LOF Loss of Frame (G.783) Rahmenverlust
LOL Loss of Lock Verriegelungsverlust
LOM Loss of Multiframe (G.783) Multirahmenverlust
LOP Loss of Pointer or Lower Order Path Zeigerverlust auf niederer Ebene
LOS Loss of Signal (G.783) Signalverlust
LPA Functional Unit “Lower Order Path Funktionseinheit “Lower Order
Adaptation” Path Adaptation”
LPA-4 Functional Unit “Lower Order Path Funktionseinheit “Lower Order
Adaptation (VC-4)” Path Adaptation (VC-4)”
LPC Lower Order Path Connection
LSS Circuit Breaker Leitungsschutzschalter
LTU Line Termination Unit (Module)
LWL Optical Fiber Lichtwellenleiter
LZE Light Signal Equipment Lichtzeicheneinrichtung
MAC Media Access Control Medium Zugriffskontrolle
MAC Address Media Access Control Address Medium Zugriffskontroll-Adresse
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 261
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
MAC Sublay- Media Access Control Sublayer as Medium Zugriffskontroll-Unter-

er an OSI Protocol (Sublayer of the ISO schicht (Unterschicht der ISO
Data Link Layer located below the Datenverbindungsschicht unterh-
LLC Sublayer) alb des LLC)
MAU Medium Attachment Unit (Übertragungs)Medium-An-
schlußeinheit
MAN Metropolitan Area Network Stadtbereichs Netz(werk)
MCF Message Communications Function
(Module)
MDI Medium Dependent Interface to Übertragungsmediumsabhän-
DCE gige Anschaltung Richtung DCE
MIB Management Information Base (Da- Netzelement-Management
tabase of all or most neccessary Datenbank (Datenbank aller oder
managed objects for a network man- vieler für ein Managementsystem
agement concept according to ISO) notwendige Objekte in Überein-
stimmung mit ISO)
MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace Fehlerhafte Pfaddurchschaltung
MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Termination
MMI Man-Machine Interface Mensch-Maschine-Schnittstelle
MMN Maintenance Manual Wartungshandbuch
MS Multiplex Section (G.783)
MSA Functional Unit “Multiplex Section Funktionseinheit “Anpassung des
Adaptation” Multiplexabschnittes”
MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication
Signal
MSFERF Multiplex Section Far-End Receive
Failure (G.782, G.783)
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection
MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Func-
tion
MSPTF-16 Multiplex Section Protection
Termination Function STM-16
MST Functional Unit “Multiplex Section Funktionseinheit “Multiplex
Termination” Section Termination”
MSTTP Functional Unit “Multiplex Section Funktionseinheit “Multiplex
Trail Termination Point” Section Trail Termination Point”
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTG Multiplexer Timing Generator
MTS Multiplexer Timing Source Multiplexer Zeitbasis
NC/P Network Connection Protection
NCT Network Craft Terminal Erweiterter Bedienrechner
NE Network Element Netzelement
NE-UniGATE Basic-Management-Software for Basis-Management Software für
Network Element Netzwerkelemente
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert
NSAP Network Service Access Point in ac- Netzadresse in Anlehnung an
cordance to OSI terminology OSI- Terminologie
262 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
NUBAT Battery Voltage (negative)

NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access RAM für nichtflüchtige Daten
Memory
OAS Optical Amplifier Section Optischer Verstärker-Bereich
OB Optical Booster (Module)
OHA Overhead Access Module
OHCC Overhead Cross-Connection
OHF Overhead-Function
OH-IF Overhead Interface
OHX Overhead Cross-Connect Verschaltung der
Overhead-Kanäle
OIS1 Optical Interface Synchronous
STM-1 (Module)
STM-16 (Module)
OIS16R Optical Interface Synchronous
STM-16 for Regenerator (Module)
STM-4 (Module)
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OMN Operating Manual Bedienungshandbuch
O.N.E Optimized Network Evolution
(VISION O.N.E)
OP Optical Preamplifier (Module)
OS Operations System Betriebsführungssystem
OSC Oscillator Oszillator
OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio Optisches Signal-/
Rauschverhältnis
P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal
139264 kbit/s
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBUS Protection Bus Ersatzschaltungsbus
PBX Private Branch Exchange Private Nebenstellenanlage
PCI Protocol Control Information Protokollkontrollinformation
PCS Plesiochronous Connection
Supervision
PCU Peripheral Control Unit Baugruppenrechner
PCUC Peripheral Control Unit in SLR PCU im SLR
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Plesiochrone Digitale Hierarchie
(G.783)
PDH-LT Line Termination 140 Mbit/s
PDH-MUX PDH-Multiplexer
PDU Protocol Data Unit (G.784) Protokolldateneinheit (G.784)
PE Protection Earthing Schutzerdung
PET Possible Equipping Table Tabelle zur möglichen
Bestückung
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLL Phase Locked Loop Phasenregelschleife
PLM Payload Mismatch
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 263
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
PM Performance Management or
Performance Monitoring
POH Path Overhead (G.782) (G.783)
POM Path Overhead Monitoring
PPI Functional Unit “Plesiochronous Port Funktionseinheit “Plesiochronous
Interface” Port Interface”
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PROM Programmable Read-only Memory
PSU Power Supply Unit Stromversorgung
PSUTP Power Supply Unit Tributary
Protection Access (Module)
PUBAT Battery Voltage (positive)
Q Interface to a Telecommunication Schnittstelle zum TMN
Management Network
Q3 Interface level 3 to a Telecommuni- Schnittstelle Version 3 zum TMN
cation Management Network
Q3/CMIP Interface level 3 to a Telecommuni- Schnittstelle Version 3 zum TMN /
cation Management Network / (with) (mit) allgemeinem Management
Common Management Information Informationsprotokoll
Protocol
Q3/CMIS Interface level 3 to a Telecommuni- Schnittstelle Version 3 zum TMN /
cation Management Network / (with) (mit) allgemeinem Management
Common Management Information Informationssystem
System
Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System Q-Schnittstelle für Bedienrechner
via Ethernet-LAN oder Netzmanagementsystem
über Ethernet-LAN
QD2 RS485 TMN Interface for Deutsche RS485-TMN-Schnittstelle für
Telekom, Category 2 Deutsche Telekom, Kategorie 2
QD2B3 Q-Interface for Operating Q-Schnittstelle für Bedienrechner
Terminal or Network oder Netzmanagementsystem
Management System über Ethernet-LAN
QD2F Standardized Interface for Standardisierte Schnittstelle zum
Terminal
QECC Q-Interface via DCC
Q-F Standardized Interface for Standardisierte Schnittstelle zum
Terminal
QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT
Qx Interface to a Telecommunication
Management Network
RAM Random-Access Memory Schreib-/Lese-Speicher mit
direktem Zugriff
RDI Remote Defect Indicator
REI Remote Error Indicator
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer
ROM Read-Only Memory Lesespeicher
RS Regenerator Section
264 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

Rows 1-3 from Section Overhead in
STM-1 (G.782) (G.783)
RST Functional Unit “Regenerator Funktionseinheit “Regenerator
Section Termination” Section Termination”
RT Acknowledge Key Rückstelltaste
RTC Real Time Clock Echtzeituhr
RTF-16 Functional Group “Regenerator Funktionsgruppe für den
Transport Function” STM-16 optischen STM-16-Port
RTG Functional Unit “Regenerator Timing Funktionseinheit “Regenerator
Generator” Timing Generator”
RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier
RxDeg Receive Degraded Signal Abgeschwächtes Empfänger-
signal
SC Connector Type Steckertyp
SCU Synchronous Control Unit (Module)
SD Signal Degrade (G.782) Abgeschwächtes Signal
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchrone Digitale Hierarchie
SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface
SDU Service Data Unit Dienst-Dateneinheit
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
SEMF Synchronous Equipment
Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second(s)
SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing Takterzeugung
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Taktgenerator
Generator
SETS Functional Group ”Synchronous Funktionsgruppe
Equipment Timing Source” “Takterzeugung”
SF Signal Fail Signalausfall
SHR Self-Healing Ring Selbstheilender Ring
SigVt Signal Distributor Signalverteiler
SISA Supervisory and Information System
for Local and Remote Areas
SISA-0 Functional Group for Software Funktionsgruppe “Software
Management, Date/Time Management, Datum/Uhrzeit”
SL Synchronous Line Equipment Synchrones LWL-System
SL series 1 First Generation of SDH Fiber-Optic SDH-Lichtwellenleitersystem der
System 1. Generation
SL series 2 Second Generation of SDH SDH-Lichtwellenleitersystem der
Fiber-Optic System 2. Generation
SL-1 First Generation of SDH Fiber-Optic SDH-Lichtwellenleitersystem der
System 1. Generation
SL-2 Second Generation of SDH SDH-Lichtwellenleitersystem der
Fiber-Optic System 2. Generation
SL16 Synchronous Fiber-Optic System for Synchrones Leitungssystem für
STM-16 Signals STM-16-Signale
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 265
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
SL16-2 Second Generation of SDH SDH-Lichtwellenleitersystem der

Fiber-Optic System for 2. Generation für STM-16-Signale
STM-16 Signals
SL4 Synchronous Fiber-Optic System for Synchrones Leitungssystem für
STM-4 Signals STM-4-Signale
SLD Synchronous Add/Drop Line Synchroner Add/Drop-Leitungs-
Multiplexer multiplexer
SLD16 Synchronous Add/Drop Line Synchroner Add/Drop-Leitungs-
Multiplexer STM-16 multiplexer STM-16
SLD16-2.4 Synchronous Add/Drop Line Synchroner Add/Drop-Leitungs-
Multiplexer of SL Series 2, multiplexer des SL16-Systems
Release 4 der 2. Generation, Release 4
SLD16E Synchronous Add/Drop Line
Multiplexer Extended
SLR16 Synchronous Line Regenerator Synchroner Leitungsregenerator
STM-16 STM-16
SLR16-2.2 Synchronous Line Regenerator Synchroner Leitungsregenerator
STM-16, Release 2.2 STM-16, Release 2.2
SLR4 Synchronous Line Regenerator Synchroner Leitungsregenerator
STM4 STM-4
SLT Synchronous Line Terminal Synchrones Leitungsendgerät
SLT16 Synchronous Line Terminal STM-16 Synchrones Leitungsendgerät
STM-16
SLT16C Synchronous Line Terminal STM-16
Compact
SLT4 Synchronous Line Terminal STM-4 Synchrones Leitungsendgerät
STM-4
SM Synchronous Multiplexer Synchroner Multiplexer
SM1/4 Synchronous Multiplexer, Hierarchy
Level STM-1/STM-4
SMA Synchronous Multiplexer Access
SMA1/4 Synchronous Multiplexer, Access
Level STM-1/STM-4
SMN-OS Synchronous Management Network
Operations System
SMPTF-16 Functional Group “Terminal Funktionsgruppe für optischen
Transport Function” STM-16-Port
SMT1D Synchronous Multiplexer Terminal, Synchroner Terminal-Multiplexer
Level 1
SNAP Sub-Network Attachment Point Subnetz Zugangspunkt
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection Subnetz Ersatzzugangsverbind-
ung
SNL Switching Network for Line Systems
(Module)
SOH Section Overhead (G.782)
SONET Synchronous Optical Network Synchrones optisches Netz
(uses American Standard) (nach amerikanischem Standard)
S/P Serial to Parallel Converter Seriell/Parallel-Umsetzer
SPB-1 Functional Group “Synchronous Port Funktionsgruppe “Elektrischer
Block STM-1 (electrical) STM-1-Port”
266 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
SPB-1 Synchronous Port Block STM-1

SPI Functional Unit “SDH Physical Funktionseinheit “SDH Physical
Interface (G.782, G.783)” Interface (G.782, G.783)”
SPO Spontaneous Alarm Spontanalarm
SPRING Shared Protection Ring
SQM Sequence Mismatch Reihenfolgefehler
SR Synchronous Radio Richtfunk
SRAP Subrack Alarm Panel Baugruppenträger-Signalfeld
SRAP-PI Subrack Alarm Panel - Phone Baugruppenträger-Signalfeld und
Indication Telefonanzeigefeld
SSF Server Signal Fail Schwerwiegender Signalfehler
SSM Synchronization Status Message Meldung des
Synchronisationszustandes
SSMB Synchronization Status Message Byte SSM
Byte
SSU Synchronous Source Unit (Timing Synchrontakt Quellgenerator
Generator)
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module Basissignal der Synchronen
Level 1 Digitalen Hierarchie
(155,520 Mbit/s),
Hierarchiestufe 1
STM-16 Synchronous Transport Module
Level 16 (2.488 Mbit/s)
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module
Level N
STS Synchronous Transport System
(uses American Standard)
SW Software
SXC Synchronous Cross-Connect
T0 System Clock Systemtakt
T3 Input for External Clock Reference Eingang für externes
Signal Takt-Referenzsignal
T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal Ausgang für Takt-Referenzsignal
TCN Threshold Crossing Notification Meldung für Schwellwertüber-
schreitung
TCP/IP Transport Connection Protocol /
Internet Protocol
TD Transmit Degraded Verringerte Sendeleistung
TDEG Transmit Degraded Verringerte Sendeleistung
TED Technical Description Technische Beschreibung
TELKAT Interface to TMN Schnittstelle zum TMN
TF Transmit Fail Ausfall des Sendesignals
TIF Telemetry Interface Access
(Module)
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
T-LCT TransXpress Local Craft Terminal Bedienrechner für
TransXpress-Netzelemente
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 267
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
TMN Telecommunications Management Netzmanagementsystem

Network
TMP Time Period/Total Measurement Dauer des gemessenen Intervalls
Period (in Sekunden)
T-NCT TransXpress Network Craft Terminal Erweiterter Bedienrechner für
TransXpress-Netzelemente
TP Termination Point
TransXpress Product Family Consisting of SL, Produktfamilie bestehend aus SL,
SMA, SR, SXC, WL SMA, SR, SXC, WL
TSAP Transport Service Access Point
TSD Trail Signal Degraded Gestörtes Pfadsignal
TSF Trail Signal Fail Fehlendes Pfadsignal
TSL Trail Signal Label
TTE Trail Trace Error Fehlerhafte Pfadkennung
TTF Functional Group “Transport Funktionsgruppe “Transport
Termination Function” Termination Function”
TTF-16 Functional Group “Transport Funktionsgruppe “Transport
Termination Function STM-16” Termination Function STM-16”
TTI Trail Trace Identifier Pfadkennung
TTIP Trail Trace Identifier Processing TTI-Verarbeitung
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic Transistor-Transistor-Logik
TTP Trail Termination Point
TUG Tributary Unit Group (G.782)
TxDeg Transmit Degrade Signal Abgeschwächtes Sendesignal
TXFAIL Transmit Failure Fehlendes Sendesignal
UAS Unavailable Second(s)
UAT Unavailable Time (G.784)
UBAT Battery Voltage Batteriespannung
UCU Universal Control Unit Steuerung
ULED Feeding Bus for Card LEDs Hilfsspannung für die
Baugruppen-LEDs
UNEQ Alarm “VC-4 Path Unequipped” Alarm “VC-4-Pfad nicht belegt”
UNIX Trademark of UNIX System
Laboratories Incorporated
USI User Interface
VC Virtual Container (G.782, G.783)
VC-4 Virtual Container Level 4
VC-4-UNEQ VC-4 Path Unequipped VC-4-Pfad nicht belegt
VC4TTP VC-4 Trail Termination Point
VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VDD Operating Voltage Betriebsspannung
VDE Verein deutscher Elektrotechniker
VtM1 Distributor Module Verteilermodul
WAN Wide Area Network Weitverkehrs Netz(werk)
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WL Optical Multi-Wavelength Line Optisches Wellenlängen-
System Multiplexsystem
268 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
WLP Optical Line Amplifier Optischer Zwischenverstärker

ZA Disturbance Alarm Zentrale Anzeige
ZA(A) High-Priority Alarm Dringender Alarm für ZBBeo
ZA(B) Low-Priority Alarm Nichtdringender Alarm für ZBBeo
ZBBeo Central Service Observation Zentrale Betriebsbeobachtung
Equipment
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 269
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
270 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1
Commissioning ITMN
SLD/T16-2.5
13 Expansions, Operator’s Notes

Dear reader
With this chapter we provide you with the option of storing documentation about speci-
fied corrections or expansions in the manuals.
In this chapter you can also keep the corrections needed for error messages as well as
operator’s notes which are issued and distributed by the editorial offices or other depart-
ments.
If need be, we will include the necessary, summarised corrections and expansions in a
new issue of the manuals and also the CD-ROM or take these into account in the next
release.
A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1 271
ITMN Commissioning
SLD/T16-2.5
272 A30808-X3580-H502-1-76D1

ITMN e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ITMN e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning

f Important Notice on Product Safety

The same text in German:

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2000.

Issued by the Information and Communication Networks Group

Technical modifications possible.

2 Protective Measures, Handling /

4 Mechanical Configuration and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4.5 Power Supply and the Power Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5 Preparation of the Modules

5.3.1.6 Switching Network Line (SNL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

6 Switching on the Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

6.4.1.3 Boot Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7 Connecting the Operating Terminal to a Network Element and

8 Configuring the Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8.1.1 Options Setting Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

8.12.4.1 Configuration of the Ethernet Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

8.15.8 Configuring OIS16-2 (4-Fibre) Modules for Squelching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

8.15.17.9Other Functions Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

9 Extending the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

10 Measurements, Test Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

11 Terminal Assignments, Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

11.6 Terminal Assignments

13 Expansions, Operator’s Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Fig. 7.14 “NE-Proxy - Communication” Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

1 Notes on this Documentation

1.1 Documentation Overview

• Technical Description (TED)

• Installation and Test Manual (ITMN)

• Operating Manual (OMN)

• Maintenance Manual (MMN)

1.2 Symbols Used in the Documentation

1.2.1 Symbol for Warnings

1.2.2 Symbols for Notes

☞ Cross reference to other chapters in this manual or cross reference to other

1.2.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs

1.3 Notes on Licensed Software

1.4 Form for your Ideas, Proposals and Corrections

The following points are of particular importance to us:

SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Name:

Fax +49 89 722 57315 ..........................................................................

I am using this documentation as I am responsible for the following areas

2 Protective Measures, Handling /

2.1 Protective Measures / Schutzmaßnahmen

2.1.1 Electrical Fuses / Elektrische Sicherungen

2.1.2 Protection Against Excessive High Contact Voltages /

2.1.3 Protection Against Excessive Overvoltage

to the user / customer interfaces! dere Geräte an die Anwender-/

en in Chapter 2.1.7! entsprechend Kapitel 2.1.7!

2.1.4 Isolations and Isolation Materials /

2.1.5 Fire Protection / Brandschutz

2.1.6 Protection Against Extraneous Laser Light

Warning Label Warnschild

Warning Label Warnschild

Nevertheless, in view of possible malfunc- Unter Berücksichtigung von vorherseh-

Class 3A Laser Product Laser Klasse 3A Nicht in den Strahl

If it cannot be avoided − in an exceptional Falls die Gefährdungsklasse 3A im Aus-

2.1.7 Earthing or Grounding and Potential Balancing /

⇒ If subracks are mounted in racks, ⇒ Beim Einbau von Baugruppen-

⇒ The grounding must be effective as ⇒ Die Erdung muss bestehen blei-

2.2 Handling the Subrack /

2.2.1 Front Door of the Device / Geräte-Vordertür

2.2.2 Equipment Cooling / Gerätekühlung